EFTA01225286

SOFTWARE HOUSE From Tyco Security Products C•CURE 9000 Version 2.50 Data Views Guide UM-13.1R0 EFTA01225286 C•CURE and Software House are registered trademarks of Tyco Security Products. The trademarks, logos, and service marks displayed on this document are registered in the United States [or other countries]. Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Tyco Security Products will aggressively enforce its intellectual property rights to the fullest extent of the law, including pursuit of criminal prosecution wherever necessary. MI trademarks not owned by Tyco Security Products are the property of their respective owners, and are used with permission or allowed under applicable laws. Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all products include all features. Availability varies by region; contact your regional sales manager. Software version: 250 Document Number: UM-134 Revision Number: RO Release Date: December 2015 This manual is proprietary information of Software House. Unauthorized reproduction of any portion of this manual is prohibited. The material in this manual is for information purposes only. It is subject to change without notice. Software House assumes no responsibility for incorrect information this manual may contain. O 2015 Tyco Security Products. MI rights reserved. EFTA01225287 Table of Contents Preface 11 How to Use this Manual 12 Finding More Information 13 Conventions 14 Software House Customer Support Center 15 Chapter 1 - The Data Views Pane 17 Data Views Pane Overview 18 Data Views Pane Tasks 18 Data Views Pane Tasks 19 Creating a Data Views Pane Object 19 Deleting a Data Views Pane Object 19 Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects 20 Data Views Object Context Menu 20 Exporting Records on Dynamic Views to XML/CSV 22 Chapter 2 - Application Layout 25 Application Layout Overview 26 Application Layout Editor 27 Accessing the Application Layout Editor 27 Application Layout Editor General Tab 27 Application Layout Options Tab 29 Application Layout View Preferences Tab 31 Application Layout Viewers 33 Activity Viewer 35 Activity Viewer Properties 35 Assess Event Application Layout 37 Document Viewer 38 Event Details Viewer 39 Find in Journal Viewer 39 Assess Map Viewer 40 Live Video Viewer 41 Query Viewer 42 Recorded Video Viewer 42 Report Viewer 43 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa GukM 3 EFTA01225288 Event Viewer 45 Event Viewer Properties 45 Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout 47 The Explorer Bar 48 Explorer Bar Properties 48 Non Hardware Status 49 Hardware Status 49 Video 50 External Applications 50 Explorer Bar Tasks 50 Object Viewer 54 Object Viewer Properties 54 Swipe and Show Viewer 55 SWipe and Show Legacy Viewer 55 Swipe and Show Default Viewers 58 Swipe and Show Viewer Tasks 59 Viewer Controls 64 Application layout Tasks 65 Configuring an Application Layout 65 Event Viewer Tasks 66 Activity Viewer Tasks 67 Adding a Pane to the Layout 69 Adding a Viewer/Viewer Tab to a Pane 69 Adding an Object Viewer to an Application Layout 70 Creating an Assess Event Layout 70 Creating a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout 72 Modifying an Application Layout 74 Removing a Pane from the Layout 75 Removing a Viewer/Viewer Tab from a Pane 75 Locking the Layout 76 Unlocking the Layout 76 Auto Hiding and Pinning Panes 76 Resizing and Moving Panes in the Layout 77 Chapter 3 - Dynamic Views 79 Dynamic Views Overview 80 Dynamic View Editor 82 Accessing the Dynamic View Editor 82 Dynamic View Editor Tasks 83 Configuring a Dynamic View 83 Choosing Dynamic View Settings 84 How to Save a Dynamic View 85 Default Grouping of Dynamic View Rows 88 Setting a Default View 89 Creating a Copy of a Dynamic View 90 4 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide EFTA01225289 Dynamic View Editor Definitions 91 Dynamic View Editor Fields 91 Dynamic View Editor Buttons 92 Dynamic View Viewer 93 Default Dynamic Views 93 Dynamic View Viewer Tasks 94 Adding or Removing Columns in a Dynamic View 94 Changing Column Order and Width in Dynamic Views 95 Using Dynamic View Viewer Tabs 96 Filtering Dynamic View Information Using the Filter Bar 96 Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects 97 Grouping Dynamic View Information 99 Retrieving the Query That Created a Dynamic View 101 Sorting Dynamic View Information 101 Printing Information from Dynamic Views 101 Editing In Place with Dynamic Views 102 Editing Records on Dynamic Views Using Set Property 102 Exporting Dynamic View Contents to Excel (MSC) 103 Using Card View 104 Dynamic View Viewer Definitions 105 Dynamic View Toolbar 105 Dynamic View Tabs 106 Dynamic View Filter Bar 106 Chapter 4 - Maps 109 Maps Overview 110 Converting Legacy Maps 110 Features 110 Map Editor 111 Working with C •CURE 9000 Maps 111 Convening Legacy Maps 111 Legacy Maps 113 The Legacy Map Editor Toolbar 113 Legacy Map Viewer 116 Accessing the Map Editor 118 Accessing the Map Editor for Maps 118 Accessing the Map Editor for Legacy Maps 118 The Map Editor Toolbar 120 Map Icon Status Toolbar 121 Map Editor Tasks 123 Creating a Maps Template 123 Importing a Maps Graphic 124 Importing a Drawing File into C •CURE 9000 125 Configuring and Saving a Map 127 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide 5 EFTA01225290 Map Layers 127 Adding a Layer to the Map 128 Deleting a Map Layer 129 Setting the Active Map Layer 129 Showing or Hiding Map Layers 130 Changing the Map Zoom Level 130 Fitting the Map in the Window 131 Adding an Object Icon to the Map 131 Editing an Icon on the Map 136 Adding an Icon to the Icon Template Library 137 Selecting an Icon on the Map 138 Map Icon Context Menu 139 Printing a Map 140 Clearing the Map 140 Modifying a Map 140 Opening a Map from an Icon 141 Map Viewer 143 Map Viewer Toolbar 143 Chapter 5 - Query 145 Query Overview 146 Query Editor 147 Accessing the Query Editor 147 Query Editor General Tab 148 Query General Tab Definitions 148 Query General Tab Criteria Table Definitions 149 Query General Tab Buttons 151 Query Editor Advanced Tab 152 Query Advanced Tab Definitions 153 Using Wildcard Characters in Queries 154 Using Wild Card Characters 154 Using C•CURE 9000 Query Filters 154 Using Special Characters in Queries 157 Control 0 (CTRL zero) 157 Period Character (.) with F2 157 Query Tasks 159 Creating a Query 159 Creating a Query Template 160 Configuring a Query 161 Modifying a Query 162 Creating a Copy of a Query 163 Adding Query Criteria to a Query 163 Using the WITH Operator 167 Using Add/Add Block Buttons to Configure a Query 168 Removing Query Criteria from a Query 170 Running a Query 170 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide EFTA01225291 Complex Queries 172 Interpreting Unexpected Results 173 Performing a Quick Search 175 Defining a New Query from Advanced Search 177 Defining an Instant Query from Advanced Search 178 Query Parameter Prompts 180 Chapter 6 - Reporting 185 Reporting Overview 186 Accessing the Report-Related Editors 189 The Report Service 190 Basic Reporting Tasks 191 Creating a Report 191 Creating a Report Template 191 Configuring a Report 192 Running a Report 193 Scheduling a Report 194 Saving a Report and its Results 195 Creating a Copy of a Report 1% Exporting a Report Result 197 Report Editor .201 Report Editor Tasks 202 Viewing a List of Reports 202 Modifying a Report 202 Report Tab 204 Report Tab Tasks 207 Choosing a Report Type and Sub Type 208 Using the Class Selector 208 Using the Field Selector 209 Selecting Report Features 210 Creating Sub-Reports 211 Report Layout Design Tab 212 Report Editor Layout Design Tab Toolbar Definitions 212 Report Editor Layout Design Tab Grid Definitions 214 Report Editor Layout Design Tab Properties Sheet Definitions 214 Report Editor Layout Design Tab Context Menu Definitions 217 Report Page Settings 219 Report Layout Design Tab Tasks 223 Adding a Field to the Layout .223 Adding a Header or Footer 223 Adjusting the Report Settings 224 Adding a Page Break 224 Adding a Text Box, Picture, Shape, or Line .225 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide 7 EFTA01225292 Report Layout Preview Tab 226 Report Layout Preview Tab Tasks 228 Viewing a Report Preview 228 Printing a Report Preview 228 Report Form Editor 230 Pre-defined Report Forms 230 Report Form Layout Design Tab 231 Report Form Editor Tasks 232 Creating a Report Form 232 Creating a Report Form Template 232 Creating a Copy of a Report Form 233 Viewing a List of Report Forms .234 Using a Report Form to Format a Report 234 Report Form Layout Design Tab Tasks 235 Report Form Layout Preview Tab 236 Report Form Viewer 237 Report Result Overview 238 Report Result Editor 239 Report Result Result Tab 239 Report Result Query Tab .240 Report Result Tasks 242 Viewing a List of Report Results 242 Deleting a Report Result 242 Deleting a Report Result 243 Report/Report Result Viewers .245 Exporting a Report Result 248 Export Report Document Dialog Box 249 Appendix A - Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Views 253 Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views 254 Pre-defined Reports 255 Pre-defined Queries 262 Pre-defined Dynamic Views 268 Using the Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views 269 Example of Using a Pre-defined Report 270 Appendix B - Map Conversion 275 Map Conversion 276 Map Conversion Using a Remote Client 276 Converting Legacy Maps to the New Maps Format 277 Troubleshooting Map Conversion 281 8 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide EFTA01225293 View Log 281 Reset Selected 281 Map Conversion Definitions .283 Map Status 284 Index 285 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide 9 EFTA01225294 10 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225295 Preface This C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide is for new and experienced security system users. The manual describes the software features on the C•CURE 9000 Administration Client Data Views menu and presents procedures for configuring and using them. The manual assumes that you have already installed the C•CURE 9000 and have familiarized yourself with the basic C•CURE 9000 information provided in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. In this preface How to Use this Manual 12 Finding More Information 13 Conventions 14 Software House Customer Support Center 15 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Preface 11 EFTA01225296 How to Use this Manual How to Use this Manual This manual includes the following chapters that provide information about each of the Data Views menu selections. Chapter 1: The Data Views Pane This chapter provides an overview of the Data Views pane. It provides instructions for creating, deleting, viewing a list of objects, and exporting Data Views pane objects. Chapter 2: Application Layout This chapter provides an overview of the Application Layout, describing how you can configure available viewers and toolbars to make up a Monitoring Station display. Chapter 3: Dynamic Views This chapter describes how to configure C•CURE 9000 Dynamic Views to display C•CURE 9000 objects in a List or Card view, allowing you to view, edit, group, or filter objects in the list. Chapter 4: Maps This chapter describes how to configure C•CURE 9000 Maps, linking access control with the floor plans of your facility and allowing you to monitor security objects in real time. Chapter 5: Query This chapter describes how to configure C•CURE 9000 Queries to find information about the C•CURE 9000 objects. Chapter 6: Reporting This chapter describes how to use the Reporting functionality in C•CURE 9000: to create and configure reports; to configure Report Forms to provide consistent report headers and footers; and to view, print, and store your Report Results. Appendix A: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Views This appendix describes the C•CURE 9000 pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views and the ways to use them. Appendix B: Map Conversion This appendix describes the process of converting Legacy Maps to the new Map format, using the Map Conversion Utility, CCureMapConverter.exe. 12 Preface C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225297 Finding More Information Finding More Information You can access C•CURE 900(1 manuals and online Help for more information about C•CURE 9000. Manuals C•CURE 9000 software manuals are available in Adobe PDF format on the C•CURE 9000 DVD. You can access the manuals if you copy the appropriate PDF files from the C•CURE 9000 Installation DVD English \ Manuals folder. The available C•CURE 9000 and Software House manuals are listed in the C•CURE 9000 Installation and Upgrade Guide, and appear as hyperlinks in the online.pdf file on the C•CURE 9000 DVD English \ Manuals folder. These manuals are also available from the Software House Member Center website Online Help You can access C•CURE 9000 Help by pressing Fl or clicking Help from the menu bar in the Administration/Monitoring Station applications. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Preface 13 EFTA01225298 Conventions Conventions This manual uses the following text formats and symbols. Convention Meaning Bold T his font indicates screen elements, and also indicateswhen you should take a direct action in a procedure. Bold font describesone of the following items: • A command or character to type, or • A button or option on the =sea to press, or • A key on the keyboard to press • A screen element or name blue color text Indicates a hyperlink to a URL, or across-reference to a figure, table, or section in this guide. Regular kak font Indicates a new term. <text> Indicates a variable. The following items are used to indicate important information. Indicates a note. Notes call attention to any item of information that may be of special importance. NOTE Indicates an alternate method of performing a task. TIP Indicates a caution. A caution contains information essential to avoid damage to the system. A caution can pertain to hardware or software. Indicates a warning. A warning contains information that advises users that failure to avoid a specific action could result in physical harm to the user or to the hardware. sine Indicates a danger. A danger contains information that users must know to avoid death or serious injury. 14 Preface C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225299 Software House Customer Support Center Software House Customer Support Center Telephone Technical Support During the period of the Agreement, the following guidelines apply: • Software House accepts service calls only from employees of the Systems Integrator of Record for the installation associated with the support inquiry. Before Calling Ensure that you: • Are the Dealer of record for this account. • Are certified by Software House for this product. • Have a valid license and current Software Support Agreement (SSA) for the system. • Have your system serial number available. • Have your certification number available. Hours Normal Support Hours Monday through F riday. 8:00 to 8:00 , EST. Except holidays. Emergency Support Hours 24 hours/day, seven days a week, 365 days/year. Requires Enhanced SSA"7 x2r Standby Telephone Support (emergency) provided to Certified Technicians. For another customers. billable on time and materials basis. Minimum charges appty- See MSRP. Phone For telephone support contact numbers for all regions. see C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Preface 15 EFTA01225300 Software House Customer Support Center 16 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225301 The Data Views Pane This chapter introduces the Data Views Pane in C•CURE 9000. In this chapter Data Views Pane Overview 18 Data Views Pane Tasks 19 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter1 17 EFTA01225302 Data Views Pane Overview Data Views Pane Overview The C•CURE 9000 Data Views pane provides access to objects that allow you to view and use information about security objects in a variety of ways. ■ Application Layout Editor on Page 27 - allows you to create Monitoring Station layouts that are customized for your Operators. Layouts can include object viewers, the activity viewer, event viewers, the swipe and show control, and live video cameras. ■ Dynamic View Editor on Page 82 - allows you to display information about C•CURE 9000 objects as lists that dynamically update as objects change. They provide a context menu that allows you to perform actions on these objects, such as delete, export, change properties, add to a group, or find in the journal. ■ Map Editor on Page 111 - you can import, format, and display Maps in C•CURE 9000. You can even add dynamic icons to the Maps that represent the status of C•CURE 9000 objects such as doors, cameras, readers, and other security objects. ■ Query Editor on Page 147 - allows you to search the C•CURE 9000 database to find information about C•CURE 9000 objects. You can create queries and either display the results in Dynamic Views, or incorporate the queries into Reports. ■ Report Editor on Page 201 - allows you to design, run, and view reports about C•CURE 9000 objects. Data Views Pane Tasks ■ Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20 ■ Exporting Records on Dynamic Views to XML/CSV on Page 22 ■ Exporting Dynamic View Contents to Excel (.XLSX) on Page 103 18 Chapter1 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225303 Data Views Pane Tasks Data Views Pane Tasks You perform the following tasks in the Data Views Pane: ■ Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20 ■ Exporting Records on Dynamic Views to XML/CSV on Page 22 ■ Exporting Dynamic View Contents to Excel (.XLSX) on Page 103 Creating a Data Views Pane Object You can create a new Data Views pane object for use by C•CURE 9000 users. From the Data Views pane, you can create the following objects: ■ Application Layout - a customized arrangement of C•CURE 9000 application components that can be assigned to an Operator. ■ Dynamic View - display lists of objects with sorting, filtering, and grouping capability. ■ Map - display Maps with icons that update to reflect object status. ■ Query - create a new Query to search for objects in the C•CURE 9000 database, using filters to narrow the search. ■ Report - create detailed reports about any C•CURE 9000 object, customize the appearance of reports, print reports, view reports, save reports for later printing/viewing. ■ Report Form - create re-usable report header/footer layouts to give your reports a consistent look and feel. To Create a Data Views Pane Object 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select the type of object you wish to create from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click New to create a new object. The editor for the object type opens. 4. Configure the object using the tabs and fields on the object's editor. For details on configuring your object, see: ■ Configuring an Application Layout on Page 65. ■ Configuring a Dynamic View on Page 83. ■ Configuring and Saving a Map on Page 127. ■ Configuring a Query on Page 161. ■ Configuring a Report on Page 192. 5. To save your new object, click Save and Close. Deleting a Data Views Pane Object You can delete a Data Views pane object from C•CURE 9000 if it is no longer needed. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 1 19 EFTA01225304 Data Views Pane Tasks To Delete a Data Views Pane Object 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select the type of object you wish to delete from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click &a to view a list of existing objects and select the object(s) you wish to delete. 4. Right-click a selected object and choose Delete from the context menu. 5. Click Yes in the dialog box that appears to confirm that you want to delete the object(s), or No to cancel the deletion. A dialog box appears listing each of the objects you deleted, and any relevant error messages are listed. You can print this information by clicking Print, or email this information by clicking Email (to the recipient specified in the System Variable Email Address —see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide). 6. Click OK to close the dialog box. Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects You can view a list of all objects of a Data Views pane type, such as Application Layouts. The list is a Dynamic View that you can sort, filter, and group. -mx To View a List of a Data Views Pane Object Type 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select the object type you wish to view from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click Elio to open a Dynamic View listing all objects of that type. 4. You can sort, filter, and group items in the list. You can right-click an object in the list to open the context menu and perform any of the functions on that menu. See the Dynamic Views Overview on Page 80 for more information on using Dynamic Views. 5. If you right-click an object in a Dynamic View, a context menu appears listing the actions you can perform on that object, as described in Data Views Object Context Menu on Page 20. Data Views Object Context Menu When you right-click a row in a Dynamic View, a context menu appears to let you perform actions on the object in that row. Table 1 on Page 21 describes the context menu selections for a typical Dynamic View. The Context Menu items shown here are typical. Some Data Views objects may have additional NOTE Context Menu selections that are not shown here, or they may have fewer selections available. Some menu items are not available if more than one row has been selected. Object-specific aspects of an object's context menu are described in that object's chapter. 20 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225305 Data Views Pane Tasks Table 1: Data Views °Wet.% Context Menu Menu Description Item Edit if you choose this option, the view you selected is displayed in the appropriate editor. Example: if you are looking at a Personnel Dynamic View. and you choose Edit from the context menu, the Personnel Editor opens to let you edit thisobject. View If you choose this option. the view you selected is displayed in a new tab in the Content pane. Popup View if you choose this option, the view you selected is displayed in a new free-floating window. View in if you choose this option, the view you selected replaces the Dynamic View that is currentty displayed in the current tab. Current Tab Delete Allows you to delete an object from the database if you have the appropriate Privileges. Adiabg box appears asking you to confirm the deletion. Click Yea to perform the Deletion, or No to cancel the deletion. Adiabg box appears listing each of the items you deleted, and any relevant error messages are listed.You can print this information by clicking Print, or email this information by clicking Email (to the recipient specified in the System Variable Email Address - see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide) Set Displays a dialog box that allows you to select a field from the object and assign a value to that field. Fields that are read-onty or that property you are restricted by Privileges from changing are not selectable from the dialog box. See Default Dynamic Views on Page 93 for more information. Add to Displays a dialog box that allows you to choose a Group object to add this object to. If no groups exist that match with the object Group selected, the dialog box is blank and you cannot perform the function. Find in Opens a query that you can modify to search the database for any Audit Log records that reference this particular object in the Audit Log Dynamic View list. NOTE: If there is no Audit Log information related to thisobject within the specified date/time range. the Dynamic View will be empty. Export Click this menu selection to Open an Export...to XML or CSV file dialog box to export the selected object(s) to either an XML or a Selection CSV file. This allows you to quickty and Gasify coats XMLJCSV reports on the selected data. For further information and procedures, see Default Dynamic Views on Page 93. Find in Opens a query that you can modify to search the database for anyJournal records that reference this par tar object in the Journal Dynamic View list. NOTE: if there is no Journal information related to this object, the Dynamic View will be empty. Batch Print Available for Personnel recordsonty if you have enabled Batch Printing of Badges. Displays the C•CURE ID Print Queue Manager. Badges Change Click to open a dialog box that allows you to change the Partition to which the object belongs. For information see the Partition Partition chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. Show This menu selection is available only for the following object types on the Data Views Pane: Application Layouts, Queries, Reports, Association. and Report Forms. Click to open a dialog box that lists Security Objects associated with the object in the Dynamic View. For more information, see 'Showing Associations for an Object' in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 1 21 EFTA01225306 Data Views Pane Tasks Exporting Records on Dynamic Views to XML/CSV You can use the context menu selection Export Selection to export one or more records displayed in a Dynamic View to either an XML or a CSV file. This allows you to quickly and easily create XML/CSV reports on selected C•CURE 9000 data. ■ When you export to an XML file, all available data in all columns of the Dynamic View, whether displayed or not—as well as all the child objects of the selected record(s), is exported. ■ When you export to a CSV file, only data in the columns displaying in the Dynamic View is exported, and in the order displayed. This allows you to both select and arrange data fields for your report. Furthermore, exporting to a CSV file allows you to view the exported data in an Excel spreadsheet and further manipulate it for your use. Example: For each of your company's personnel records, out of the many Personnel fields available, you want to quickly create an Excel report that includes Last Name, First Name, Personnel Type, and whether or not the Disabled and/or Noticed Flags are set. For information on setting up your data field columns for display, see: ■ Adding or Removing Columns in a Dynamic View on Page 94 ■ Changing Column Order and Width in Dynamic Views on Page 95. Records exported to CSV cannot be imported back to C•CURE 9000. Export to XML if you want to a NOTE file that can be reimported. To Export Dynamic View Records Using Export Selection 1. From the Administration Workstation Navigation Pane, select the function button for the class of object you want to report on —for example, Personnel. 2. From the drop-down menu in the Navigation toolbar, select the type of object you want to select—for example, Personnel. 3. Click BS to open a Dynamic View listing all the objects of the desired type, Personnel records in this example. 4. If you are planning to export to CSV, add/remove data fields columns and change their order, as desired. 5. Click I to select one or more Record rows in the list. (Use the CTRL key to select multiple rows at one time.) 6. Right-click selected row(s) in the Dynamic View that you want to export. 7. Choose Export Selection from the context menu. An Export-to XML or CSV file dialog box appears with XML as the initial default export type, as shown in the example in Figure 1 on Page 23. Once you choose a file type in the Save as type field, whether XML or CSV, it becomes the default O the next time this dialog box opens. 22 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225307 Data Views Pane Tasks Figure 1: Export...to XML or CSVFile Dialog Box- DefaulthliilL FIIe Igor[ Personnel to Mil of (SY (Os Armtek. en Cana OEN rt. toarttnalfttxt• Cricuts 411 irvariVV:lior•VIclavdradalpb.vs. Perctrel kr/ Conottalev.S. VIM eawfv1Pry^ ItOSC. ,P uttelbtfrot M1 aveevateasureremetd 4 sturvelsatkroavvraelesibleVeleit Carvwv&wittanoortmat .S tromwepraalq• gni 4fiViss.nr Flynn, &WO VI VC. Coal 0/011. Verne C221 8. To export to XML leave the default Export as XML file (*.xml) in the Save as type field. - or - To export to CSV, click the down arrow to change the entry in that field to Export as CSV file (*.csv). If you choose to export to CSV, the dialog box changes as shown in the example in Figure 2 on Page 23 to let you save to a CSV file. Figure 2: Export to CSV Fle Dialog Box !WOO Ottunnel to XIII r CSV ae x LCyr< CV [nave at e to creccrt VS.ITM, Onto end:peat...tort..., OI'M Cat.. t•pat Ctokba• nit...vie cool Una, <iv S turuasloitartreessinv 4innoranC.Ivnxeravrerd Ore l oo are &AV.,key too ‘.•• Tem Tau Ia. vSiVias, vv.Ecet (Sects ON vris $t •W. Pam., IbvenOvvat • 9. Select a location and filename for the external exported file. Exports generated from the Dynamic View context menu by clicking Export Selection are run on the NOTE client computer. Consequently, the system does not use the Default Export Directory Path —which is on the server. It opens a directory on the client, reverting to the last directory used. You can navigate to the default export server directory, if you wish. Or to avoid confusion or use the same destination folder for both client and server computers, you can use UNC (Universal Naming Convention) paths, for example: \\Computer Name \ C: \ Program Files (x86)\ Tyco \ CCURE Client\ Export. 10. Click Save. CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 1 23 EFTA01225308 Data Views Pane Tasks The progress of the export displays in the Exporting— dialog box, as shown in the example in Figure 3 on Page 24. A message displays in this dialog box to indicate when the export of each record is complete and to indicate when the entire export finishes. • To cancel the export, click Cancel while the export is running. Figure 3: Exporting... Dialog Box 11. When the export is complete, do one of the following: • To close the Exporting data dialog box, click OK. • To print a copy of the information about this export, click Print — On the standard Windows Print dialog box, click OK. — On the Print Preview dialog box that displays, click I*1. • To transmit a copy of the information about this export by email, click Email. • To view the export, click View Export. The CSV file appears in an Excel spreadsheet, as shown in the example in Figure 4 on Page 24 —if you have Microsoft Excel installed. Figure 4: Exported CSV file in Excel Spreadsheet p••e rowel [•s Wu vow US e erg EXUAI I% • !4:1 or it _• A rr Or. t'olbee r.12.t rA22.t H."11 EnpbT., IRLE Fi1'.£ • .ern" En•ry Enpbyee FALSE FALSE ,fittal War Car:recto F.N. TALE n • • •• Oorsonnel boat Oblech/ I4 Pawls 24 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225309 2 Application Layout This chapter explains how to configure Application Layouts. In this chapter Application Layout Overview 26 Application Layout Editor 27 Activity Viewer 35 Assess Event Application Layout 37 Event Viewer 45 Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout 47 The Explorer Bar 48 Object Viewer 54 Swipe and Show Viewer 55 Viewer Controls 64 Application Layout Tasks 65 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 25 EFTA01225310 Application Layout Overview Application Layout Overview An Application Layout is an arrangement of the available viewers and toolbars that can make up a Monitoring Station display. You can chose which viewers and toolbars you want to display on the Monitoring Station, and how you want them arranged. You can then save the layouts you design, and assign them to Operators, thereby providing each Operator with the viewers they need and controlling Operator access to viewers they do not need. You can even assign an Operator multiple Application Layouts. The Operator can then view the Application Layouts as tabs on the Monitoring Station, and switch between tabs to perform different monitoring tasks. You use the Application Layout Editor to design and save your Application Layouts. You assign Application Layouts to Operators using the Operator Editor Layout tab. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. Some of the features of the Application Layout Editor are listed in Table 2 on Page 26. Table 2: Application Layout Features Feature See This Section • Creating an Application Layout Configuring an Application Layout on Page 65 • Creating an Assess Event Application Layout Creating an Assess Event Layouton Page 70 • Creating a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Application Layout that includeseventactrvity. operator Creating a Dual Phase intervention of event acknowledgement and event dearing. Acknowledgement Layout on Page 72 • Adrag-and-drop interface that lets you select and place viewers visually Adding a ViewerNiewer Tab tea Pane on Page 69 • Support of up to sit< panes to display monitoring viewers and toolbars Adding a Pane to the Layout on Page 69 • Remove tabs from panes Removing a ViewerNiewer Tab from a Pane on Page 75 • Mow or restrict Operators from resizing panes or hiding/docking panes Locking the Layout on Page 76 • Re-sizable panes so that you can shape the viewers you place on the layout Resasg and Moving Panes in the Layouton Page 77 • Ability to auto hide a pane in any of the four window sides Auto Hiding and Pinning Paneson Page 76 • Add tabs to panes so that multiple viewers can appear in a pane Adding a ViewerNiewer Tab to a Pane on Page 69 • Pre-configured layouts that are induded with C•CURE 9000 and can be used as is or customized Viewing a List of Data Views Pane and saved under new names. Objectson Page 20 26 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225311 Application Layout Editor Application Layout Editor The C•CURE 9000 Application Layout Editor, as shown in Figure 5 on Page 28, lets you define the way the Monitoring Station client application is displayed. The Application Layout editor has three tabs: ■ Application Layout Editor General Tab on Page 27 ■ Application Layout Options Tab on Page 29 - this tab is available only for an Operator who has the Assess Event Privilege. See the Privilege chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide) for more information on Privileges. ■ Application Layout View Preferences Tab on Page 31 See the following topics for more information about the Application Layout Editor. ■ Application layout Overview on Page 26 ■ Assess Event Application Layout on Page 37 ■ Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout on Page 47 ■ The Explorer Bar on Page 48 ■ Swipe and Show Viewer on Page 55 ■ Activity Viewer on Page 35 ■ Event Viewer on Page 45 ■ Object Viewer on Page 54 ■ Application layout Tasks on Page 65 Accessing the Application Layout Editor You can access the Application Layout Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Data Views pane. To Access the Application Layout Editor 1. Click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Application Layout. 3. Click New to create a new Application layout. - or - Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Application layout objects and double-click the Application layout in the list that you want to edit. The Application Layout Editor opens, as shown in Figure 5 on Page 28. Application Layout Editor General Tab The Application Layout General tab allows you to design an Application layout for Monitoring Station Operators. An Application layout can be customized to display a variety of viewers that can make Video, Events, Activities, and hardware status available on one screen. C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide Chapter 2 27 EFTA01225312 Applitatbn Layout Editor For more information about Application Layout capabilities, see Application Layout Overview on Page 26. The Application Layout General tab allows you to create two different kinds of layouts: • Standard - used to provide an Operator with a custom view for monitoring C•CURE 9000 events, activities, and objects. • Assess Event - used to provide a view that gives quick access to all information about a specific event so that an Operator can manage the event quickly and accurately. Figure 5 on Page 28 shows the Application Layout General tab. Figure 5: Application Layout General Tab a APPNeec. ure••• • Sive and Ckst ka sad -taCleittC.Py Hr. Pawn- 00xes W. Nolonixs • krolkafion Leyout Type st...r d kvott 6.4.ken, Pref.:nixes I X 41( Even ASONat a bin Mew Li Caw ate gat..... Swotted 9, ow I X Application Layout General Tab Definitions on Page 28 describes the buttons and fields on the Application layout General tab. Application Layout Tasks on Page 65 provides information about the tasks you can perform using the Application Layout editor. Application Layout General Tab Definitions 'able 3 on Page 29 defines the Application Layout General Tab properties. 28 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225313 Application Layout Editor Table 3: Appbcation Layout General Tab Property/Button Description Name The name of the Application Layout. This field is required. Description Type a textual description of the Application Layout that wilhelp you distinguish it from other Application Layouts. Partition A read-onty field displaying the name of the Partition to which this Application Layout belongs. This field is visible only if the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned. Add pane If the Layoutcurrently has fewer than six panes, you can dick this button to add a pane to the Layout. panes are added in tnisorder: Panes In Layout Pane Added 1 Right pane 2 Lower-Right pane 3 Left pane 4 Lower-Left pane 5 Lower-Center pane Thisfield setting determines whether the operator can move or hide viewers when using an Application Layout. If you set this field to True, the operator cannot adjust the Layout while running the Monitoring Station application. If you set this field to False, the operator can adjust the Layout while running the Monitoring Station application. For example, the operator could seta viewer to auto-hide, and double-dick the title bar of another viewer to pop it up as a separate floating window. 66 Click to open the View Preferences dialog box to titer what you want to be shown on the layout. See Fitering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objectson Page 97. The dialog box is not active until the Application Layout View Preferences Tab on View Preferences Page 31 isconfigured. Application Lay- Mows you to choose the type of Application Layout you want to design. out Type If you choose Standard, you can create an Application Layout that you can assign to Operators so that the viewers you positioned on the Application Layout are avalable for Operators when using the Monitoring Station application. If you choose Assess Event, you can create an Application Layout that you can assign to Events so that Operators with the Assess Event Privilege can use this Application Layout to assess an Event. An Assess Event Application Layout can include viewers that are designed to display Event-specific information, such as recorded video of the event, a journal replay of the event, or a Map related to the Event location. Application Layout Options Tab The Application Layout Options tab is used to set Assess Event options for an Assess Event Application Layout. The options on this tab control what happens when an Event Assessment occurs. • For a standard Application Layout, the selections on this is tab are unavailable. • The Option tab is hidden for an Operator who does not have the Assess Event privilege. Figure 6 on Page 30 shows the Application Layout Options tab. Table 4 on Page 30 for descriptions of the Application Layout Options tab. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 29 EFTA01225314 Application Layout Editor Figure 6: Application Layout Options Tab Approc Layout $4,c and ant ilk/cantle! Crcitc (opt tier. Zetcnno- Nino- :40,1 Genital Cs 64e• Pvirwerom ❑C.•acb,mlokosmal *noel owers" laye4 ❑ ChiPtaloanknien •••••••• am doom" Med<kr beanlakeadedownin ❑Oa de. (Jenard asissomedPat o ChiSay Ceikraa ming WWI clomp hrsv as bayerel Application Layout Options Tab Definitions Table 4 on Page 30 provides definitions for the fields on the Application Layout Options Tab. Table 4: Application Layout Options Tab Definitions Field Description On acknowledgement. close event assessment Select this option to have the Event Assessment layout close when the Event is layout acknowledged. If thisoption is selected. the Display confirmation message when closing layout due to event acknowledgement option becomes available. The default value is unchecked. 30 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225315 Application Layout Editor Table 4: Application Layout OptionsTab Definitions (continued) Field Description Display confirmation message when closing layout Select this option to display a message box when the Event is acknowledged, asking if the due to event acknowledgement Operator wants to dose the Event Assessment layout. Click Yes to dose the layout immediately. Click No to have the layout remain open in the monitoring station until list is dosed by the user. The open layout counts towards the hmitof 5 open event assessment layouts. Thisoption isontyenabled if the On acknowledgement, close event assessment layout option ischecked. The default value is unchecked. On clear, close event assessment layout Select this option to have the Event Assessment layout dose when the Event is deared. If thisoption is selected, the Display confirmation message when closing layout due to event clear option becomes available. T ne default value is unchecked. Display confirmation message when closing layout Select thisoption todisplaya message box when the Event is cleared. asking if the Operator due to event clear wants todose the Event Assessment layout. Click Yes to dose the layout immediately. Click No to have the layout remain open in the monitoring station until list is dosed by the user. The open layout counts towards the limit of 5 open event assessment layouts. Thisoption isontyenabled if the On clear, close event assessment layout option is checked. The default value is unchecked. Application Layout View Preferences Tab The Application Layout View Preferences tab is used for the following: ■ To allow the operator to change view preferences of partitions or partition groups displayed in the Monitoring Station and the Administration Workstation Dynamic View. ■ To allow the operator to change view preferences of objects tagged Maintenance Mode so they are displayed or hidden, in the Administration Workstation Dynamic View and the Monitoring Station. For information about Maintenance Mode, see the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide. ■ This tab is not available when the Application Layout is changed from Standard to Assess Event. The type of view preferences allowed also depends on the Operator Privileges assigned. Figure 1 on Page 32 shows the Application Layout View Preferences tab. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 31 EFTA01225316 Application Layout Editor Figure 1: Application LayoutView Preferences Tab APlical" 1.0)0 A • la Save and Close CI Save and Nett la Cruet COP, film Pet Oda* WirWAsincs Mr•peiwomeOpeno Otyucts wilt Morena Mach licw damn vett peobrace Sites rM b-. • - 9•ox an Wets OWiensnce <kW" o•Y • nod. traMonibets pan Paced Pawns •3Add fi•Benove Go. Nem ill pribam r Pa IM tl e 500c4IM an: taint. to Lrned NI try meat • me km Application Layout View Preferences Tab Definitions Table 1 on Page 32 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on the Application Layout View Preferences tab. Table 1: Application Layout View Preferences Tab Definitions Field/Button Description View Preferences Options Allow changing If selected, the Monitoring Station operator is allowed to change view preferences, subject to privilege permissions, with tilr • view exception of the partitions or partition groups added to the Default Dedicated List. Partitions/partition groups in the Dela u t preferences Dedicated List are always visible and cannot be filtered out. filter at run time The default value is unchecked. meaning that the Monitoring Station operator is not allowed to use view preferences. Objects with Maintenance Mode Show allobjects If selected. all regular objects, all maintenance objects, and their activities w ill be visible in the Monitoring Station. 32 Chapter2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225317 Application Layout Editor Table 1: Application Layout View Preferences Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Show If selected, ontyobjects tagged maintenance mode and their activities are visible in the Monitoring Station. maintenance The default is unselected, meaning that objects tagged as maintenance mode are not displayed in the Monitoring Station. objectsonty None of these objects will be displayed in the Activity Viewer, Event Viewer. DynamicView. Explorer Bar, or Swipe and Show. Hide If selected, allobjects tagged maintenance mode and their activities are not visible in the Monitoring Station. maintenance objects Default Partitions List Add Click to open the Name selection dialog box to add pre-configured partitions and partition groups to the Default Dedicated list. Objects and activities belonging to these partitionswill atways be displayed in the Monitoring Station, and cannot be filtered out by the operator. Partitions not in the Default Dedicated list are not shown bydefault, however, the operator can use filtering for those not in the list if the operator privilege permissions allow them to do so. The maximum number of partitions and partition groups allowed in the Default Dedicated list is 100. Remove Removes an item from the Default Dedicated list. Click in a row to select it and then click Remove. Application Layout Viewers 'Fable 5 on Page 33 defines the Application Layout Viewer icons that can be dragged onto an Application Layout. Table 5: Application Layout Viewers Icon Name Description Activity The Activity Viewer provides a scrolling list of system activities, based on the settings specified in _ Viewer the Application Layout and on the operator's privileges. /14_ _ ) The operator can right-click an activity in the list to perform manual actions specified on a context menu. A Event Assessment The Event Assessment Viewer provides the ability to add one of several types of view- ers to a layout that is intended to be used to Assess Events. See Assess Event Applic- Viewer ation Layout on Page 37 for a list of the viewer types that can be added to an Assess Event Application Layout. Event Viewer The Event Viewer provides a scrolling list of System Events, based on the settings specified in the Application Layout and on the operator's privileges. The operator can right-click an event in the list to perform manual actions specified on a context menu. See Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout on Page 47 Id Explorer Bar The Explorer Bar provides access to a configurable menu of C•CURE 9000 objects. The operator can click an item in this menu to open a Status List (a Dynamic View) for that object type. The operator can then right-click an object in the Status List to perform actions on that object within the limits imposed by theoperator'sprivileges. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 33 EFTA01225318 Application Layout Editor Application Layout Viewers (continued) Icon Name Description Object An Object Viewer displays an object. such as an IntellexVideo Camera, Map, Report, Dynamic Viewer View in a pane. You add an Object Viewer to the Application Layout by dragging the Object Viewer icon onto the pane. You then select the object type and the specific object from the dialog box that appears. Swipe and The Swipe and Show Viewer displays the Personnel Portrait and additional information about a 41-W Show person when they perform an activity at any door or elevator in a configurable list of doors and elevators. This allows an operator of the Monitoring Station to visualtyoversee activity at one or more doorsor elevators byobserving the picture credentialsof every person who attempts to gain access. 34 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225319 Activity Viewer Activity Viewer The Activity Viewer provides a scrolling display of specified types of activities to the Monitoring Station. The Activity Viewer in the Application Layout is shown in Figure 7 on Page 35. Figure 7: ActivityViewer Tat t You can configure the settings shown in Table 6 on Page 35 for the Activity Viewer. Activity Viewer Properties Table 6 on Page 35 defines the fields on the Activity Viewer properties dialog box. Table 6: ActivityViewer Properties Dialog Box Property Description Freeze The Freeze timeout button is used to stop the Event display from scrolling. If the up and down arrows or scroll bars are used, the Timeout display freezes for the period of time set here. A progress bar appearscounting down the amount of time left for the Freeze timeout. The progress bar disappears, and scrolling resumes, after the period of time set expires or if the Freeze timeout is stopped manually. Selecting the Move to the top of the island Page Up starts the Freeze timeout. Selecting Move to the bottom of the island Page down stops Freeze timeout when you are scrolling and the scroll bar reached the end of theist The minimum default value is 30 seconds, and the maximum value i560 seconds. Show You can choose to show or hide the Activity Viewer Toolbar for this pane by selecting or dearing thiscteck box. The default value is Toolbar selected. Operator Select this option todisplay Operator Login messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time an operator logs in or logs out, a message Login isdisplayed. Card Select this option to display Card Admitted messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time a person is admitted. a message is Admitted displayed. To limit the Card Admitted messages to only the doors or elevators for which the operator has privileges, click Edit to change the default option. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 35 EFTA01225320 Activity Viewer Actniity Viewer Properties Dialog Box (continued) Property Description Card Select this option to display Card Rejected messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time a person is denied access, a message is Rejected displayed. To limit the Card Rejected messages to onty the doors or elevators for which the operator has privileges, click Edit to change the default option. Log Select thisoption to dispLay Log Messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time an operator logs a message. the message is Message displayed. Object Select thisoption to display Object State change messageson the Activity Viewer. Every time an object changes state, a Changed message isdisplayed. State Manual Select this option to display Manual Actions on the Activity Viewer. Every time an operator performs a manual action, a message Action isdisplayed. System Select this option to display System Activity messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time a system activity occurs. a message is Activity displayed. System Select thisoption to display System Error messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time a system error occurs. a message is Error displayed. Device Select this option to display Device Activity messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time a device activity occurs, a message is Activity displayed. Device Select this option to display Device Error messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time a device error occurs. a message is Error displayed. Network Select thisoption to display Network Video Activity messageson the Activity Viewer. Every time a nehvork vdeo activityoccurs. Video a message is displayed. Activity Operator The available Message Types that can be displayed in the Activity Viewer are listed. Bydefault, the Activity Viewer is set to Activity display all these message types. You can clear the check box for any Message Type to cause it not to be displayed. Event Select this option to display Event Assess Messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time an Event Assess action occurs, a Assess message isdisplayed. Message Double Select thisoption to display Double Swipe Activity messageson the Activity Viewer. Every time a Double Swipe Activity Swipe occurs, a message is displayed. Intrusion Select this option to display intrusion Zone Activity messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time an intrusion Zone Activity Zone occurs, a message is displayed. Activity intrusion Select this option to display intrusion Zone Error messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time an intrusion Zone Error occurs, a Zone message isdisplayed. Error Keypad Select thisoption to display Keypad Command Activity messages on the Activity Viewer. Every time a Keypad Command Command Activity occurs, a message is displayed. Activity 36 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225321 Assess Event Applcatton Layout Assess Event Application Layout The Assess Event Application Layout is designed to provide an Operator with all the information needed to quickly and efficiently process an Event. When an Operator selects an Event in the Event Viewer and clicks the Event Assessment button, this Application Layout is launched to provide details for that specific event, containing the viewers you have configured to assess Events. For more information on Event Assessment, see the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide chapter on Events. You drag the Event Assessment Viewer onto your Application Layout and select the Assess Action. Figure 8 on Page 37 shows the Event Assessment Viewer Selection dialog box. Figure 8: Event Assessment Viewer Selection Dialog Box Salvo bee . ,... n r : ID Gioia,' tv htie 6 Clan Ck Pee to ate data Iii. MienDawn Vs.Dawns* allathed la We Emir* Amen LideWleo Slat ....ideacame wads to tiro <Not MienMao Shoes asap waded to tema Aiwa Quay View QUOIN SWAM la toEwa Anna Roads:M*0 Shags • meadidMt mod* Sr 0010 CONWra SaChli MIT" n.ccu Red smart *ached to Wiest Shoo@ Sala fa ate wet r, Lies wads logged Ey be event NeilIts hen You can chose one of the following viewers each time you drag the Event Assessment Viewer icon to the layout: • Assess Document - see Document Viewer on Page 38 • Find in Journal - see Find in Journal Viewer on Page 39 • Assess Live Video - see Live Video Viewer on Page 41 • Assess Map - see Assess Map Viewer on Page 40 • Assess Query - see Query Viewer on Page 42 • Assess Recorded Video - see Recorded Video Viewer on Page 42 • Assess Report - see Report Viewer on Page 43 • Event Details - see Event Details Viewer on Page 39 You should only add the viewers that correspond to the Event Assessment objects you are defining for your Events. Example If you do not attach any Document objects to your Events, there is no reason to add a Document Viewer to an Assess Event Application Layout. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 37 EFTA01225322 Assess EventApplication Layout The following considerations apply when configuring an Assess Event Application Layout: NOTE • The number of panes that can be configured in an Assess Event Application Layout is limited to six (the same limit as a normal Application Layout. • An Assess Event Application Layout can contain a mixture of standard viewers and event assessment viewers (for example, a Swipe and Show viewer could be included on an Event Assessment layout. • Live video is limited to 16 live cameras per pane. Recorded video is limited to 4 recorded videos per pane. • Live and Recorded Video panes can only be configured for Intellex, VideoEdge, and Bosch video integrations. Document Viewer The Document viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Assess Event button on the Event Viewer toolbar. When you create an Assess Events Application layout, you can add a Document Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application layout pane and selecting Assess Document. See Figure 9 on Page 38 for an example of the Assess Document viewer in the Application Layout editor. Figure 9: Assess Document Viewer L4SC:$ Deck+ Assess Doc mat rfik Assess Document See Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application Layout. When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application Layout containing a Document Viewer will display the Document object that is associated with the Event (if any). The Document viewer that can display a document such as a .PDF or .TXT file, or a URL for a web page. The Document Viewer has controls for viewing and printing the document that are pertinent to the document type. 38 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225323 Assess Event Appitation Layout Event Details Viewer The Event Details viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application Layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Event Assessment button on the Event Viewer toolbar. When you create an Assess Events Application Layout, you can add an Event Details Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application Layout pane and selecting Event Details. See Figure 10 on Page 39 for an example of the Event Details viewer in the Application Layout editor. Figure 10: Event DetaisViewer Evens DOS. Event Details Ey.entpayad When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application Layout containing an Event Details Viewer will run and display the details of the Event. See Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application Layout. Find in Journal Viewer The Find in Journal viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application Layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Assess Event button on the Event Viewer toolbar. When you create an Assess Events Application Layout, you can add a Find in Journal Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application Layout pane and selecting Find in Journal. When you select Find in Journal from the Event Assessment Viewer dialog box., an additional field is displayed to let you select the Default Time Span for Journal Playback. See Figure 11 on Page 40. C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter 2 39 EFTA01225324 Assess Event Application Layout Figure 11: Event Assessment Viewer Dialog Box for Find in Journal You can select a value from 1 to 100 hours for this selection. The default value is 4 hours. See Figure 12 on Page 40 for an example of the Find in Journal viewer in the Application layout editor. Figure 12: Find in JournalViewer Find In Journal * X Find InJournal IA. Find trkhatingd When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application Layout containing a Find in Journal Viewer will display the Journal Replay that is associated with the Event. The Journal Replay is displayed in a Dynamic View. See Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application Layout. Assess Map Viewer The Assess Map viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application Layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Assess Event button on the Event Viewer toolbar. When you create an Assess Events Application Layout you can add a Map Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application Layout pane and selecting Access Map. See Figure 13 on Page 41 for an example of the Assess Map viewer in the Application layout editor. 40 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225325 Assess Event Application Layout Figure 13: Assess Map Viewer Assess Mop O X Assess Map dQ Assess Map; When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application Layout containing an Assess Map Viewer will display the Map that is configured in the Event Map Link field. See Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application Layout. Live Video Viewer The Live Video viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Assess Event button on the Event Viewer toolbar. When you create an Assess Events Application layout, you can add a Live Video Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application layout pane and selecting Assess Live Video. The Live Video viewer in the Monitoring Station displays the Video View object associated with the Event. See Figure 14 on Page 41 for an example of the Assess Live Video viewer in the Application Layout editor. Figure 14: Assess Ltve Video Viewer 2-:;e:s Live Vdoo 4 X Assess Live Video Assess Live Video When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application layout that contains a Live Video Viewer displays the live video object that is associated with the Event (if any). C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 41 EFTA01225326 Assess Event Application Layout See Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application Layout. Query Viewer The Quay viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Assess Event button on the Event Viewer toolbar. When you create an Assess Events Application Layout, you can add a Query Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application Layout pane and selecting Assess Query. See Figure 15 on Page 42 for an example of the Assess Query viewer in the Application layout editor. Figure 15: AssessQuery Viewer 1.3 X Assess query ,Afzi Chivy When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application Layout containing a Query Viewer will run and display the results from the Query object that is associated with the Event (if any) in a Dynamic View. See Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application Layout. Recorded Video Viewer The Recorded Video viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Assess Event button on the Event Viewer toolbar. The Recorded Video Viewer supports video clips from Intellex, VideoEdge, and Bosch video integration products. When you create an Assess Events Application layout, you can add a Recorded Video Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application layout pane and selecting Assess Recorded Video. When you select Access Recorded Video from the Event Assessment Viewer dialog box., an addition field is displayed: Recording Index. See Figure 16 on Page 43. 42 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide EFTA01225327 Assess Event Application Layout Figure 16: Event Assessment Viewer Dialog Box 03 (vent Anenment Viewer aYe endLbs. Atu•.: Acme knots RecordedVdeo flessuleehalt ShowLa Who %coals Sim Second kr LasetthoRicadng Show Did to Last Video Recadno Shaw Ruth it, WINS('Reectine You can place up to four distinct recording viewers for a camera. You must choose one of the following values for this field: • Show Last Video Recording (most recent clip) • Show second to Last Recording • Show Third to Last Recording • Show Fourth to Last Recording See Figure 17 on Page 43 for an example of the Assess Recorded Video viewer in the Application Layout editor. Figure 17: Assess Recorded Video Viewer Assess Receded Video 4 X Assess Recorded Video Assess Recorded Video 1 When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application Layout containing a Recorded Video Viewer will display the recorded video object that is associated with the Event (if any). See Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application layout. Report Viewer The Report viewer can be added to an Assess Events Application Layout so that it is available when an Operator in the Monitoring Station presses the Event Assessment button on the Event Viewer toolbar. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 43 EFTA01225328 Assess Event Application Layout When you create an Assess Events Application Layout, you can add a Report Viewer to the layout by dragging the Event Assessment Viewer icon to an Application Layout pane and selecting Assess Report. See Figure 18 on Page 44 for an example of the Assess Report viewer in the Application Layout editor. Figure 18: Assess Report Viewer a X Assess Report Aston Report I When an Operator uses the Assess Event button in the Monitoring Station, an Assess Event Application layout containing a Report Viewer will run and display the results of the Report object that is associated with the Event (if any) in a Dynamic View. See Creating an Assess Event layout on Page 70 for information on adding viewers to an Assess Event Application layout. 44 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Men Guide EFTA01225329 Event Viewer Event Viewer The Event Viewer provides a scrolling display of events to the Monitoring Station. The Event Viewer is added to the Application Layout by dragging the Event Viewer icon onto the pane. When the Event Viewer icon is dragged into a pane, the Event Viewer configuration dialog box opens. See Event Viewer Tasks on Page 66 for more information. The Event Viewer, shown with all the Event Viewer configuration settings selected, is displayed in the Application Layout are shown in Figure 19 on Page 45. Figure 19: Event Viewer Event Viewer • EveNs which tease no action: Pending AcknocAedge: Pend"; Ckar V GJ rtA O k?) a pa ..• Date - Time (Name Actroly Prime,. Active Cause Con Mai COu it: 0 Rot; rn .r tfirri Event Viewer Properties You can configure the settings shown in Table 7 on Page 45 for the EventViewer. Configuration settings for the buttons and Events that can be viewed are determined by the operator's privilege. Table 7: Event Viewer Settings Field Meaning Options Freeze timeout The Freeze timeout button is used to stop the Event display from scrolling. If the Freeze timeout button Is (seconds) pressed, the display freezes for the period of time set here. A progress bar appears counting down the amount of time left for the Freeze timeout. The progress bar disappears, and scrolling resumes, after the period of time set expires or if the Freeze timeout is stopped manually. The minimum default value is 30 seconds, and the maximum value Is 60 seconds. Show ToolUa! You can choose to show or hide the Event Viewer tooter for this Pane by selecting metering this check b4.• The default value is selected. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 45 EFTA01225330 Event Viewer Event Viewer Settings (continued) Field Meaning Buttons Show Quick Action If selected, the quick action buttons are displayed in the Event Viewer, and the rest of the buttons in this dialog Buttons box become available for selection. The default value is unselected. NOTE: The Event Assessment button is not a Quick Action button. The button is displayed if the Operator has the correct Assess Event Privileges. Show Acknowledge All If selected. the Acknowledge /Wand Silence All buttons are displayed on the Event Viewer toolbar. This button and Silence Buttons acknowledges all the events available. The default value is unselected. Show Clear All If selected, the Clear All button is displayed on the Event Viewer toolbar. The default value is unselected. Show Acknowledge If selected, the Acknowledge button and Clear button isdisplayed on the Event Viewer toolbar. This button and Clear Button acknowledges and dears the selected event. The default value is unselected. Show Acknowledge If selected, the Acknowledge and Clear All button isdisplayed on the Event Viewer toolbar. This button and Clear All Button acknowledges and dears all the events available. The default value is unselected. Events Indude Events If selected. the Event Viewer will include events that require no action. Requiring No Action The default value is selected. Indude Events If selected, the Event Viewer will include events pending acknowledgment. Pending Acknowledgment The default value is selected. Include Events If selected, the Event Viewer will include events pending clear. Pending Clear The default value is selected. 46 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225331 Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout An Application Layout can be configured for Dual Phase Acknowledgement to display an Acknowledgement pane and a Clearing pane in the Monitoring Station. Dual Phase Acknowledgement manages events by requiring that an event remain active after it is acknowledged until it is cleared. Events are configured individually to use Dual Phase Acknowledgement in the Event Editor. Table 8 on Page 47 lists the Dual Phase Acknowledgement configuration sequence, and where to find the configuration procedures. Table 8: Dual Phase Acknowledgement Configuration Step Action See... 1. Create a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Application Layout. Create a Dual Phase Acknowledgement ApplicatKy, Layout on Page 72 2. Configure Event Permissions and Privileges. C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Gukte•Events' diapter 3. Assign the Event Privieges and Application Layout to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide operators. •Events• chapter 4. Configure an existing event, or a new event, to use Dual Phase C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Gukte*Events- Acknowledgement. chapter C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 47 EFTA01225332 The Explorer Bar The Explorer Bar The Explorer Bar allows a Monitoring Station Operator to view the status of objects in C•CURE 9000. When you click an item in the Explorer Bar, a Dynamic View appears listing the objects of that type and their current status. You can sort, filter, group, and print this list, and you can right-click any item in the list to view a menu of actions that you can perform on that item. You can add items or objects to the default main categories, create new main categories, and add new items or objects to the main categories in the Application Layout Editor. The Explorer Bar displayed in the Monitoring Station with the default settings is shown in Figure 20 on Page 48. Figure 20: Explorer Bar Nealimedeselreatss rj Resorts, LEI Corner. `Awn a Net OW (V Naval :ctsces 0 (vett. Li M.n Otero, ID Beards 31 erns LY Irendeor, Zorn .13 Cordonore isr rods Orden. LI Readers Li knedesion Sera. Video Servers €.1.1 Tors • CCTV SmtCh00 as CCTV Comma :le %ern Exte•val The items on the Explorer Bar are explained in the following sections: ■ Non Hardware Status on Page 49 ■ Hardware Status on Page 49 ■ Video on Page 50 ■ External Applications on Page 50 See Explorer Bar Tasks on Page 50 for a list of tasks you can perform using the Explorer Bar. Explorer Bar Properties Table 9 on Page 49 defines the default Explorer Bar properties. 48 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225333 The Explorer Bar Table 9: Explorer Bar Default Properties Property Description Non The Non Hardware Status menu on the Explorer Bar gives you the ability to quiddy find out the status of a security object in Hardware C•CURE 9000. Each item on the Explorer Bar, when clicked, opensa list of alobjectsof that type, showing their statusand other Status pertinent information. Hardware The Hardware Status menu on the Explorer Bar gtves you the ability to quiddy learn the status of a security object in C•CURE Status 9000. Each item on the Explorer Bar, when clicked, opens a fist of alobjects of that type, showing their status and other pertinent information. Video The Video Status menu on the Explorer Bar gives you the ability to quickly learn the statusof a video security object in C•CURE 9000. Each item on the Explorer Bar, when clicked, opensa 'slot alobjectsof that type, showing their statusand other pertinent information. External The Explorer Bar alows you tolaunch externalapplications. ExternalApplicationsare configured for the Explorer Bar in the Applications Application Layout by an administrator. The Monitoring Station operator can launch these applications as needed to perform tasks related to or supplementary to C•CURE 9000 Monitoring. Non Hardware Status When the Explorer Bar is added to an Application Layout, this list give the Monitoring Station Operator access to the status of security objects in C•CURE 9000 that are considered non-hardware. Included are: ■ Doors ■ Reports ■ Dynamic Views ■ Operators ■ Manual Actions ■ Events ■ Maps ■ Groups ■ Elevators ■ Areas ■ Intrusion Zone Hardware Status When the Explorer Bar is added to an Application Layout, this list give the Monitoring Station Operator access to the status of hardware security objects in C•CURE 9000. Included are: ■ Controllers ■ Inputs ■ Outputs ■ Readers C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 49 EFTA01225334 The Explorer Bar Video When the Explorer Bar is added to an Application Layout, this list gives the Monitoring Station Operator access to the status of Video security objects in C•CURE 9000. Included are: ■ Servers ■ Cameras ■ Tours ■ CCTV Switches ■ CCTV Cameras ■ IP Cameras ■ Views External Applications This section in the Explorer Bar supports the addition of shortcut links to external applications. See Adding External Applications to the Explorer Bar on Page 51. Explorer Bar Tasks ■ Adding the Explorer Bar to an Application layout on Page 50 ■ Adding External Applications to the Explorer Bar on Page 51 ■ Removing External Applications from the Explorer Bar on Page 51 ■ Adding a New Category to the Explorer Bar on Page 52 ■ Deleting a Category on the Explorer Bar on Page 52 ■ Editing the Explorer Bar on Page 52 Adding the Explorer Bar to an Application Layout When you drag the Explorer Bar onto a Pane in the Application Layout, you can select the items that appear on the Explorer Bar. You can also add categories to the Explorer Bar. To Add the Explorer Bar to an Application Layout 1. Open the Application layout to which you want to add the Explorer Bar. 2. Click the Explorer Bar icon and drag it to a Pane on the layout. The Explorer Bar dialog box opens (see Figure 21 on Page 51) with the default settings. 50 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225335 The Explorer Bar Figu re 21: Explorer Bar Dialog Box tExplorer Bar Al Save and Close Gensal I Edema Appbcaons I ton Hardware Status Hardware Status I Mdeo Add Remove 3. Enable ( F ) or disable each of the items in the list. Each item that you enable will appear on the Explorer Bar (it the Operator has the Privileges required to access these objects). 4. Click Save and Close. Adding External Applications to the Explorer Bar You can add external applications to launch from the Explorer Bar. To Add an External Application 1. Click the External Applications tab on the Explorer Bar dialog box. 2. Click Add to add an application. 3. Enter a name for the application in the Name field. 4. Enter the full file path for the application (for example, C: \ Windows \ System32 taskmgraxe) to add the Windows Task Manager) in the Full Path field. Or, double-click in the Full Path field to browse to the location of the application and double-click on it to select it. 5. Enter any command line arguments necessary to launch and run the application in the Arguments field. 6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to add other external applications. 7. Click Save and Close. Removing External Applications from the Explorer Bar To Remove an External Application 8. Click in the first column of the row for that application, then click Remove. 9. Click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 51 EFTA01225336 The Explorer Bar Adding a New Category to the Explorer Bar You can create a new main category, or add a new category to one of the main categories (External Applications, Non-Hardware Status, Hardware Status, Video) to make it easier to navigate through data. To Add a Main Category 1. Click on the General tab. 2. Click Add. The Add Category dialog box opens. 3. Enter a Name and description (optional) for the new main category. 4. Click Enable. 5. Click Save and Close. The new main category appears as a tab in the Explorer Bar dialog box. To Add an Item to a Main Category 1. Click on the General tab. 2. Click on the main category tab that you want to add a new item. 3. Click Add to open the Select Type dialog box. 4. Click on the new item. The new item appears in the main category tab list. 5. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 until your selections are complete. 6. Ensure that your new selections are Enabled in the main category tab list. 7. Click Save and Close. Deleting a Category on the Explorer Bar To Delete a Category on the Explorer Bar 1. Click on the General tab. -or- Click on the main category tab where the category is located. 2. Click in the first column of the row that contains the category that you want to delete to select it. 3. Click Remove. 4. Click Save and Close. Editing the Explorer Bar To Edit the Explorer Bar Open the Application Layout. 52 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225337 The Explorer Bar 2. Right-click on the Explorer Bar tab in the Application Layout and select Properties. Exsimaes / Rename Nopertes Close The Explorer Bar dialog box opens for editing. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 53 EFTA01225338 Object Viewer Object Viewer An Object Viewer displays an object (such as an Intellex Video Camera, Map, Report, Dynamic View) in a Pane. You add an Object Viewer to the Application Layout by dragging the Object Viewer icon onto the pane. You then select the object type and the specific object from the dialog box that appears. An example of the Object Viewer in the Application Layout (a Dynamic View type Schedules View object) is shown in Figure 7 on Page 35. Figure 22: Object Viewer Personnel Vie' iring N Personnel View See Adding an Object Viewer to an Application Layout on Page 70 for tasks you can perform with the Object Viewer. Object Viewer Properties Table 10 on Page 54 defines the fields on the Object Viewer properties dialog box. Table 10: Object Viewer Properties Property Description i Select the Object Type that you want to display in the Viewer. OL I Select the actual Object that you want to display in the Viewer. The objectsyou can choose are listed, determined by the Object Type you chose in the Type field. Examples: If you chose Maps as the Type, for Object you could picks specific Map from the displayed list of Maps. If you chose Dynamic View as the Type, for Object you could pick Personnel View or Report Results View from the displayed list. 54 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225339 Swipe and Show Viewer Swipe and Show Viewer The Swipe and Show Viewer monitors a configurable list of Doors, displaying a portrait or multiple portraits of personnel who present an access card at a Reader on an included Door or Elevator. You can add multiple Swipe and Show Viewers to an Application Layout, setting them up as tabs in a single pane. Each time a person presents an access card at a Door/Elevator watched by the Swipe and Show Viewer, the portrait from his/her Personnel record displays in the viewer, with information about the attempted activity at the Door/Elevator. A Swipe and Show Viewer can be configured to contain multiple portrait images on a screen at a time. Default view viewers can be re-sized on the Monitoring station. For information about Swipe and Show Viewers, see: • Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer on Page 55 • Swipe and Show Default Viewers on Page 58 • Swipe and Show Viewer Tasks on Page 59 Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer The Legacy Swipe and Show Viewer displays a single portrait at a time. The viewer also allows an operator to give displayed persons access to all antipassback areas - if they were denied entry. The Grace Personnel button allows an operator to give the displayed person access to all antipassback Areas —if they would have been denied entry. (See Legacy Swipe and Show Viewer Grace Partition Tab on Page 57 for information about this tab and the 'grace all' capability.) The fields and buttons are read-only in the Application Layout. NOTE The Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer Swipe & Show tab, shown in Figure 2 on Page 56, appears in the Application Layout, and as it appears in the Monitoring Station. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 55 EFTA01225340 Swipe and Show Viewer F Igure 2: Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer - Swipe & Show Tab Application Layout Monitoring Station e.em49— Smile rL Gil SWr9t Cm.Ps Some 1-Show i Goo. Paean On on 12420142502PM Poo Deo Tine 12142014 25647PM bxaba, M Remake Area Pew 6355002tiliAMMt Space bm•Pm 4M Pm Olkob Ribs haresai Oolos ( GM* Pna l Past a• 9alus. Ptrnits1 Magary WIPP MeMAIM Gen APOIIONCed Grsc•Cmptal Gt LD ULJ L&--Lbd-ki ape tratcutGam ABIRowiCate Gran Santo G•ouo (.1 SaVe and 5.o. tell ©QO Table 2 on Page 56 provides the definitions for the Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer. Table 2: Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer Definitions Field/Button Description Portrait This is the portrait from the Personnel record whose card was swiped at thisdoor. Date time This is the Date and Time that the most recent activity occurred. Area This is the name of the Area to which the Door where the activity occurred is assigned. Location This is the name of the door or elevator where the activity occurred. Person This is the name on the Personnel record whose access card was swiped at thisdoor. Status This message shows the statusof the card swipe at thisdoor. For example, a Statusof Rejected indicates that the access attempt was rejected. Details This button allows the user to view the respective personnel record. This button isunavailable if the current Operator has "No Access" to the personnel record. Momentarity Unlock This button momentarity unlocks the respective door. This button is enabled if the current Operator is allowed to perform this action. APB Reset Card This button resets the STAR GbbalAntipassbackowner of this person'scard when that STAR Controller isnot communicating. (The GlobalAPB owner of a personnelcard is the STAR Controller that makes the accessdecision to allow/not allow that person into the Area.) Grace Personnel This button albwsthe user to 'grace' a person denied access to an a ntipassback Area so they are given access. 56 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225341 Swipe and Show Viewer Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Area Lockout Grace This button clears all running Area Lockout timers for this person to allow him/her one-time access into all Area LatiagIt Target Areas that he/she is locked out of. O izi la O i_, ,p These buttons, which are identified by color and tool tips, allow the user to navigate through the 1000 most-recent Personnel records whose admits/rejects discilay on the viewer. The buttons, from left to right, have the following functionality: Previous Item, Next Item, Pause/Resume, Previous Reject, Next Reject. Clicking Pause/Resume freezes the pane for 30 seconds. If no other button is decked within 30 seconds (or if Resume is pressed again), the viewer resumes showing the most recent item. Grace Carpool This button performs a grace on all Personnel within a Carpool Group for antipassback for a specified time period. Group Legacy Swipe and Show Viewer Grace Partition Tab In the Monitoring Station, the Grace Partition tab displays a list of the Partitions in the system. An Operator with the appropriate permissions can select one or more Partitions to grace all Personnel in the Partition(s) at one time. The Grace Partition tab, as it appears in the Monitoring Station, is shown in Figure 3 on Page 57. Figure 3: Swipe and Show Viewer —Grace Partition Tab Monitoring Station swim it show 16-;5315iiiiiiiin Grace All for All Partitions it ii i tit t ior Count 1 Drag columns to group by tcrc Name Descripticn Detach Default System Partition In an un-partitioned system, all Security Objects are in the 'Default' Partition. Consequently, clicking NOTE the Grace All for All Partitions graces all Personnel in the C•CURE 9000. CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 57 EFTA01225342 Swipe and Show Viewer Swipe and Show Default Viewers The Swipe and Show Default Viewers allow you to define the number and arrangement of Personnel images displayed on the viewer. The following limitations apply to the Default Viewer selections: ■ Only 100 images can be cached. ■ Historical data cannot be retrieved once the user logs out of the Monitoring Station. Images are displayed with a border around them indicating the state of the transactions. The supported states and their respective colors are described in States and Colors on Page 58. Table 3: Statesand Colors Color State Green Access Granted Used or Unused Flashing Green Access Granted - Noticed Yelow Access Denied - Wrong Time Yelow Flashing Access Denied - Clearance Orange • Access Denied - Expired • Access Denied - Disabled Red Access Denied - Lost Flashing Red Access Denied - Stolen The Application Layout Swipe and Show Viewer Default View selections are described in Table 4 on Page 58. Table 4: Default View Selections View Description Single A single portrait is displayed. When a new card is presented, the existing portrait is replaced. Dual Two portraits are displayed. When a new card is presented, the portrait that was in the second spot is replaced by the portrait that was in the fast spot, and the new portrait takes the fast position. Quad Four portraits are displayed. When a new card is presented, all existing portraits slide to the right and the new portrait takes the fast position. Horizontal Portraits are displayed in a hordontal view. When a new card is presented. all existing portraits slide down, and the new portrait takes the top position. The last portrait is removed from the view. Vertical Portraits are displayed in a vertical view. When a new card is presented. all existing portraits slide down, and the new portrait takes the fast position. The last portrait is removed from the view. Carousal Portraits are displayed in a carousel view.When a new card is presented, all existing portraits slide counter- clockwise, and the new portrait takes the fast position. The last portrait is removed from the view. Figure 4 on Page 59 shows the Swipe and Show Single viewer as it is displayed in the Application Layout and in the Monitoring Station. 58 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225343 Swipe and Show Viewer Figure 4: Swipe and Show - Single Default Viewer Alsestion Layout Winter Station to- k I it.. in. .s.m.....•••••••=•••••goinnlia.A.p.lamien ••••••1•••••••\•••••• ••••••••• ••••••••Amir.4••••• — I=111.1117.7 Figure 5 on Page 59 shows the Dual, Horizontal, Vertical, Carousel, and Quad viewers as they are displayed in the Application Layout and in the Monitoring Station. Figure 5: Swipe and Show - Dual, Horizontal, Vertical, Carousel, and Quad Default Viewers nalteCabon Layout G34A Swipe and Show Viewer Tasks You can perform the following tasks when configuring a Swipe and Show Viewer: • Adding a Swipe and Show Viewer to the Application Layout on Page 60. • Configuring Doors or Elevators for a Swipe and Show Viewer on Page 61. • Editing a Swipe and Show Viewer on Page 63 • Renaming a Swipe and Show Viewer on Page 63 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 59 EFTA01225344 Swipe and Show Viewer Adding a Swipe and Show Viewer to the Application Layout To use a Swipe and Show Viewer, you add it to the Application Layout, and select the doors, elevators and the activities you want it to monitor. To Add the Swipe and Show Viewer to an Application Layout 1. Open the Application Layout to which you want to add the Swipe and Show Viewer. 2. Click the Swipe and Show icon and drag it to a pane on the layout. The Swipe and Show Editor dialog box, shown in Figure 23 on Page 60, opens. Figure 23: Swipe and Show Editor Dialog Box Save a-4 Co:e `;'Add Pe Renate I Dew Penned ntiea.d r use Legacy r Enable Flashing Cokes r Alloaruser *change %es Knmeme r Use Morrboal From Default View ID,' Add FtRerove I Elevator. PdnnM iteeezled Table 11 on Page 60 provides the definitions for the fields and buttons on the Swipe and Show Editor. Table 11: Swipe and Show Editor Dialog Box Definitions Field/Button Description Use Legacy Select to use the Legacy Swipe and Show Viewer. See Swipe and Show Legacy Viewer on Page 55. NOTE: If you use the Legacy Swipe and Show Viewer, allother selections w ill be grayed-out. 60 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225345 Swipe and Show Viewer Swipe and Show Editor Dialog Box Definitions (continued) Field / Button Description Enable Flashing Select to use flashing colors to indicate states. Imagas displayed will &ways have a color indicating the particular Colors transaction.Supported states and their colors are: State Color Access granted - used or unused Green Access granted - noticed Flashing Green Access denied - clearance Flashing Yellow Accessdenied - wrong time Yellow Accessdenied - expired Orange Accessdenied - disabled Orange Accessdenied - lost Red Accessdenied - stolen Flashing Red Allow to change view Select to allow the user to switch between the viewsduring runtime. at runtime Use Thumbnail Select to display the smaller thumbnail image. Otherwise, the full portrait image is loaded and displayed. Images Default View Select the default Swipe and Show view to use on start up. See Swipe and Show Default Viewers on Page 58 # of Images This setting isonty visible for horizontal and vertical viewswhere the user can define how many images to see in the Swipe and Show Viewer. Valid numbers are 2 to 10. Doors/Elevators Add Click Add in the upper pane to add a door. (To add an elevator, click Add in the lower pane.) A new row appears in the list. Remove To remove a door or elevator, select the row for that door or elevator and click Remove. Admitted Select to display all messages related to access-granted activities at this door or elevator. Rejected Select to display all messages related to access-denied activities at this door or elevator. Configuring Doors or Elevators for a Swipe and Show Viewer To configure a Swipe and Show Viewer, you select the doors and elevators from which the Swipe and Show Viewer should display activity, and the types of activities to report (Admitted and Rejected). See Figure 24 on Page 62. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 61 EFTA01225346 Swipe and Show Viewer To Configure Doors/Elevators for a Swipe and Show Viewer 1. Click Add in the upper pane to add a door. (To add an elevator, click Add in the lower pane.) A new row appears in the list. 2. Click the Doors or Elevators field in the new row and click n to select a door or elevator to monitor. 3. Select Admitted if you want to display all messages related to access-granted activities at this door or elevator. 4. Select Rejected if you want to display all messages related to access-denied activities at this door or elevator. Figure 24: Add Doorsand/or Elevators to be Monitored ElSave22 Moe -rem r.esm.. Dew leveed epee dm Petauti Check boxes to display messages on 26,21 ::keel access admitted/access rejected et selected Doors and/or Elevators. r er.Y4 F r Jkv W t) cheer 22. 22227* r ')" Ateded Ned Simko Salaslype 10x. .,..b. int I corms p 2n2.2 Dy Mee Ma Draw I 0•2226,21 Clck Pee 2 film des IL IL ui Cake 2.22 OSA Olieweemosvole Carl DS< " 2 DA* Itc 16122241 6.2222•2062PIS) Click "Add" to add a new row for an Elevator. Click the select button to and select the Doors/Elevators to be monitored. 5. To remove a door or elevator from the Swipe and Show Viewer, select the row for that door or elevator and click Remove. 6. Click Save and Close to save the configuration for the Swipe and Show Viewer. 7. Click Save and Close to save the Application Layout. 62 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225347 Swipe and Show Viewer Editing a Swipe and Show Viewer To Edit a Swipe and Show Viewer 1. Open the Application Layout containing the Swipe and Show Viewer. 2. Right-click on the Swipe and Show tab located at the bottom of viewer and click Properties. The Swipe and Show Editor opens. 3. Click Save and Close when done editing. Renaming a Swipe and Show Viewer To Rename a Swipe and Show Viewer 1. Open the Application Layout containing the Swipe and Show Viewer. 2. Right-click on the Swipe and Show tab located at the bottom of viewer and click Rename. 3. Enter the new name in the Name field and click OK. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 63 EFTA01225348 Viewer Controls Viewer Controls Table 12 on Page 64 defines the Application Layout Viewer Controls. Table 12 Application Layout Viewer Controls Icon Name Description Auto You can set a pane in the Application Layout to Auto Hide so that it closes when the 4 4 Hide mouse pointer is on another pane, displaying only a viewer name tab. When the mouse pointer hoversover the viewer name tab, the pane opens and remainsopen until the mouse pointer moves away again. This is similar to the Auto Hide capability you can set for the Windows XP task bar. If you click this icon, the viewer changes back to Pinned and is visible at all times. Pinned Pinned is the default state for a viewer. The viewer remains visible at all times. If you ig click this loon, it changes to Auto Hide. and the viewer is visible only when you hover the mouse pointer over the viewer name tab. Close Click this icon to remove a Viewer from the Application Layout. X X Viewer A Viewer Name tab displays the name of the viewer (in this example—the Personnel iii Por.enei View Name View, which shows a DynamicView list of Personnel). You can change the name by Tab right-clicking the tab and choosing Rename. Context The Context Menu for a pane in the Application Layout has three settings: Explorer Bar I Rename Menu Rename- Select thischoice to rename the title of the viewer in this pane. Properties Example: I Close If you set up an Activity Viewer to view only operator Logins, you could rename the title of the viewer to operator Login, and this name would appear on the viewer name tab. Properties - Select this choice to display a dialog box that allows you to set the propertiesof this pane'sviewer. Close - Select this choice to delete this viewer from the pane it is in. 64 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225349 Applcabon Layout Tasks Application Layout Tasks You can perform the following task from the Application Layout Editor. ■ Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70 ■ Creating a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout on Page 72 ■ Configuring an Application Layout on Page 65 ■ Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20 ■ Modifying an Application Layout on Page 74 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Adding a Pane to the layout on Page 69 ■ Removing a Pane from the layout on Page 75 ■ Adding a Viewer/Viewer Tab to a Pane on Page 69 ■ Removing a Viewer/Viewer Tab from a Pane on Page 75 ■ Locking the layout on Page 76 ■ Unlocking the layout on Page 76 ■ Auto Hiding and Pinning Panes on Page 76 ■ Resizing and Moving Panes in the layout on Page 77 Configuring an Application Layout The configuration of an Application Layout is flexible enough to support almost any monitoring requirement. An Operator can display multiple Monitoring Station layouts in a tabbed application screen, meaning that you can design usable layouts that give each monitoring component adequate space for viewing. Because there are so many options, it can be useful to do some planning before starting to configure Application layouts. ■ Decide on the number of Viewers and Tabs (Application layouts) you want to give each Operator. ■ Decide on the number of Panes you want to place in each Application layout. ■ Decide which Viewers you want to place in each Application layout (remember that you can place multiple Viewers in a Pane). ■ Decide on the size and arrangement of the Panes in the layout. ■ If your Operators have differing access and responsibilities, you can make separate Application layouts for each operator, or have them use the same layout, and restrict access using Privileges. To Configure an Application Layout 1. Create an Application layout. See Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19. 2. To configure a Assess Event Application layout, see Creating an Assess Event Layout on Page 70. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 65 EFTA01225350 Appication Layout Tasks 3. To configure a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Application Layout, see Creating a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout on Page 72. 4. Add Panes to the Layout. See Adding a Pane to the Layout on Page 69. 5. Add Viewers to the Panes. See Adding a Viewer/Viewer Tab to a Pane on Page 69. 6. Lock the layout if you don't want Operators moving or changing the Layout. See Locking the layout on Page 76. 7. Create operator privileges using the Privilege Editor for the operator. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. 8. Assign the layout and privileges to Operators. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information. Event Viewer Tasks Adding an Event Viewer to the Application Layout You can add an Event Viewer to an Application Layout, choosing to display a toolbar, buttons, and events. See Event Viewer Properties on Page 45 for descriptions of the available selections. To Add an Event Viewer to the Application Layout 1. Open the Application Layout to which you want to add the Event Viewer. 2. Click the Event Viewer icon and drag it to a Pane on the layout. The Event Viewer Editor dialog box opens (see Figure 25 on Page 66. Figure 25: Event Viewer Editor Dialog Box Opaka Rene Triad (nom* I 31: E F Slav Today [Baal r shawchackActioneuttons r ,c,w/gAnca€4, is lente Al Ercetcra F LulIGn r r Everitt P Event ReqtaigNo Aden F Wade Event PculnpAcknoWedgetert F Inside Events Pencing Clem 66 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225351 Application Layout Tasks 3. Set the Freeze Timeout in seconds. This is the length of time the scrolling list of events is stopped. 4. Select or clear the Show Toolbar field. If you clear this option, there are no buttons displayed. 5. Select or clear the Show Quick Action Buttons field. If you select this option, the quick action buttons are displayed. ne:12 4.%; &it' m o e Ci .J_t 26 The Assess Event button is not a Quick Action button - it is displayed if the Operator has the coned NOTE Assess Event Privileges. 6. Select or clear the additional buttons you want to be available on the Toolbar. 7. Select or clear the event actions that you want in the Event Viewer. 8. Click Save and Close to save the configuration for the Event Viewer. Activity Viewer Tasks You can perform the following task when configuring an Activity Viewer. • Adding an Activity Viewer to the Application Layout on Page 67. Adding an Activity Viewer to the Application Layout To Add an Activity Viewer to the Application Layout 1. Open the Application Layout to which you want to add the Activity Viewer. 2. Click the Activity Viewer icon and drag it to a pane on the layout. The Activity Viewer dialog box opens (see Figure 26 on Page 68). CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 87 EFTA01225352 Application Layout Tasks Figure 26: Activity Viewer Dialog Box idlest and Close Freeze Trnemt (stands) 30 Show Tooaar. Q View MessageTwe Options A El Apclicatcn SerierActivicy ea AfeeAdiely CI Cud Admitted Edi 0 Card Rejected Edi 0 Device Asti* El Device Dm El Double swipe Ei Evert Assess Message 0 IntrusicriZone Acavity ID Mu:kmZone Enor El Keypad CcinmandActirgy ri Log Message Pl I on Miniation 4rfivku v, 3. Set the Freeze Timeout in seconds. This is the length of time for to stop the scrolling list of activities by pressing the Freeze button, using the up and down arrows, or using the scroll bars. 4. Select or Clear the Show ToolBar field. If you clear this option, the toolbar buttons are not displayed. 5. Select or clear each of the items in the Message Type list. The Activity Viewer displays the Message Types that you select (if the Operator has the Privileges required to access these messages), and does not display the ones that you clear. If you clear the selection for Event Assess Message, a Journal message does not appear when an NOTE Operator clicks the Assess Event button to Assess an Event. Optionally, click Edit at the Card Admitted or Card Rejected items. You can choose either: • To show card admissions or card rejections where the operator has privileges to see either the door or the person (the default). Or • To show card admissions or card rejections where the operator has privileges to see only the door (if you want to be more restrictive of what the Operator can see). 68 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225353 Application Layout Tasks Card Admitted Options Card Rejected Options J Save and Close Save and Close Show 'Card Admitted' messages a Show 'Card Rejected' messages where the Operator has privilege to where the Operator has privilege to see the door OR the person. see the door OR the person. Show Ordy 'Card Admitted' messages Show Only 'Card Rejected' messages where the Operator has privilege to where the Operator has privilege to see the door. see the door. 6. Click Save and Close to save your choice. 7. Click Save and Close to save the configuration for the Activity Viewer. Adding a Pane to the Layout If the Layout currently has fewer than six Panes, you can add a Pane to the Layout. To Add a Pane to the Layout 1. Click Add Pane. 2. The Pane is added to the Layout in the next open position that is the best fit with the other Panes in the Layout. 3. You can grab the pane window bar and drag the pane to a new position in the Layout. 4. Save your changes to the layout by clicking Save and Close. Adding a ViewerNiewer Tab to a Pane You can add a Viewer to a Pane in the Application layout (even a Pane that already has one or more Viewers) by dragging the Viewer to the Pane, and then configuring the settings for the Viewer. When there are already one or more Viewers in the Pane, the new Viewer is added as a tab. Each Viewer is displays with a tab at the bottom of the Pane. The Operator can click the tabs to switch between Viewers. To Add a Tab to a Pane 1. From the Application layout Editor, select a Viewer from the Viewer menu and use the mouse pointer to drag the Viewer to a Pane in the Application layout. 2. Release the mouse button to drop the Viewer in the Pane you selected. The configuration dialog box for the Viewer you selected appears. 3. Configure the settings for the Viewer. Example: If you drag an Object Viewer to the Pane, an Object Viewer configuration dialog box opens, and you can specify the type of object to view and the actual object of the type. C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter 2 69 EFTA01225354 Appicatbo Layout Tasks If you pick VideoEdge Camera as the Type, you can also select a specific VideoEdge Camera object to view in the pane if you wish. 4. Click Save and Close to save the configuration settings for the viewer you placed. 5. The Viewer you placed appears as an additional tab in the Pane, as shown below. Depending on the width of the Viewer Pane, you see the tab(s) and/or a horizontal scroll bar. (There are three Viewer tabs in the figure below.) You can use the scroll bar to navigate between Viewer tabs and click any of the tabs in the Pane to view their contents. Ilf4 Intellex Video Camera VideoEdge Camera J < 13D) Adding an Object Viewer to an Application Layout When you drag an Object Viewer onto a Pane in the Application Layout, you can configure the object that appears in the Object Viewer. "MI To Add an Object Viewer to an Application Layout 1. Open the Application Layout to which you want to add the Object Viewer. 2. Click the Object Viewer icon and drag it to a Pane on the layout. The Object Viewer dialog box opens (see Figure 27 on Page 70). Figure 27: Object Viewer Dialog Box 3. Click ri in the Type field to select the type of object you want to display in the viewer. Example: Dynamic View 4. Click Ej in the Object field to select the actual object you want to display in the viewer. Example: Schedules View 5. Click Save and Close to save the configuration for the Object Viewer. Creating an Assess Event Layout You can use the Application Layout editor to create a layout for Assessing Events. An Assess Event layout can be used by an Operator who has the Assess Event Privilege to evaluate and acknowledge an Event. 70 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225355 Application Layout Tasks For an Operator to configure Event Assessment, the Operator must have the following minimum NOTE Privileges: ■ Edit permission for Application Layouts. ■ Edit permission for Events. ■ Read and View permissions for Documents (if included in assessments) For a C•CURE 9000 System that is upgraded to version 2.01, existing Operator Privileges will be set so that these Privileges are not enabled This means that an Operator who does not have System All Privilege will need to have these Privileges enabled in order to Assess Events. An Assess Event layout can be designed to give the Operator access to all the information they need to correctly evaluate an Event according to your security procedures. It can provide the Operator with any of a wide range of viewers that are targeted to the objects that are directly related to the Event that just occurred. These include: ■ Live video related to the Event. ■ Recorded video related to the Event. ■ Documents detailing event procedures, details about the building, or any other information you deem pertinent. ■ A map of the vicinity of the Event. ■ A Query related to the Event. ■ A Journal History related to the Event. ■ The Event Details. ■ A Report related to the Event. The objects displayed in these viewers are configured within the Event itself, so that the viewer contents are directly related to the Event being assessed. (see the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide chapter on Events for more information on configuring an Event for assessment.) To Create an Assess Event Application Layout 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Application Layout from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click New to create a new Application layout. The Application layout Editor opens. 4. Select Assess Event from the Application Layout Type drop-down list. 5. For each type of Assess Event Viewer you want to include in the layout, drag an Event Assessment Viewer onto the layout, then use the Event Assessment Viewer dialog box to select the viewer type you want to display. See Assess Event Application Layout on Page 37 for more information. 6. Use the tools provided in the Application layout editor to customize the appearance of your layout. See Application layout Tasks on Page 65 for more information. 7. Use the Application layout Options Tab on Page 29 to determine the behavior of the Assess Event Application layout after the Event is acknowledged. 8. To save your new Application layout, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 71 EFTA01225356 Application Layout Tasks After you save an Application Layout as an Event Assessment Application Layout, you can only NOTE change it back to Standard if it is not being used by any Events for assessment.. If you save an Application Layout as a Standard layout, you can change it to an Assess Event layout only if it is not assigned to any Operator as a layout. Creating a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout You use the Application Layout editor to create a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Layout. A Dual Phase Acknowledgement layout can be used by an Operator who has the correct privileges and permissions to evaluate, acknowledge and/or clear an Event. The Event action may be configured for an Operator to clear an event that has been acknowledged by another Operator. ■ For an Operator to be able to respond to an Event configured for Dual Phase Acknowledgment, NOTE the Operator must have the correct Privileges and Permissions. ■ Dual Phase Acknowledgement can be configured to Acknowledge and Clear Events in one Event Viewer Pane, or in two Event Viewer panes as described below. Using two panes is recommended. The Event, Event permissions and privileges, and Operator Monitoring Station layout assignments are configured in the Configuration pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide, "Events" chapter for more information. Create a Dual Phase Acknowledgement Application Layout This section describes how to set up the Application Layout to use the Dual Phase Acknowledgement sample layout, and also how to create a new layout. The sample layout contains three panes: ■ Event Viewer (top pane) - contains events requiring no action, events that require Acknowledgement, and events requiring Acknowledgement and Clearing. ■ Event Viewer (bottom pane) - contains events requiring clearing. ■ Activity Viewer - contains all activity. See Application Layout Viewers on Page 33 for detailed procedures and field descriptions. To Create the Application Layout Using the Dual Phase Acknowledgement Sample Layout the sample layout can be used as is, or it can be copied and edited. NOTE If you use the sample layout, it is highly recommended that you create a copy instead of modifying the original layout. 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Application Layout 3. Click g to display a list of pre-configured application sample layouts in the Dynamic View. 4. Double-click on the Dual phase event acknowledgement layout sample layout. 5. Click Create Copy. 6. Enter a Name and Description for the layout. 72 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225357 Applitatbn Layout Tasks 7. If desired: • Right-click on an Event Viewer pane tab and select Properties to edit the configuration. See Event Viewer on Page 45 for descriptions. • Right-click on the Activity Viewer pane tab and select Properties to edit the configuration. See Activity Viewer on Page 35. 8. Click Save and Close. To Create a New Dual Phase Acknowledgement Application Layout The Event Viewer default settings (if all the Event check boxes are selected) will create one pane that NOTE includes events pending acknowledgement and events pending clearing. The procedure below describes how to create an application layout with separate panes for pending acknowledgement and pending clearing. 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Application Layout. 3. Click E New to open the Application Layout Editor. 4. Enter a Name and Description for the Dual Phase Acknowledgement layout. 5. Drag Event Viewer onto the layout to display the Event Viewer Editor. The Event Viewer opens with the default settings, as shown in Figure 28 on Page 74. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 73 EFTA01225358 Appbcation Layout Tasks Figure 28: EventViewer Editor I6Event Viewer PIED Save and Cost Opucns Freeze Imsout (seconds' 130 R-0 Show Toolbar Buttcns ✓ Show Quick Action Buttons ✓ °how Acknowledge All end Silence Ali auttor ✓ Shoer Clear All Button F 'show Acknowledge and I ,e;i" ✓ 4,ElognAcknowledge and Gee! Al: Boh -, Events I✓ Include Events Requiring No Action P Include Events Pending Acknowledgement P Include Events Pending Ckai 6. Deselect the Events Include Events Pending Clear check box to create a pane for Events requiring Acknowledgement and Events that require no action. 7. Select the buttons for the Event Viewer pane. See Event Viewer Properties on Page 45 descriptions. 8. Click Save and Close. 9. Drag Event Viewer onto the layout to display the Event Viewer Editor. The Event Viewer opens with the default settings, as shown in Figure 28 on Page 74. 10. Deselect the Events Include Events Requiring No Action and Include Events Pending Acknowledgement check boxes to create a pane for Events that require Clearing. 11. Select the buttons for the Event Viewer pane. See Event Viewer Properties on Page 45 descriptions. 12. Click Save and Close. 13. Optional. To add other viewer types to the layout, see Application Layout Viewers on Page 33. Modifying an Application Layout You can modify an Application Layout for use with the C•CURE 9000 Monitoring Station. 74 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225359 Application Layout Tasks To Modify a Application Layout 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Application Layout from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click to view a list of existing Application Layouts and click the Application layout you wish to modify to select it. 4. Right-click the selected Application Layout and choose Edit from the context menu. 5. On the Application Layout editor, you can change any of the settings for the Application Layout 6. To save your modified Application Layout, click Save and Close. Removing a Pane from the Layout You can remove a Pane that you have added to a Layout. You cannot remove the Primary Pane from the layout. This is the Pane that does not have a x icon in NOTE the title bar. Each Layout must contain at least one Pane. To Remove a Pane from the Layout 1. Click the Pane title bar of the Pane you want to remove. X 2. Click © on the Pane title bar, or right-click on the Pane tab and select Close. 3. The Pane is removed. Removing a ViewerNiewer Tab from a Pane You urn remove a Viewer that you have added to a Pane. You can also remove a Viewer from the Layout by removing the Pane from the Layout. NOTE To Remove a Viewer from a Pane 1. Righ6click the name tab of the Viewer you want to remove. Intellex Video Camera VideoEdge Camera I < ICI 2. Choose Close from the context menu that appears. 3. The tab is removed. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 75 EFTA01225360 At::: cal Laycoi I ays Locking the Layout You can lock the Application Layout arrangement of panes so that a user cannot change the Application layout or close any Panes. This may be desirable for security purposes, or to make sure that certain viewers, like surveillance cameras, are always visible. You can lock the Application layout by setting the Locked field in the Application layout Editor to True and saving the Application layout. When an Operator displays a locked Application layout, the Operator cannot move, resize, close, or auto-hide any of the Panes/Viewers. Unlocking the Layout You can unlock the Application layout by setting the Locked field in the Application layout Editor to False and saving the Application layout. Auto Hiding and Pinning Panes A Pane in the Application Layout can be docked to the nearest side of the layout using the Auto Hide feature. A docked pane is visible when you select it or hover over it. The Pane hides or docks to the nearest edge when you are not using it. Auto Hide Panes You can set a Pane in the Application layout to Auto Hide so that it closes when the mouse pointer is on another pane, displaying only a viewer name tab, docked to the nearest side of the screen. When the mouse pointer hovers over the viewer name tab, the Pane opens and remains open until the mouse pointer moves away again. This is similar to the Auto Hide capability you can set for the Windows XP task bar. The Explorer Bar and Floor object viewer name tabs are shown docked to the left side of the window in Figure 29 on Page 76. Simply hovering the mouse pointer over one of these tabs opens that tab. Moving the mouse pointer away causes the tab to slide closed. Figure 29: Docked Viewer tabs m Activity Viewer co Date • Tin 1 11/6/20[ 11/6/20( Pinned Panes A Pinned Pane is a pane that is not using Auto Hide, so it is always visible. 78 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225361 App:calKai Layaat 1 asks To Auto Hide a Pane 1. In the Application Editor, click II to change the Pane to docked (I1). 2. When you move the mouse pointer away from the Pane, the Pane will Auto Hide and a viewer name tab will be docked to the nearest edge of the layout. To Pin a Pane 1. In the Application Layout Editor, hover over the viewer name tab of a docked (Auto Hide) Pane to open the Pane. 2. Click -12 to change the Pane to Pinned i 4 j. Resizing and Moving Panes in the Layout You can change the size and position of Panes within the Application Layout Editor. To Resize a Pane 1. In the Application Layout Editor, hover the mouse pointer over the border of the Pane that you want to resize. The mouse pointer changes to 4. for a vertical border or + for a horizontal border. 2. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the border to the width you want. To Move a Pane 1. In the Application Layout Editor, click the title bar of a Pane. 2. Drag the Pane to a new position. A shaded outline shows you where the Pane will be placed. 3. Release the mouse button to drop the Pane into a new position. 4. If you drag the Pane into a position between two Panes, the shaded outline changes to a rectangle. If you release the mouse button, it creates a floating window above the layout. You can drag and drop a viewer into this floating window. (You cannot, however, save the Application Layout with a pane that is floating. You need to make sure that all panes are anchored in the layout before you click Save. If the Layout is locked, a Monitoring Station Operator will not be able to move or close the NOTE floating window. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 2 77 EFTA01225362 Application Layout Tasks 78 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225363 3 Dynamic Views This chapter explains how to configure and use Dynamic Views. In this chapter Dynamic Views Overview 80 Dynamic View Editor 82 Dynamic View Editor Definitions 91 Dynamic View Viewer 93 Dynamic View Viewer Definitions 105 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 79 EFTA01225364 DynamicViewsOventlew Dynamic Views Overview Dynamic Views are used to display C•CURE 9000 objects in a List view or Card view, so that you can view, edit, group, or filter objects in the list. The search results from queries run in C•CURE 9000 are also displayed in a Dynamic View in the Content pane or in a popup window. Dynamic Views display information about C•CURE 9000 objects dynamically—objects in the view can be edited, deleted, monitored, exported, and printed from the Dynamic View. The Date/Time fields display in the client computer's local time. Grouping, sorting, and filtering capabilities allow you to organize and focus on the data you need. When you are viewing a Dynamic View and changes occur to the objects in the view, the view updates to reflect the changes. Example: If you are viewing a list of all Personnel, and a new Personnel record is added to the database, the Dynamic View will be updated to display the new Personnel record. The following sections provide more information on Dynamic Views. • Dynamic View Editor on Page 82 lets you create new Dynamic Views and customize existing Dynamic Views. • Dynamic View Editor Tasks on Page 83 provides a list of the tasks you can perform with the Dynamic View Editor. • Dynamic View Editor Definitions on Page 91 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on the Dynamic View Editor. • Dynamic View Viewer on Page 93 displays your Dynamic Views and lets you group, filter, and print the information displayed in the Dynamic View. • Dynamic View Viewer Tasks on Page 94 provides a list of the tasks you can perform with Dynamic Views. • Dynamic View Viewer Definitions on Page 105 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on the Dynamic View Viewer. See Figure 30 on Page 80 for an example of a Dynamic View (a list of Readers). Figure 30: DynamicView a STARItearkt -Mr Vass ' D R,f) (a. Cant: • New • COMIRsaiel eue_510114 RH made alFIN tut cr.F14 C0MIRweled-cw_510114 C0WIReakel.t.c510114 byealeg_ toot*, Real zies_ex_510116-IN Road= • I -ISC Bead. I • it,1 COIAlth Ateclegfl011408Uxo_031alb You can create Dynamic Views for every type of data object in C•CURE 9000. In addition, you can attach a query to a Dynamic View to retrieve only certain objects of a type from the database. Each object type comes with a default Dynamic View, so you can view object data dynamically without changing a thing. You can also create additional Dynamic Views customized to your needs, and then set one of the customized views as the default view for that object type. 80 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225365 Dynamic Views Overview Co CURE 9000 also includes two pre-defined Dynamic Views, numbered SWHdv02 and SWHdv22, NOTE as examples of the ways in which you can customize views. You can use these "as is" or copy and customize them as you want. For detailed information, see the Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views on Page 254 on pre-defined Dynamic Views. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 81 EFTA01225366 Dynamic View Editor Dynamic View Editor The Dynamic View Editor, shown in Figure 31 on Page 82, lets you create customized Dynamic Views in addition to the default Dynamic Views for each object type. Figure 31: Dynamic View Editor :(Licr•e•ccer —7 Gerierd %%worse Way r HisMaws r 0•101. P So-aa0• P EMI:100:00d COM I Gank omn/ Ncl0on Junk*, Fogad.* I Ms& wet Sid Mao Wavy* The following sections provide more information on Dynamic Views. • Dynamic Views Overview on Page 80 provides an introduction to the capabilities of Dynamic Views in C•CURE 9000. • Dynamic View Editor Definitions on Page 91 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on the Dynamic View Editor. • Dynamic View Editor Tasks on Page 83 provides a list of the tasks you can perform with the Dynamic View Editor. • Dynamic View Viewer on Page 93 displays your Dynamic Views and lets you group, filter, and print the information displayed in the Dynamic View. • Dynamic View Viewer Tasks on Page 94 provides a list of the tasks you can perform with Dynamic Views. • Dynamic View Viewer Definitions on Page 105 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on the Dynamic View Viewer. Accessing the Dynamic View Editor You can access the Dynamic View Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Data Views pane. 82 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225367 DynamicView Editor To Access the Dynamic View Editor 1. Click the Data Views pane button . 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Dynamic View. 3. Click New to create a new Dynamic View. - or - Click E6r. to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Dynamic View objects, right-click the Dynamic View you want to change, and click Edit from the context menu that appears Dynamic View Editor Tasks You can perform the following tasks with the Dynamic View Editor. ■ Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Configuring a Dynamic View on Page 83 ■ Choosing Dynamic View Settings on Page 84 ■ Setting a Default View on Page 89 ■ Creating a Copy of a Dynamic View on Page 90 Configuring a Dynamic View To configure a newly created Dynamic View, you open the Dynamic View Editor and adjust the settings for the view based on what you want the view to display, and how you want the information on the view to be shown. Example: You can set the view to display as a Card View (see Using Card View on Page 104). To Configure a New Dynamic View: 1. Select Dynamic View from the Data View pane drop-down list. 2. Click New. The Dynamic View Editor opens (see Figure 31 on Page 82). 3. Type in a name for this Dynamic View in the Name field. 4. Type in a Description for this Dynamic View in the Description field. 5. To choose the display settings and columns to display for your Dynamic View, follow the steps in Choosing Dynamic View Settings on Page 84. 6. Click Save and Close to save the Dynamic View. - or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Dynamic View as a copy of the existing Dynamic View, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Dynamic View on Page 90. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 83 EFTA01225368 Choosing Dynamic View Settings You can choose setting in the Dynamic View Editor that will determine how the Dynamic View displays information about an object type, including attaching a query to filter the data retrieved from the database. To C hoose Dynamic View Settings I. From the Dynamic View Editor, to set the object type that your Dynamic View displays, click E] for the View Type field to open a Select Type dialog box and click an object type from the list to select it. Changing the view type of a Dynamic View clears the list of fields and detaches the Query (if any) NOTE attached to the Dynamic View. 2. In the Query field, you can click n to use a query object as a filter for the Dynamic View. • In the list of Queries that appears, select an existing query, either pre-defined or user-created, for the object type you chose in View Type. This attaches the existing Query to this Dynamic View. Any time you select this Dynamic View, the data is filtered by the parameters in this Query. 3. To make this Dynamic View the Default View for all objects of this class, select Make default view. 4. To make this Dynamic View display in Card View rather than as a list, select Display in card view. 5. To allow the user to use the Dynamic View toolbar, select Show toolbar. 6. To allow the user to use the commands on the context menu (Edit, Delete, etc.), select Enable Context Menu. 7. Use the toolbar buttons on the properties table to choose the Columns to display on your Dynamic View, and to position those columns. ate Add a4, Remove 4 up 93. Down • Click "t1 to add a property to the table, which adds a column for that property to the Dynamic View. See Table 13 on Page 91 for definitions of the Dynamic View Properties. • Click k, to remove a property from the table, deleting a column for that property from the Dynamic View. • Click to move a property up in the table, which moves that column to the left in the Dynamic View. • Click a to move a property down in the table, which moves that column to the right in the Dynamic View. Figure 32 on Page 85 shows an example of Configured Column rows. 84 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225369 DynamicView Editor Flgure 32: DynamicView Configured Columns mai 7 creel ga, r Monis' A. r ei••••€.1""' IT1,0111r g • SPAPCSI fuellata.14 Homb,••• 44/1 (SOS mo/44, 0 B • r r r _4 8. Click Save and Close to save the Dynamic View. - or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Dynamic View as a copy of the existing Dynamic View, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Dynamic View on Page 90. How to Save a Dynamic View Both the Administration Station and the Monitoring Station have a userconfig file which stored information that the user has configured. The file has the following path: (Windows Drive):\Users\[UserName]\AppData\Local\SoftwareHouse\SoftwareHouse.NextGen.Cli_ StrongName_[Encypted Data]\2.10.0.0 The file contains the following: • Information that refers to the position of screens and objects that the user configured. • Dynamic View data and its associated columns and column widths which a user has configured. The user.config file is stored locally to the client. If the user starts the application from a different computer, a different configuration set could be used. If you want to override the default group in the Dynamic View, create a default Dynamic View for the specified object type. If you do not have privileges to see a certain Dynamic View for a particular object type, the system works as if the Dynamic View is not defined. Adding Columns When you add columns to a Dynamic View, C•CURE 9000 saves the column name and width information in the userconfig file. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 85 EFTA01225370 Dynamic View Editor There are two types of Dynamic Views stored: 1. The first type has an associated key that refers to the type of object displayed in the Dynamic View. This is truly dynamic as it has not been saved to the database and is created at runtime. 2. The second type has an associated key that refers to the ObjectID of the Dynamic View found in the database table. The userconfig data pertaining to a Dynamic View appears in the file when the user closes the Dynamic View and \ or closes the Administration Station or Monitoring Station applications that they are using to view it. Example: The user.config can contain the following data: <configuration> <userSettings> <SoftwareHouse.CrossFire.Client.ClientComponents.DynamicViews.DynamicViewControl> <DynamicViews> <DynamicView key="SoftwareHouse.CrossFire.Common.Objects.Operator"› <DynamicViewColumns> <DynamicViewColumn key="Name" width=n509n type="System.String" title="Name" editable="False" livevalue=nFalsen/> <DynamicViewColumn key="Description" width="347" type="System.String" title="Descriptionn editable="False" livevalue="False" I> <DynamicViewColumn key="WindowsPrincipaln width="116" type="System.String" title=nSelectionColumnn editable="Falsen livevalue="False" 41> </DynamicViewColumns> </DynamicView> <DynamicView key="20"> <DynamicViewColumns> <DynamicViewColumn key="PrimaryPortrait" width="102" type=nSystem.Hyte()" title="Primary Portrait" editable="Falsen livevalue="True" fr> <DynamicViewColumn key="LastName" width="98" type="System.String" title="Last Name" editable="False" livevalue="True" it> <DynamicViewColumn key="FirstName" width="98" type="System.String" title="First Name" editable="False" livevalue="True" I> <DynamicViewColumn key="Text4" width="98" type="System.String" title="Text4" editable="False" livevalue="True" it> <DynamicViewColumn key="Text14" width="98" type="System.String" title="Text14" editable="False" livevalue="True" it> <DynamicViewColumn key="PersonnelTypen width="102" type="....ObjectKeyn title="Personnel Type" editable=nFalsen livevalue="True" it> </DynamicViewColumns> </DynamicView> </DynamicViews> 88 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225371 DynamicView Editor </SoftwareHouse.CrossFire.Client.ClientComponents.DynamicViews.DynamicViewControl> </userSettings> </configuration> When you add or remove a column to the Dynamic View, the associated data in the userconfig file changes accordingly. While you can remove a default column from a Dynamic View, the column reappears the next time you access the Dynamic View. A default column can be the column which appears the first time you access a Dynamic View. You can add any additional columns that are available when you right-click on the Dynamic View column headers through the column selection menu that appears. You can either check or uncheck the list of columns or select the More columns... menu option and select multiple columns from the object selection control that appears (see Figure 33 on Page 87): Figure 33: DynamicView- ChockboxColumn Selection Menu 6 Event x eo. Ack Always Clears went renx Acknowledged efault and Acknowledgement requires log message kfault iota E • DOOR F11211B - MONITCE Active Status ITORED OFFLINE Allow Acknowledgement while causes are active. q OFFUN ER ALARM Armed Status T A1ARM H Description 31 FAILURE ALARM T ALARM Enabled AGEWAY 1 - DOOR F1110 ET, iCTED CA Latch Event AGEWAY 1 DOOR F11101 bEOOPB SUPERVISION TROUBLE Min ActiveTime ERVISION ISION TROUBLE Name DIVISION DOOR C12003A-MONITOIE Partition TORED - DOOR C11206C - DOOR Priority :ED OPS ERY LOW ALARM Remain Silent T ALARM ABILITY- DOOR P122106 - Require Acknowledgement R HELD A IPERVISION TROUBLE Send to Monitoring Station UNISON EMER EXIT - DOOR O112( ITORED Template .- DOOR C11206C- INVALI !CTED CA Unified Map Name PER ALARM T ALARM ER FAILURE ALARM More columns... T ALARM See Setting a Default View on Page 89 for information on how to set a default view. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 87 EFTA01225372 DynamicView Editor Default Grouping of Dynamic View Rows The C•CURE 9000 application lets you group Dynamic Views on one or more columns. You can configure grouping in a Dynamic View object editor or at run-time for an opened Dynamic View. Some Dynamic Views installed with C•CURE 9000 system are grouped by default to make it easier to select related objects and to make the grouping visible to new users of the system. Default grouping is applied to the following Object Types: • Quay (see Figure 34 on Page 88) • Report Result (see Figure 35 on Page 88) • Reports (see Figure 36 on Page 89) • User-Defined Fields (UDFs) (see Figure 37 on Page 89) Figure 34: DynamicView Default Query Grouping 0tergagelpa • II 1ciet isO1 II agCtsed•C4 I kw(II II /44IL•A II (Ina CY El Ogestil IS Mat Cram SAO • Cmasolfrat4 vik• TrOsp0wri Ml 1r exnovae • *Mime seer* mit a wi, 'paw mete *a ikAlerliKKA OMNIMOD* pumailpuS up Id.. ips 7o* Ws w.f., Dr...As. S•ba • CneillS wpm. Deis [wino*/ Siltda-Cadiableldeilt•Clualt. WOO Om 0rarall0ama tIt 'toAlIckShrEtav a *See Rie Yw cart10,10! ler/bnewgmkt Willi ••04 S44•43.0edlablullaisChilitathisOwt Owril•StaelnablithmlaiseValty osaika %flat Yotaime4 lb. combidotpstitan Woke aM SlinS.CSiisionlalltetfialtaailal••••" ChearalOid•SediallisinlAdWidiroopcilaSwot tam* isonlinSpido :e.n. SIMO•hrogy Cm.thil•Pasdhpe lbw DINGS Slis45.10:010misCalleusalley OwybdiarldoexCalmOnallifiladineRORECklimemluilchillios UNdrillisol We Sq*C.MtCsom•Owntolpak••16.009Ropfloy IMF kCiminClawa aanksdagatiderioubeadelkstallahiRopaSYNEI letwild SeiftS.Cara•Clento teas Sas Spawn OwybOattlowasidensolwlipallartaramlifeltels•31010:.kw•lafiliha f, ib It Carl i Oinianill II 64.10 • F igure 35: DynamicView Default Report Result Grouping Oelliveta (T) 91<4 CleilteaidAIPIWAPJOIKAI012, tt•C•••,,i • h•latiel CV* di IP 11.011.•100110107) • Nnantil neCaMernoPetimailth Nam Cress a Ins Oily Wm. Stssa Pip Con Ond.n Omoyea. P.M•••••• 6.2071.111 17 me 2 C,Yam 88 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225373 Dynamic View Editor F Igu re 36: DynamicView Default ReportsGrouping SI Ihis • Ana hen (11 • *Cease:AY:I • aneemee tameII) Who Wrre Permarn hare Cenron *Mt AY Ce• Pow tn•beit • MO Na.Parr 'GA 04..ittn Orbit In Pewee! p .dpt. w :an ne lora.ani On—AO • Crsenahl) Gan Cr... CO NOM Orley NM Peraan Yin Cowan, ROMS • Owls Omens Plepl Seillem16•All we Brake Cialm Dedeann1:!nit ten ill caw. ctwooxot yYv ex: net not PISS Q....floes' Pen: shoh (Itnenrear nine ire sdleOin mot • Crowe Clarern YAM Penn IIIMIP.A4ROSCIIWOVIP Pehnenn ton Cul., Mn(' .91.• nOVAPlin in$ MAO. Centersen V4. CMPete Curt [WWI PSI SANAA Can Oman &a.*keiota • Galan Cl= • nbooths Ninth, TAW( Ianellhen clernarckenrca O. 79.9 Mp Cs Peep Itten t• havosend wok*, danto na• moral bOKSOilnin (SwieeM) Figure 37: Dynamic Views Default UDF Grouping PANS Table Herne Grabs. F•eld F4d Typo Defeat 'isla Weems. Verve Irtaxena, C.P. Depolneel_ (nate., Wed ent Saw kb Sernb_ Iree0e1 0 0 214433M? ISA Setting a Default View Default views are views that control how the Quick Search feature displays information. When a default view is set for an object type, a Quick Search of the object type displays the default view columns in the Content pane. The default view is also used when a user runs an existing Query (from the Advanced Search pane, for example, or an Instant Query). For information, see Query Overview on Page 146. In addition, the settings for Editing in Place for each column in the Quick Search display are governed by the Editable setting for that column in the default view. See Editing In Place with Dynamic Views on Page 102. The default view initially provided for Quick Search is to display only the Name and Description fields, and to disable in-place editing. There can only be one default view per object type. When you select Make default view while editing a Dynamic View and save that setting, that new view becomes the default view for its object type—clearing the setting in the Dynamic View that was previously the default view. If an object type does not have a default view, the system creates a default view on the fly, displaying only Name and Description in most cases. Some object types, such as Data Imports, have more columns in their default Dynamic View. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 89 EFTA01225374 Dynamic View Editor To Set a View as the Default View 1. Configure a Dynamic View or Create a Dynamic View. 2. Set the object type for the view by choosing a View Type. 3. Add the columns you want to be displayed in the default view for this class. 4. Select Make default view. 5. Click Save and Close to save the Dynamic View settings. The view you edited is now the default view for its object type. Creating a Copy of a Dynamic View You can create a copy of a Dynamic View, using it as a blueprint for a new Dynamic View. Any fields configured in the existing Dynamic View are copied for the new Dynamic View —only the Name field is blank. (For information on copying one of the pre-defined Dynamic Views, see To Customize a Pre-defined Report/Query/Dynamic View on Page 269.) To Create a Copy of a Dynamic View 1. Create/modify a Dynamic View on the Dynamic View Editor. For information, see: • Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 • Configuring a Dynamic View on Page 83 • Choosing Dynamic View Settings on Page 84. 2. Click Create Copy. The following warning message appears if the current object has been modified in the Dynamic View Editor. War ning: Changes will be lost mere o'ird Wien, crea•q a COO* tie Cancel I • Click Yes to save the existing Dynamic View and its configuration and open a copy on the Dynamic View Editor. • Click No to open a copy on the Dynamic View Editor without saving the existing Dynamic View. • Click Cancel to return to the Dynamic View Editor without creating a copy. If you clicked either Yes or No, the Dynamic View Editor re-appears with a copy of the Dynamic View displayed and the Name field blank. If an existing Dynamic View is opened and you click Create Copy, the copy is created immediately. NOTE 90 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225375 Dynamic View Editor Definitions Dynamic View Editor Definitions The following sections provide definitions of Dynamic View editor fields and buttons. • Dynamic View Editor Fields on Page 91 • Dynamic View Editor Buttons on Page 92 Dynamic View Editor Fields Table 13 on Page 91 provides definitions of the Fields on the Dynamic View Editor. Table 13: DynamicView Editor Field Definitions Fields Description Name The name of the Dynamic View. Thisfield is required to have an entry. Description Type a description of your Dynamic View that will help you distinguish it from other similar Dynamic Views. View type Click (l to select the type of C•CURE 9000 object you wish to display in the DynamicView. Partition A read-only field displaying the name of the Partition to which this Dynamic View belongs. Query Click (l to select a Query from a dialog box that appears. You can only select Queries based on the Object type you chose for view type. If you have not chosen a View type. or if the view type you chose does not have any queries defined, the Query dialog box will be empty. Make Select this choice to designate the DynamicView you are editing as the default view for the selected object type. default view Example: If you are building a Dynamic View of Personnel, and you select Make default view, this Dynamic View will replace the current default DynamicView for Personnel. When a user selects Personnel in the Personnel pane and clicks 0 ' thisview will open bydefault. Display in You can choose to make the Dynamic View open for viewing in Card View. If you make the toolbar available, a user can switch card view between Card View and List View using a button on the toolbar. If you do not select Show Toolbar, the user cannot switch from Card View to List View. Show You can choose to make the Dynamic View toolbar available or not available for this Dynamic View. If you enable the toolbar. toolbar users ca n to sort. fitter. print. and refresh the Dynamic View. as well as view the list in Card View. These choices are not available if the toolbar is not visible. Enable You can choose to make a context menu available or not available for objects in your Dynamic View. Typicalchoiceson the context context menu are EdIt. Delete. and View (the exact choices in the context menu depend on the type of object being displayed). menu Column Choose a property of the object type for thevie v. Each row in the table represents a column in the Dynamic View that corresponds property to a property of the object. Example: If your Dynamic View lists Personnel objects, and you choose Last Name as a column property. then one of the columns of your Dynamic View will display the Last Name of each Personnel object listed in the Dynamic View. Hidden Select to not display this column. You can sort or group by a hidden column. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 91 EFTA01225376 Dynamic View Editor Definitions Dynamic View Editor Fled Definitions (continued) Fields Description Justification Align the column text to the left, right, or center bychoosing a value from the drop down list. Foreground Select the color to use for text in this column from the Windows color picker dialog box that appears. color Header font Select the font to use for the column header for thiscolumn. Sort Set the sort order of data in the column. Choices are None, Ascending, or Descending. None means that the objects are displayed in the view in the order that they are retrieved from the database. Editable When a column is marked as editable. you can dick a cell to open the control which edits the property. When you change the value of a property this way. the change is va 'dated and the property is updated when you click in another cell. Initially Sets the property to be the primary object to group under. See Default Dynamic Views on Page 93. group Dynamic View Editor Buttons Table 14 on Page 92 provides definitions of the Buttons on the Dynamic View Editor. Table 14: DynamicView Editor Buttons Name Description Save Clickwhen you havecompleted any changes to the Dynamic View and wish to save those changes. The Dynamic View Editor and doses. (This button isnot available for the Software House pre-defined Dynamic Views.) Close Create Click this button when you want tocreate a new Dynamic View using the entries in the Dynamic View currently on the Dynamic View Copy Editor as a template. If the Dynamic View is user-created and the current Object has been modified, a warning appears asking if you want to save your original before creating the copy. Click Yes to save the original Dynamic View. No to not save it, and Cancel to return to the original Dynamic View without making a copy. Close Clickwhen you want to dose the Dynamic View Editor without saving your changes. A prompt appears so that you can choose to continue editing or close the editor. Click OK to close the editor without saving changes, or click Cancel to continue editing the Dynamic View. Add Click to add a row to the table. which adds a column to the Dynamic View. Remove Click to remove the selected row(s) from the table. Click anywhere in the row to select it. Hold down CTRL and click rows to select more than one row. Up Click to move one or more selected rows up in the table. Click anywhere in the row to select it. Hold down CTRL and dick rows to select more than one row. Down Click to move one or more selected rowsdown in the table. Click anywhere in the row to select it. Hold down CTRL and dick rows to select more than one row. 92 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225377 Dynamic View Viewer Dynamic View Viewer The Dynamic View Viewer displays a list of the objects you configured for the Dynamic View using the Dynamic View Editor. The Viewer gives you a variety of sorting and filtering tools for customizing the view, as well as the ability to edit data in place in the view. There are default Dynamic Views for many objects in the C•CURE 9000 database. Consult the relevant C•CURE 9000 User Guides for information about these object types. For more information, see: ■ Default Dynamic Views on Page 93 ■ Dynamic View Viewer Definitions on Page 105 By system default, a Dynamic View displays a maximum of 200,000 rows. You can use a System NOTE Variable to change this number. For information, see the UI Settings section in the System Variables chapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. If your C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned, each default Dynamic View displays a Partition column NOTE as the right-most column of the Dynamic View. If you do not want the Partition column to display in a Dynamic View, you have to edit the Dynamic View and set the Partition column to 'hidden'. Default Dynamic Views C•CURE 9000 provides several System default Dynamic Views that you can view and use in the Dynamic View Viewer. ■ Time Zone View ■ Schedules View ■ Holidays View ■ Audit Log View ■ Credentials View ■ System Variables View ■ Personnel View ■ Reports View ■ Report Results View ■ Journal View ■ Report Form View ■ Digital Certificates View ■ Event View ■ Guard Tour View You can see these Dynamic Views by opening the Dynamic View that lists them. See Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 93 EFTA01225378 Dynamic View Viewer Default Dynamic Views for other object types are created on the fly and contain two fields only—Name and Description in most cases —until you create a customized default view for them. (Some object types, such as Data Imports, have more columns in their default Dynamic View.) C•CURE 9000 also includes two pre-defined Dynamic Views, numbered SWHdv02 and SWHdv22, NOTE as examples of the ways in which you can customize views. You can use these "as is" or copy and customize them as you want. For detailed information, see: ■ Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views on Page 254 ■ Creating a Copy of a Dynamic View on Page 90. Dynamic View Viewer Tasks You can perform the following tasks with the Dynamic View Viewer. ■ Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20 ■ Adding or Removing Columns in a Dynamic View on Page 94 ■ Changing Column Order and Width in Dynamic Views on Page 95 ■ Using Dynamic View Viewer Tabs on Page 96 ■ Grouping Dynamic View Information on Page 99 ■ Filtering Dynamic View Information Using the Filter Bar on Page 96 ■ Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects on Page 97 ■ Retrieving the Query That Created a Dynamic View on Page 101 ■ Sorting Dynamic View Information on Page 101 ■ Printing Information from Dynamic Views on Page 101 ■ Editing In Place with Dynamic Views on Page 102 ■ Editing Records on Dynamic Views Using Set Property on Page 102 ■ Exporting Records on Dynamic Views to XML/CSV on Page 22 ■ Exporting Dynamic View Contents to Excel (.XLSX) on Page 103 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Using Card View on Page 104 Adding or Removing Columns in a Dynamic View You can add or remove columns in a Dynamic View to customize the view to meet your needs while you are viewing the data. When you add or remove columns from the Dynamic View in the Viewer, you are not saving these NOTE changes to the View. The changes are only in effect while you have the View open. To actually change the View permanently, you need to Configure the View (see Dynamic View Editor Tasks on Page 83) and save your changes. 94 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225379 Dynamic View Viewer ffa To Add or Remove Columns in Dynamic Views Open the List of Dynamic Views. See Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20. 2. Open a Dynamic View by double-clicking a particular Dynamic View in the list. 3. Right-click any column in the list. A context menu appears showing all fields of the object type that can display as columns in the Dynamic view. Fields currently displayed in the view are marked with a If the object type selected has more than 27 associated fields, the context menu lists only a few of the fields and at the bottom, a More columns.... button. 4. To add/remove a field as a column in the Dynamic View: - To add a field as a column in the Dynamic View, click a field in the list without a - To remove a field as a column in the Dynamic View, click a field in the list with a 5. If More columns... is available in the context menu, click to open a Selection list of the fields for the Object type. — To add a field as a column in the Dynamic View, click one or more fields in the list and then click OK. — To remove a field as a column in the Dynamic View click a field in the list with a Changing Column Order and Width in Dynamic Views You can change the left/ right order of the columns in a Dynamic View, as well as the width of each column in the view. When you change the order of columns for the Dynamic View in the Viewer, you are not saving these NOTE changes to the View. The changes are only in effect while you have the View open. To actually change the View permanently, you need to Configure the View (see Dynamic View Editor Tasks on Page 83) and save your changes. To Change Column Order in Dynamic Views 1. Open the List of Dynamic Views. 2. Open a Dynamic View by double-clicking a particular Dynamic View in the list. 3. Click any column heading in the list, and drag that column to a new position. The Dynamic View columns are adjusted to the new column order you have established. To Change Column Width in Dynamic Views I . Open the List of Dynamic Views. 2. Open a Dynamic View by double-clicking a particular Dynamic View in the list. 3. Hover the cursor over the column headings and move the cursor to the edge of the column heading you wish to resize. The cursor changes to ± . 4. Drag this cursor to the left or right and release the mouse button to make the column wider or narrower. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 95 EFTA01225380 Dynamic View Viewer Using Dynamic View Viewer Tabs You can open multiple Dynamic View Viewers in a single window. Each of these viewers becomes a tab in the tab bar at the top of the window, with an object type and icon to distinguish between Viewers. See Figure 38 on Page 96. Figure 38: DynamicViewTabs a pynamic View Repat A- Credential Tine Zone Personnel V Van -66 sr, D Cant 12 When you click a tab, the Dynamic View for that tab becomes visible. To configure a Dynamic View, you open the Dynamic View Editor and adjust the settings for the view, based on what you want the view to display and how you want the information on the view to be shown. Example: You can set the view to display as a Card View (see Using Card View on Page 104). To Use Dynamic View Tabs 1. Open the list of Dynamic Views. The Dynamic View Viewer opens in the content pane displaying the list of Dynamic Views. 2. Double-click a particular Dynamic View in the list. That Dynamic View opens in the content pane. 3. Now the tab bar at the top of the content pane shows two tabs, the original Dynamic View tab and the tab for the Dynamic View you just opened. 4. Click the first Dynamic View tab and the original Dynamic View opens. You can now open additional Dynamic Views, and each one will add a tab to the tab bar. Filtering Dynamic View Information Using the Filter Bar You can filter a Dynamic View so that it only displays the data you are interested in. This section describes using the Filtering bar. For information about filtering partitions and showing NOTE Maintenance Mode objects in the Dynamic View, see Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects on Page 97. Example: If you were viewing a Journal View, and only wanted to see Operator Login entries, you could filter the View to exclude other types of log entries. You can apply a filter to any and every column in the View, if you desire. When you filter columns from the Dynamic View in the Viewer, you are not saving these changes to NOTE the View. The changes are only in effect while you have the View open. To actually change the View permanently, you need to Configure the View (see Dynamic View Editor Tasks on Page 83) and save your changes. 96 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225381 Dynamic View Viewer Enabling Filtering for a Dynamic View •io filter a Dynamic View, the Enable Filtering button must be toggled on. To Enable Filtering for a Dynamic View 1. Open the List of Dynamic Views. 2. Open a Dynamic View by double-clicking a Dynamic View in the list. 3. Click to enable filtering. The filter bar appears under the column headings of the Dynamic View. Filtering a Dynamic View To Filter a Dynamic View 1. Open the List of Dynamic Views. 2. Open a Dynamic View by double-clicking a Dynamic View in the list. 3. Click to enable filtering. The filter bar appears under the column headings of the Dynamic View. 4. In the column you want to filter on, click Ei to open a drop-down list of filter criteria. Pick a filter criteria (such as "Starts with") from the list. 5. You can enter filter values for that column by typing or by selecting a value from a drop-down list of values. • Type a value into the filter bar for that column. As you type, the Dynamic View is filtered to match your criteria. • Click a to open a drop-down list of values that occur in the Dynamic View in this column. You can pick a value from this list to filter on. • Click V in a Date/Time column to open a Calendar control that lets you pick a date to filter on. You can use this date in combination with the Less than and Greater than types of filter criteria to filter on date values. 6. The Dynamic View updates to reflect the filter criteria you entered. Clearing Filters in a Dynamic View To Clear Filters in a Dynamic View 1. To clear filter criteria for a column, click 0 to the left of that column. 2. The Dynamic View updates to display the entire unfiltered list. Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects The View Preferences dialog box, shown in Figure 39 on Page 98, is used to filter a Dynamic View to show only selected partitions and to view objects that are in Maintenance Mode. To access the View Preferences Dialog Box, click oa. The following rules apply to filtering partitions and viewing objects in Maintenance Mode: C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 97 EFTA01225382 Dynamic View Viewer ■ Partitions that were added to the Default Dedicated List during the Application Layout configuration can not be filtered out of the list view and are always visible. ■ Operators must have the correct privileges assigned to them to be able to filter partitions and view objects tagged Maintenance Mode. Selections in the View Preferences dialog box are grayed out if the operator does not have the filtering privilege for partitions and/or Maintenance Mode. See the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide for information about using Maintenance Mode. Figure 39: View PreferenoseDialog Box(DynamicView) ja save and Close Partition Options Objects with Maintenance Mode 6. Shot: from All earbbcos 1 4. Shoe• all objects r Shoo: from Selected Parbbon.s ✓ Shot: maintenance objects only ✓ Hide maintenance objects Selectee Partitions Dedcated Group Patens/Group Name 4 To View Preferences to Filter Partitions and/or View Objects in Maintenance Mode 1. Select an object from a Pane's drop-down menu and click IL to open a Dynamic View containing all the objects. 2. Click 66 to open the View Preferences dialog box, shown in Figure 39 on Page 98. (See Table 15 on Page 99 for descriptions of the fields and buttons.) 3. Click Save and Close. The View Preferences settings are saved in the operator's configuration file. 98 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225383 Dynamic View Viewer Table 15: View Preferences Dialog Box Definitions Button/Field Description Partition Options Show from All If selected, no tittering is applied and all partitions are displayed in the Dynamic View. Partitions Objects tagged Maintenance are not shown. Show from Selected If selected. only partitions in the Selected Partitions list. including the Dedicated partitions. are displayed in the Dynamic Partitions View. Objects tagged Maintenance are not shown. Objects with Maintenance Mode Show allobjects If selected. all partitions and allobjects in maintenance mode are displayed. Show maintenance If selected. objects tagged as Maintenance Mode. including the Dedicated partitions. are displayed in the Dynamic objectsonly View. NOTE: Objects in Maintenance Mode are not displayed in the list view. They are only displayed in the Dynamic View Hide maintenance If selected, objects tagged as Maintenance Mode, including the Dedicated partitions, are not displayed. objects Selected Partitions Add Click Add to open the Name Selection dialog box to add pre-configured partitionsto the list. Remove Removes partitions and partition groups from the view list. Click in the row of the partition/partition group to highlight it and click Remove. Dedicated column If a partition/partition group ischecked (selected) in the Dedicated column, then that partition/partition group cannot be filtered or removed from the view list. Group column If shown as checked (selected). the partition was configured as a group of partitions. Partition/Group Name The name assigned to the partition/partition group. column Grouping Dynamic View Information You can change the appearance of a Dynamic View by grouping information. Groups allow you to see at a glance how many objects have the same values for a given property. You can even nest groups to further segment the data and show objects that share common values in multiple properties. When you create a group from a column heading, each unique property value in that column becomes a group that lists that count of its group members. You can expand the group to show each member by clicking the + sign. You create groups of data in a Dynamic view by dragging a data column heading to the Drag Columns to Group by Here area (see Figure 40 on Page 100). C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 99 EFTA01225384 Dynamic View Viewer Figure 40: Grouping DynamicView Information 7U Dynamic View Refit rie Credential rn•• Tin t Personnel onnei Sian ael (fill5kCif f Cant 12 Drag columns to group by here Example: If you are viewing the Journal View Dynamic View, drag the JoumalLogMessageType column to the Drag Columns to Group by Here area, and at a glance you can see that there are 222 Object Changed State log entries, but only one Manual Action entry, out of 409 total messages. See Figure 41 on Page 100. Figure 41: Grouped Dynamic View IllOymmic view Thumal View YeeiN Cast !Ill0 mg niumns b vol., by Fere • manualAcbon(1) • He VideoAclmty 1531 • Otied ChteMOSItle 12221 • OPOSO 1.09A4 0 0 0,4 1531 fr oter0 ACiPAY • S0en Ent( (8) To Group Dynamic View Information 1. Open the List of Dynamic Views. 2. Open a Dynamic View by double clicking a Dynamic View in the list. 3. Click any column heading in the list, and drag that column to the Drag Columns to Group by Here area. That column heading becomes a Group Heading, and each property value in that column becomes a Group. 4. Click the a to view the members of a group. 5. Click on the Group Heading to change the direction (descending/ascending) of sorting for the groups. 6. To undo Grouping, drag a Group Heading back into the content area of the View, and the View changes the group heading back to a column heading. 7. To create nested group levels (groups of groups), drag additional column headings to the Drag Columns to Group by Here area. • If you place the column heading to the right of an existing group heading, it becomes subordinate to it (nested). • If you drag a column heading to the left of an existing group heading, the existing heading becomes subordinate to the new heading. 100 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225385 Dynamic View Viewer Retrieving the Query That Created a Dynamic View You can recall the query used to create the list of objects in a Dynamic View to see the exact parameters and values that generated those particular results. You can then change the query, if you wish, and rerun it to obtain different results in the Dynamic View. The displayed Query does not include criteria from the filtering of the Dynamic View. The Query defines the records selected from the database with the filter turned off. For more information about querying, see Query Overview on Page 146. To Recall a Dynamic View Query 1. On the Dynamic View, click 41 to recall the Query. The Query criteria and values used to retrieve the records for the Dynamic View appear on the Query parameters dialog box. 2. Review the query information, clicking the Details button as necessary. 3. Modify the query if you wish and rerun it to obtain different results. If there was no query used to produce the list in the Dynamic View, the Query parameters dialog box NOTE will have no entries. However you can add query parameters and then run a query to limit the list of objects in the Dynamic View. Sorting Dynamic View Information You can sort the information displayed in a Dynamic View in one or more columns by clicking a column heading. When you sort columns from the Dynamic View in the Viewer, you are not saving these changes to NOTE the View. The changes are only in effect while you have the View open. To actually change the View permanently, you need to Configure the View (see Dynamic View Editor Tasks on Page 83) and save your changes. To Sort Dynamic View Information 1. Open the List of Dynamic Views. 2. Open a Dynamic View by double-clicking a Dynamic View in the list. 3. Click a column heading to sort the data in the Dynamic View alphabetically or numerically by that column. The sort direction toggles between Ascending order / and Descending order . Printing Information from Dynamic Views You can print a C•CURE 9000 Dynamic View and filter, sort, group, add, or remove columns, or change the column order of the View prior to printing. To Print a Dynamic View 1. Open the List of Dynamic Views. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 101 EFTA01225386 DynamicView Viewer 2. Open a Dynamic View by double-clicking a Dynamic View in the list. 3. Click a and a Windows Printer dialog box opens. 4. You can select the size and orientation of the printout, set the margins, or change the printer. 5. Click OK. A Print Preview dialog box is displayed that lets you view a print preview of the view, zoom the preview, scroll through each page, and send the view to the printer. 6. Click the Printer icon to sent the Dynamic View to print. Editing In Place with Dynamic Views Typically, to edit data in a record listed in a Dynamic View, you would double-click the record to open the editor for that record, or right-click on the record and click Edit from the context menu. However, if you have the appropriate privileges and the Dynamic View is configured to allow one or more data columns to be edited, you can edit the data directly from the Dynamic View. Some Dynamic Views, such as the System Variables Dynamic View, are designed so that you can change values in editable fields by clicking in the field. If an edit box or other edit option appears, you can edit the field. To Edit a Dynamic View Record in Place 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Dynamic View from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click i ji' to open a Dynamic View listing all Dynamic View objects. 4. Double-click a Dynamic View for the type of object you want to edit. 5. Click the field in a row in the Dynamic View that you want to edit. If the field is editable, an edit box or other edit option appears so you can add or change the value. 6. Type the new value or choose the value from a selection box for the field. 7. If you have the appropriate privileges, your changes are saved when you close the Dynamic View. Editing Records on Dynamic Views Using Set Property You can also use the context menu selection Set property to change the value of fields in one or more records displayed in a Dynamic View. When you right-click the record(s) in the Dynamic View and chose Set property, a dialog box appears that lets you access the editable fields for the object. To Edit Records on a Dynamic View Using Set Property 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane and select Dynamic View from the pane drop-down list. 2. Click d; to open a Dynamic View listing all Dynamic View objects. 3. Double-click a Dynamic View for the type of object you want to edit. 102 Chapter 3 CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225387 Dynamic View Viewer 4. Select one or more rows in the list (using the CTRL key to select multiple rows), and right-click the selected row (s) that you want to edit. 5. Choose Set property from the context menu. A dialog box appears for you to select the field to edit. 6. Click E to open a dialog box listing each of the editable fields for the object. 7. Click the field you want to edit to select it. The Selection dialog box closes and the name of the field you selected is inserted in the property field. 8. Edit the value for the field. If the field is text, you can type in a text value. If the field is a check box, you can select or clear the check box. 9. Click OK to confirm the new value. A dialog box appears to confirm that your change to the property has been made. Exporting Dynamic View Contents to Excel (.XLSX) You can use the Dynamic View toolbar selection Export view contents to Excel® to export the Dynamic View contents to an XLSX (Microsoft Office Open XML Format Spreadsheet) workbook file. This allows you to quickly and easily create a spreadsheet containing the data in a Dynamic View that you have displayed. When you export a Dynamic View to an XLSX file, all available data in displayed columns of the Dynamic View is exported. Columns that are not included in the Dynamic View are not exported. Columns that are included in the Dynamic View, but are not visible without scrolling, are exported. Example: For each of your company's personnel records, out of the many Personnel fields available, you want to quickly create an Excel report that includes Last Name, First Name, Personnel Type, and whether or not the Disabled and/or Noticed Flags are set. You can add and delete Columns on an open Dynamic View, then click Export view contents to Excel® to save the information in the Dynamic View to a spreadsheet. Records exported to XLSX cannot be imported back to C•CURE 9000. Export to XML (see NOTE Exporting Records on Dynamic Views to XML/CSV on Page 22) if you want to re-import the data. To Export Dynamic View Contents to Excel 1. From the Administration Workstation Navigation Pane, select the function button for the class of object you want to view on —for example, Personnel. 2. From the drop-down menu in the Navigation toolbar, select the type of object you want to select —for example, Personnel. 3. Click az., to open a Dynamic View listing all the objects of the desired type. 4. If you are planning to export to Excel, add/remove data fields columns and change their order, as desired. 5. You can click the Dynamic View Toolbar V icon to filter the records in the view. See Filtering Dynamic View Information Using the Filter Bar on Page 96 for more information. 6. Click IN A Windows Save As dialog box opens. 7. Navigate to the location where you want to save the XIS file, and type the filename you want to use. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 103 EFTA01225388 Dynamic View Viewer 8. Click Save. 9. If Windows successfully saves the file, a View File in Excel dialog box appears. Click Yes to view the file in Excel, or No to decline. If you choose Yes, but you do not have Excel on your system, an error message appears. Using Card View The Dynamic View Viewer provides a Card View capability that lets you view objects in the Viewer as Card Records, similar to the Address Card view in MS OFFICE Contacts. To Enable Card View You can view any Dynamic View as a Card View by clicking the Card View button. 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Dynamic View from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click a s to open a Dynamic View showing all Dynamic View objects. Right-click on a Dynamic View in the list (for this example, choose Personnel View) and click View. The Personnel View opens. 4. Click the Card View button D The Personnel View changes from a Dynamic List to a Card View list. 5. You can click D again to toggle back to a Dynamic View. To Use Card View ■ For each card in the list, you can click I to expand a card and view the details of the object in the Dynamic Card View. ■ You can click on a field name in an expanded card and drag the field to another position in the card. Two red arrows appear to show you where the field will be positioned when you release the mouse button. ■ You can print a Card View by clicking the Dynamic View Toolbar Print button. ■ If you drag a field name (a column in Dynamic View mode) to the area of the view marked Drag Columns to Group by Here, the Dynamic View data is re-arranged into groups based on that field. For example, if you drag the Personne Type field to that area, the view changes to groups made up of the Values of Personnel Type. Views - °". V PersonnelType U Contractor (2) + Employee (3) ,± None (9) 104 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225389 Dynamic View Viewer Definitions Dynamic View Viewer Definitions This section provides definitions of the Fields and Buttons on the Dynamic View Viewer. • Dynamic View Toolbar on Page 105 • Dynamic View Tabs on Page 106 • Dynamic View Filter Bar on Page 106 • Data Views Object Context Menu on Page 20 Dynamic View Toolbar Seelable 16 on Page 105 for definitions of the toolbar buttons on the Dynamic View Viewer. Table 16: Dynamic View Toolbar Definitions Button Name Description Views - Views Click the down arrow to show a list of Dynamic Views of the same object type as the view currentlydisplayed. Click one of the views in the list, and the view in the current tab ischanged to display the view you clicked. Example: If you had a view displayed that showed Personnel with four data columns, you could dick View and display a view with 11 data columns, including columns that were not displayed in the originalview. View Click to open the View Preferences dialog box displaying pre-configured dedicated partitions, with an option to 603 Preferences add non-dedicated partitions and/or objects tagged Maintenance Mode that the operator has the privilege to view. For more information, see Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects on Page 97. At Refresh Click to manually refresh the current list. showing items in the list that have changed values. and new items in the Woe list that were not included before. NOTE: Dynamic Views update automatically when values change or the list of items changes, but you can still perform an immediate update by clicking this button. D Card View Click to toggle Card View. For more information, see Default Dynamic Views on Page 93. Printer Click to open a Windows Printer dialog box. You can select the size and orientation of the printout, set the fi l margins, or change the printer. When you click OK. a Print Preview dialog box is displayed that lets you view a print preview of the view, zoom the preview, scroll through each page, and sent the view to the printer. Group Click to toggle the data grouping bar. This button does not change the grouping of the data itself. When the data e3 grouping bar isdisplayed, you can drag a column onto the bar to cause the data to be grouped by that property. For more information, see Default Dynamic Viewson Page 93. Filter Bar Click to toggle the data littering bar. This button does not change the tittering of the data itself. When the data filtering bar is displayed, you can dick the bar to set filtering criteria. Use the fitter bar to enter values that will fitter (narrow down) the entries (rows) in the Dynamic View. For more information, see Default Dynamic Views on Page 93. CO Recall Click to display the query and parameter values used to generate this particular Dynamic View. Once the query -0 Query appears on the Query Parameters dialog box, you can review the query and modify and rerun it if you wish. For more information, see Default Dynamic Views on Page 93. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guido Chapter 3 105 EFTA01225390 DynamicView Viewer Definitions DynamicView Toolbar Definitions (continued) Button Name Description Export Click this button to save the oontents of this Dynamic View as an .XLSX (Microsoft Office Open XML Format i-Ok Spreadsheet) workbook file. A file save dialog box appears, and you can change the location and name of the file. view con- A prompt appears to confirm that the file was saved, and asks you if you would like to view the file in Excel. tents to If you do not have Excel, and you choose Yes from this dialog box, an error message is displayed, and the file is Excel@ not opened. See Exporting DynamicView Contents to Excel (.XLSX) on Page 103 for more information. Count At the far right of the toolbar, the number of objects contained in the Dynamic View (the number of rows in the Court: 121I view) is totaled. Dynamic View Tabs Dynamic Views typically appear in the Content pane of the C•CURE 9000 Administration Client. The Content pane supports tabbed viewing of multiple views by displaying a tab bar at the top of the Content pane. The features of the Content pane tabs are shown in Table 17 on Page 106. Table 17: DynamicView Tabs Definitions Feature Name Description iii DynamicView 1 Tab The Content pane contains tabs for allopen files across the top. you can click any tab and the tab contents become visible in the Content pane. Context Menu You can right-click any tab to open the Context Menu. There are three choiceson this I Close menu. Close All Tabs But This Close - Close the tab that is currentty being displayed in the Content area. Close All Tabs Close All Tabs But Thls - Close every tab except the tab that is currentty being displayed in the Content area. Close All Tabs - Close every tab that is currentty being displayed in the Content area. : Open Files Click to display a list of allopen tabs, and click a tab in the list to display that tab. < > Previous/Next Click Previous to scroll the display of tabs to the left. or Next to scroll the list of tabs to the right. These buttons are active onty when there are more tabs open than can be shown on the tab bar. Dynamic View Filter Bar When you click the Filter button 7 , a filter bar appears under the column headings in the Dynamic View. You can use the filter bar to enter values that will filter (narrow down) the entries (rows) in the Dynamic View. For more information, see Default Dynamic Views on Page 93. 106 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225391 Dynamic View Viewer Definitions Table 18: Dynamic View Tabs Definitions Feature Name Description Clear Fitter Click to clear all filter criteria that you have previously set for this column. El Criteria Chose Filter Click to select a fitter criteria for this column. Possible values are: 0 Criteria • Equals • Does not equal • Less than • Less than or equal to • Greater than • Greater than or equal to • Like • Matches Regular Expression • Starts with • Contains • Ends with • Does not start with • Does not end with • Does not match • Not Like Chose Filter Click to display a list of allvalues for this property that exist in the DynamicView, with any active fitters other columns Value applied. Example: If another column has a fitter that causes all rows with a value of "No" to be filtered out, this list will not Lot any values from those filtered out rows. When you select a value from this list, the Dynamic View is filtered so that it displays onty those rows that match the fitter criteria for this column and the fitter value you have chosen. Example: If the fitter criteria for this column is"Equals" and you chose"Nos from the Value list, the Dynamic View w ill dispby only rows where the property value in this column is"Nos. Additionally, this list contains: [Blanks] - displays onty rows with a blank value INonBlanks] - displaysonty row with a non-blank value [Custom] - creates custom criteria for this row CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 3 107 EFTA01225392 Dynamic View Viewer Definitions 108 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225393 4 Maps This chapter explains how to configure Maps. In this chapter Maps Overview 110 Map Editor 111 Legacy Maps 113 Accessing the Map Editor 118 The Map Editor Toolbar 120 Map Editor Tasks 123 Map Viewer 143 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter< 109 EFTA01225394 Maps Overview Maps Overview In C•CURE 9000, version 230, there are two types of Maps: Legacy Maps and Maps ■ Maps - Maps created in version 230 are called Maps. ■ Legacy Maps - Maps created in earlier versions are now called Legacy Maps when you upgrade to version 230. You can view and edit Legacy Maps in version 230, but you cannot create new Legacy Maps. For more information about Legacy Maps, see Legacy Maps on Page 113. Converting Legacy Maps ■ Current Legacy Maps will be removed from C•CURE 9000 in a future version, so you should convert your Legacy Maps to the new Map format. The conversion process occurs in two phases. ■ Phase 1 involves phasing out existing functions, including retrieving existing maps, associated icons, and vector files, and creating new map records that contain all applicable data to implement and load the maps. ■ Phase 2 replaces the original maps by transferring the system relationships (links) to the newly converted maps. Features The C•CURE 9000 version 230 mapping implementation supports these features: ■ Convert Legacy Maps to Maps. ■ Zoom to show different portions of a map and a different magnification. The zoom feature provides the ability to zoom to 5000% (you can use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.) ■ Make the entire map viewable. ■ Import a raster or vector graphic file to be the basis of your map. ■ Add custom layers that contain different object icons to a Map, and you can show or hide any layers of the map. ■ Import supports DWG, DXF, JPG, and PNG formats. ■ Editor displays an icon status bar underneath the map that contains the coordinates as separate text boxes. ■ Open a map from an icon -You can create an icon on a map and configure it to open another map in the database. ■ Create a map template that can be used as the basis of other maps. ■ Change the background color of a map. For example, you can use a different background color to distinguish between Maps. For example, the map showing inputs could have a green background, while the map showing outputs has a yellow background. ■ Add an icon representing an object in the C•CURE 9000 database to a Map. You can also assign an action to the icon so that a user viewing the map can click the icon to perform such actions editing the object, Arming or Disarming the object. ■ The maximum number of maps that you can simultaneously popup is 8. ■ Export a Map graphic to JPG, while importing a graphic into a Map. 110 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225395 Map Editor Map Editor You can load and configure Maps to unite access control with floor plans or other building layout types that represent your facility. C•CURE 9000 allows you to load a CAD drawing and add C•CURE 9000 objects to monitor the object's state and location. See the following topics for more information about Maps. ■ Maps Overview on Page 110 ■ Accessing the Map Editor on Page 118 ■ The Map Editor Toolbar on Page 120 ■ Map Editor Tasks on Page 123 ■ Map Viewer on Page 143 Working with C•CURE 9000 Maps The Maps feature includes two operational modes: ■ Administration mode - allows you to configure the facility floor plans or site plans that show exterior features. This mode is accessed with the Map Editor. For more information, refer to The Map Editor Toolbar on Page 120. ■ Runtime mode - allows you to monitor and interact with the configured building layouts or site plans. This mode is accessed with the context menu by selecting View, Popup View and View in Current Tab. For more information, refer to Map Viewer on Page 143. The Map Editor lets you display your facility's floor or site plan, and place clicicable icons that can open views of other objects and monitor the state of security objects. Two types of graphic files can be imported into a map: vector files and raster files. The file types include: ■ Vector - *.dwg , *dxf ■ Raster - *.jpg• *•Png A vector image uses geometrical primitives such as points, lines, curves, and shapes or polygon(s), which are all based on mathematical expressions, to represent images in computer graphics. ■ A vector image can be scaled without losing any details. ■ A raster image is a dot matrix data structure representing a generally rectangular grid of pixels, or points of color, viewable via a monitor, paper, or other display medium. Raster images are stored in image files with varying formats. ■ A raster image does not scale and the loss of detail is possible. Converting Legacy Maps The map conversion process is divided into two phases. Phase 1: The first phase involves retrieving existing maps, associated icons and vector files from C•CURE 9000. Retrieving existing maps, that is, "Legacy Maps" includes loading each map, determining the location of icons; and creating a new map record that contains all applicable data for the new map tool to load the map and display the icons. The Legacy maps will be viewable, but you will be unable to edit or modify the maps in their original state. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter< 111 EFTA01225396 Map Editor Phase 2: The second phase involves replacing the original maps by transferring the system relationships (links) to the newly converted maps. Once the second phase is complete, the converted maps will have the same functions as their Legacy Maps precursors (pop-up for alarms and be available for additional edits, etc). In Phase 2, you will be limited to viewing the original maps via the maps dynamic view. The original maps will still be available for linking if you want, but any links will be lost if we remove "old" maps from the system in a future release of C•CURE. After an existing C•CURE 9000 system is upgraded to C•CURE 9000 230, you have the option of converting your existing maps, that is, "legacy maps" to the new maps implementation. For more information about Map Conversion and the associated tasks, see Map Conversion on Page 276. 112 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225397 Legacy Maps Legacy Maps Legacy Maps are Map objects created prior to version 230 of C•CURE 9000. These Maps are currently supported, but they will be deprecated in a future version of C•CURE 9000. A conversion program is provided to facilitate the updating of these Maps to the new Map format. See Map Conversion on Page 276. You can edit existing Legacy Maps but you cannot create new Legacy Map objects. For more information on the Legacy Map Editor, see: • The Legacy Map Editor Toolbar on Page 113 • Legacy Map Viewer on Page 116 The Legacy Map Editor Toolbar The Legacy Map Editor Toolbar (see Figure 42 on Page 113) allows you to load an existing building floor plan and doe the following: • Add layers to it • Insert or add an object on the plan • Resize the object (such as an icon representing a camera or door) • Drag the object to its actual location in the facility • Save the object to that position. The Map Editor Toolbar buttons and functions are explained in Table 19 on Page 113. Figure 42: Map Editor Toolbar Gonad I ,aEabortp, ?)..oaxwau.-1 GI t33 ja ..- - P torn - T7 + IM -la Table 19: Map Editor Toolbar Button Function Clear - dears the Map allowing you to start anew. D Load external file - opensa Windows fie selection dialog box so you can load a graphic ge. 6 such asa floor plan file. to start buiding a map. Two fie categoriesexist: vector filesand raster ties. The file types include: • Vector - '.dxf. '.dwg.*.clwf,*.svg,*.wmf. • Raster - '.Nag. '.brnp,*.gif,*.png, 'Id. You can select the file type to load by dioosing either Vector or Raster in the Files of type field on the Windows file selection dialog box. Set background color- displays a Windowscolor picker dialog box for you to select a color ") . for the Map background. The color you pick displays in the box to the right of the icon. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 4 113 EFTA01225398 Legacy Maps Map Editor Toolbar (continued) Button Function Show map layers button -displays a layers popup. Allows the user to manage the map 711 Layers. The Map Layers popup displays the following: • Original tab - presents the existing layers that get imported with the selected vector file. (No layers import with raster file types. In the case of raster file types, a new layer 0 is generated automatically since at least one layer is required.) This tab allows you to determine which layers should appear in the map. De-selecting a layer hides that layer in the map. This tab includes the following three check boxes: - Check all -displays all layer content for all the layers. (Thischeck box is also found on the Custom tab.) - Uncheck all - hides all layer content for all the layers. (This check box is also found on the Custom tab.) - Display in Map -displays all layer content for the selected layer. (This check box is also found on the Custom tab.) • Custom tab -Allows you to manage layers. For example, you can create an "event" layer and place all the C•CURE 9000 Event iconson that layer. Then you could create a "video" layer and place all cameras and tours on that layer. Both layers can be monitored simultaneously. Also, both layerscan be hidden or either one displayed. This tab includes the following two buttons: - Add layer - add a new layer to the map. - Remove layer - remove a layer from the map; all icons embedded in this layer are also removed. Layer Name Combo Box - identifies the current active layer. Any C•CURE 9000 icons added to the map are embedded in this layer. r1 Show Track Window -displays a movable box that represents the visible area of the map. You can drag the box to adjust which portion of the Map graphic is visible. Show Magnify Window - displays a zoomed region that magnifies the map r il area over which it is dragged. 7 Show Coordinates Window -displays a Map Coordinates popup window that provides precise information for the screen pixel bcations of the window, dimensions, mouse position, and the position of map icons. The Map Coordinates window incorporates the current zoom level, which means that some pixel values may be represented by negative numbers (since they are off-screen). Double-clicking the Icon name causes the associated icon to reveal its location by temporarily blinking. If the icon is off-screen, a message suggests the user zoom out. If the icon is under the Map Coordinates form, the forflopacity will adjust, allowing the user to see the icon blinking through the form. Set X Axis - if selected, you can move along the X- axis for zooming and shift to XY X coordinates (if selected); used in conjunction with the ± and - buttons. Set Y Axis - If selected, you can move along the Y-axis for zooming and Shift to XY Y 000rdinates (d selected); used in conjunction with the ± and - buttons. 114 Chapter 4 CCURE 9000 Data VIUVIS Gll ICI12 EFTA01225399 Legacy Maps Map Editor Toolbar (continued) Button Function Shift to XY coordinates - If selected, you can Shift to XY coordinates along the selected ) i, axis (either or both); used in conjunction with the -I- and buttons. Zoom into map - as long as it is held down. the map continues to zoom in until the maximum + is reached. 100% Zoom Units - select a zoom percentage ranging from 50 to 5000%. ..• . _ Zoom out from map - as long as it is held down, the map continues to zoom out until the maximum is reached. Fit map in Window- fits the map into existing window. The percentage is also reset to IN 100%. .!, Grip and move the map - adjusts the Map mode and cursor to a "four-arrow" orientation, • providing a "grip' of the map so it can be moved; the track window updates accordingly. The Grip and Select buttons are mutualty exclusive. Select object on the map - adjusts the Map mode and cursor to a cross-hair orientation providing an icon selector to edit and move loons on the map. Grip and Select are mutually exclusive. Draw Zoom rectangle -draws a rectangle on the map that will zoom to full screen. ;0 r:... Show tooltips -when selected, icon toottips appear when the mouse is hovered over an icon. Show previous map -click this to go to the previously displayed map. This button is * ;I unavailable when the first map is active. Add an object to a map - Clicking will result in placing an icon on the map in the current Na layer. The object's defa u tt icon will be placed on the map. Save Icon- integrates and saves the icon in the map. M Cancel icon -cancels the entire operation. If you have not saved the icon, it removes the Cif icon from the map. If you are editing an existing icon, any changes you have made since you last saved the icon are discarded. . Delete the Icon - removes the icon from the map. Edit Icon - invokes the Maps icon Properties dialog box. 4i Print map - invokes the Windows Print dialog box allowing you to print the current Map using your default printer. CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 0 115 EFTA01225400 Legacy Maps Map Editor Toolbar (continued) Button Function Additional Buttons -If the Maps Editor window isnot maArnized, some buttonsare not 6 displayed on the toolbar if a map is loaded. Click the arrow to display and choose one of these buttons. Legacy Map Viewer The Legacy Map Viewer allows you to view an existing Map (such as a building floor or site plan) and also view security objects represented as icons on the Map. These icons can be placed on the Map using the Map Editor (see Adding an Object Icon to the Map on Page 131). The Map objects can also be viewed using the context menu. The context menu is displayed when you right-click a Map row in the Data Views pane and also when you right-click an icon on the Map Popup View. See the example in Figure 43 on Page 116, where the selection of the Popup View of Map 2 is displayed with a subsequent Popup View of a security camera, both showing runtime conditions. Figure 43: Popup Views ( '111141 9(101) AdmIrittlralion Slallon (Adminisliator) -.(6 h Kt, earaCialir4 t .7000 agoinal Bow I no. I Li 61AA Catch Bum is viola Mel Ida 000 Costa 1 • Nd'oCriege Date Views w••-66 DS V SI) CI. The context menus differ from one object type to another. In addition, the appearance of each context menu depends upon the setting of the Show context menu on right-click option configured in the Maps Icon Properties dialog box. You can also display a runtime popup of a camera by clicking the icon. 116 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225401 Legacy Maps The Map Viewer Toolbar is shown below in Figure 44 on Page 117. lists the tools available in the Map Viewer Toolbar. Figure 44: Map Viewer Toolbar 3- Maps Map 7 fft ,[5_4_ Map Viewer Toolbar Button Function Show Track Window-displaysa popup that tracks movement over which it is dragged within the current map vie v. E ill Show Magnify Window -displays a zoomed region that magnifies the map area over which it is dragged. INI At Draw Zoom rectangle- draws a rectangle on the map that will zoom to full screen. + Zoom Into map - as long as it is held down, the map continues to zoom in untilthe maximum is reached. _ Zoom out from map - as long as it is held down. the map continues to zoom out until the maximum is reached. 75 % v Zoom Units - select a zoom percentage ranging from 50 to 5000%. Fit map In Window- fits the map into existing window. The percentage is reset to 100%. Ell Grip and move the map - adjusts the Map mode and cursor to a "four-arrow' orientation, providing a "grip" of the map so it ± can be moved: the track window updates accordingty. The Grip and Select buttons are mutuany exciusS. Show tooItIps -when selected. icon tooltips a ppea rs when the mouse is hovered over an icon. Show previous map -click this to go to the previousty displayed map. This button is available when an icon action opens :: another Map - you can click this button to go back to the fist Map.This button is unavailable when the fist map is active. Example: You create a Map of your campus, and add several icons, each representing an building. You assign a left click action to each of the icons to open a map of that building. If you open one of those Maps, the Show previous map button is active in the Map Viewer so that you can navigate back to the original Map. Print map - invokes the Windows Print diabg box allowing you to print the current Map using your default printer. Rnt C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 4 117 EFTA01225402 Accessing the Map Editor Accessing the Map Editor You can access the Map Editor for both new Maps and Legacy Maps from the C•CURE 9000 Data Views pane. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. The Map Editor enables you to edit/view new Mapsand view Legacy Maps. Accessing the Map Editor for Maps To Access the Map Editor for New Maps 1. Click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Maps. 3. Click ail to open a Dynamic View showing all Maps objects. 4. Double-click on Maps in the list that you want to edit or view, and the Map Editor opens. NOTE If you select Maps and click IL., and the system detects that you have Legacy Maps, a message appears: Error Anew mapping solution has been implemented. You will no longer be a able to create a new 'Legacy Map. Atthis time, it is recommended that you convert your existing 'Legacy Maps' to the new mapping solution, since 'Legacy Maps' will be removed in the next CCure 9000 version. Please click the 'Help' button for detailed instructions on how to convertyour existing 'Legacy Maps'. OK Help f you click the Help button, Map Conversion on Page 276 opens and provides instructions for converting your Legacy Maps to the new format. Accessing the Map Editor for Legacy Maps To Access the Map Editor for Legacy Maps 1. Click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Legacy Maps. 118 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225403 Accessing the Map Editor 3. Click P to open a Dynamic View showing all Legacy Maps objects. 4. Double-click on Maps in the list that you want to view and the Legacy Map Editor opens. If you click New, or attempt to edit a Legacy Map, a message appears: NOTE A new mapping solution has been implemented and your existing OA maps now exist as 'Legacy Maps. You will no longer be able to create a new legacy Map'. At this time, itis recommended that you convert your existing legacy Mapito the newmapping solution, since legacy Maps' will be removed in the next CCure 9000 version. Please click the 'Help' button for detailed instructions on how to convert your costing legacyMape. OK Help If you click the Help button, Map Conversion on Page 276 opens and provides instructions for converting your Legacy Maps to the new format. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapfer4 119 EFTA01225404 The Map Editor Toolbar The Map Editor Toolbar The Map Editor Toolbar (see Figure 45 on Page 120) allows you to load an existing building floor plan and do the following: • Add layers to the plan • Insert or add an object to the plan • Resize the object, for example, using an icon to represent a camera or a door • Drag the object to its actual location in the facility • Save the object to that position. The Map Editor Toolbar buttons and functions are described in Table 20 on Page 120. Figure 45: Map Editor Toolbar Gonad buldng.cl”g • + 103% • — ifT D-4 Table 20: Map Editor Toolbar Button Function Clear -Gears the Map allowing you to start anew. ..__ r , , _, Load external file -opens a Windows file selection dialog box so you can load a graphic file, such as a floor plan, to start building a map. Two file categories exist: vector files and raster files. The file types include: • Vector - *.dwg *.dxf • Raster - Nog, *.png You can select the file type to load by choosing either Vector or Raster in the Flies of Type field on the Windows file selection dialog box. Set background color -displays a Windows color picker dialog box for you to select 'I > ) a color for the Map background. The color you pick d splays in the box to the right of the icon. ral Show map layers button -displays a popup Lays r that allows you to manage the „/: map Layers. The Map Layers popup displays the following: • Custom tab -Allows you to manage layers with vector graphics. For example, you can create an "event" Layer and place all the C•CURE 9000 Event iconson that layer. Then you could create a "video" layer and place all cameras and tours on that layer. Both layers can be monitored simultaneously. Also, both layers can be hidden or either one displayed. This tab includes the following buttons: - Check all -displays all layer contents for all the layers. - Uncheck all - hides all layer content for all the layers. - Add layer - add a new layer to the map. - Remove layer - remove a layer from the map; all icons embedded in this layer are also removed. 120 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225405 The Map Editor Toolbar Map Editor Toolbar (continued) Button Function A.WAIL -1 Layer Name Combo Box - identifies the current active layer. Any C•CURE 9000 icons added to the map are embedded in this layer. Zoom Into map - as long as this key is held down. the map continues to zoom in until 4- the maximum is reached You can combine the zoom key and the mouse wheel. 100% - Zoom Units - select a zoom percentage from 50% to 5000% _ Zoom out from map - as long as this key is held down, the map continues to zoom out until the maximum is reached. FIt map In Window-Idsthe map into existing window. The percentage is also reset DI to 100%. Select object on the map - adjusts the Map mode and cursor to a cross-hair orientation providing an icon selector to edit and move iconson the map. Grip and Select buttons are mutually exclusive. Add an object to a map -Clicking will result in placing an icon on the map in the current layer. The object'sdefautt icon will be placed on the map. See Adding an Object Icon to the Map on Page 131 for more information about adding an icon. Click the dropdown arrow to the right of the icon to display a menu that allows you to Add an Icon. Add an icon from template, and edit the loon template library. Add an Icon from template - If you have saved icons in the loon Template Library, click this button to choose an icon to add to the map. Icon Template Library - Opens a dialog box that allows you to add loons for objects to the Icon Template Library. Print mapinvokes the Windows Printdialog box allowing you to print the current Map CR using the default printer. Additional Buttons - If the Maps Editor window is not maximized, some buttons are not displayed on the toolbar if a map is loaded. Click the arrow to display and 17? • choose one of these buttons. Map Icon Status Toolbar The Icon Status Toolbar appears below the Status Bar and shows the Toolbar fields as separate text boxes. You can hover the mouse over an icon to display coordinate information in the toolbar. The values on the toolbar adjust as you an Icon around on the map. Table 22 on Page 122 provides definitions for the fields on the Icon Status Toolbar. Table 21: Icon Status Toolbar omajr.. lelabeilsobanscattialcetc.•••••3“."*“.ho's"'" ..MS fa%I 41,90$ 1.`150 ••10247110,4Flswier CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 4 121 EFTA01225406 The Map Editor Toolbar Table 22: Displaying Icon Status Bar Settings Field Meaning Name Name of the object the icon references in the system. When the user hovers the mouse over an icon, the icon status bar field displays the Name of the associated icon Example: dl Door. Event_2015-Plus Data Type Undertying type of the object being referenced. When the user hovers the mouse over an icon, the icon status bar field displays the name of the associated data type. Example: SoftwareHouse.NextGen.Common.SecurItyObJects.ISTARDoor Layer Number of layers. 0 indicates a single Layer. X Exact X location in pixels... Example: 630.86816720 Y Exact Y location in pixels: Example: 1117.36334405145 Width Width in pixels(80 pixels) Height Height in pixels(80 pixels) Scale X Relationship of the internalcoordinate system to the pixelsof the actual image along the X-axis. Height in pixels (80 pixels) Example 1 Scale Y Relationship of the internal coordinate system to the pixelsof the actual image along the Y-axis. Example 1 122 Chapter 0 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225407 Map Editor Tasks Map Editor Tasks You can use the Map Editor to create custom Maps that show almost anything in C•CURE 9000. Typically Maps are used to show building floor plans with clickable icons that represent objects in the C•CURE 9000 database. Clicking an icon can open an object editor, view, or pop up another map. The following sections provide instructions for some of the common tasks you can perform to configure Maps. ■ Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Creating a Maps Template on Page 123 ■ Importing a Maps Graphic on Page 124 ■ Configuring and Saving a Map on Page 127 ■ Map Layers on Page 127 ■ Deleting a Map Layer on Page 129 ■ Setting the Active Map Layer on Page 129 ■ Showing or Hiding Map Layers on Page 130 ■ Changing the Map Zoom Level on Page 130 ■ Fitting the Map in the Window on Page 131 ■ Adding an Object Icon to the Map on Page 131 ■ Selecting an Icon on the Map on Page 138 ■ Editing an Icon on the Map on Page 136 ■ Printing a Map on Page 140 ■ Clearing the Map on Page 140 ■ Modifying a Map on Page 140 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Opening a Map from an Icon on Page 141 ■ Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20 Creating a Maps Template You can create a new Maps template to use as the basis of additional maps. This function is useful for creating Map templates with multiple layers. You can create and configure new maps based on the templates:: Features include: ■ Showing or hiding some of the layers. ■ Zoom to show a different portion of the map. ■ Using a different background color to distinguish between Maps. For example, the map showing inputs only could have a green background, while the map showing outputs only has a yellow background.. ■ Changing the icon size. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter< 123 EFTA01225408 Map Editor Tasks To Create a Maps Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Maps from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click the down arrow on the New button. Maps v Template Al --Templates map template 4. Click Template to create a new Map template. 5. The Maps Editor opens, and you can configure the Map template by naming it and loading a raster or vector graphic file. 6. To save the new Maps template, click Save and Close. Importing a Maps Graphic You can import a raster or vector graphic file to be the basis of your Map. You can import one graphic at a time onto your map. If you import a graphic to a map that already has an imported graphic, you can replace and/or update the previously imported graphic. You can create a map without importing a graphic file or use a drawing as a graphic template. NOTE You can add object icons to a blank layer, and you can also change the background color of the map. Once you import a graphic, you can use the other functions on the Maps Editor toolbar to customize its appearance. See Configuring and Saving a Map on Page 127 for more information. To Import a Map Graphic 1. Create a new Map. (See Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19). 2. On the Maps General tab toolbar, click lit to Load an external file. A Windows file selection dialog box opens to allow you to load a graphic map file. 3. In the Files of type field, select the file type to load. ■ Vector - *.dxf, *.dwg ■ Raster - *.jpg, *•Png 4. Navigate to the folder in which your graphic file is located using the standard Windows navigation buttons. 5. Select the Drawing file to load from the list of files in the folder and click Open. Or select the map drawing file and click the Browse button n. 6. You can select the graphic Layers by number or name 124 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225409 Map Editor Tasks If the file you select cannot be imported correctly, an error message appears. NOTE "File:<filename> Is not supported or file format is incorrect" You can try importing the same file again, or re-save the file with a different file name or in a different format.. 7. If an icon is still selected, right-click the icon to open the context menu. Choose Save Icon to save any editing you have done, or click Cancel Icon to discard any changes you have made. Importing a Drawing File into C•CURE 9000 On the General tab, click iE) Load External File to load a graphic file, such as a floor plan, to start importing a file. Figu re 46: Drawing File tem airemm emce. (Shoo Ome Owed, aterstefixt Oro AD Z, o +17Th - l th I • Pk The Select Drawing File dialog box opens. 2. Clickri to select the drawing file you want to import into the C•CURE 9000 database. Figure 47: Select Drawing File to Import El Stied Drawing fele Select your drawing file by clicking the button above. Petee:h I !rip,: I Cancel C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 4 125 EFTA01225410 Map Editor Tasks 3. The system displays the graphic file you have chosen to import. Figure 48: Displaying Vector Drawing File 4. Click the Layers button to select the map layers you wish to import. C•CURE 9000 supports existing layers in a Vector based map at the original edit time; however; once NOTE the map is imported for runtime use the original layers are lost. You can turn the original layers on or off prior to importing. Once a map has been imported into the system, you can add new layers to the map which can be manipulated in edit mode. You cannot turn layers on and off at runtime as with the C•CURE 9000. You cannot view the layers in a raster graphic. The graphic is converted to a jpg or png image. 5. The Drawing Layers dialog box appears. 6. Pick the layer(s) you want to import by Selecting and/or Unselecting the layers. 7. Click OK. Figure 49: Displaying Drawing Layers Drawing Layers Select all Untelect All (*MINTS F GF F SECTION-A APPROVAL•DRG FRONT-ELEVATION L.79 TITLE SITE-FLAN F HATCH r NOTES TOILET-DETAILS SECTION2 C SECTION-B _0 1_ ( 1 Cancel 128 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225411 Map Editor Tasks 8. Click Import to import the graphic. 9. The system displays the graphic file you have imported so that you can edit the map. 10. Click Saveand Close to save the imported map. Configuring and Saving a Map To configure a Map, open it in the Maps Editorand adjust the settings based on what objects you want the Map to show and the functions you want the Map to perform. You can import a graphic file to form the basis of your Map, adjust the appearance of the Map, add a name and description for the Map, and save it to the C•CURE 9000 database. To Configure and Save a Map 1. Create a new Map (See Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19). 2. In the Map Editor, type a Name and Description for the Map. 3. You can import a graphic file to be the basis of your Map and add icons to the Map. See To Import a Map Graphic on Page 124. 4. To select a background color for the Map, click at n. A Windows Color selection dialog box appears, allowing you to select a background color. 5. To resize the Map to fit in the current window, click El .(Ht map in window button). The zoom percentage is reset to 100%. 6. To change the zoom level of the Map, see Changing the Map Zoom Level on Page 130. 7. To save your new Map, click Save and Close. Alternatively, if you want to save the Map and then create a new one, click Save and New. I he current Map is saved and closed, but the Map Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Map. Map Layers The Map tool can select which layers to display and/or hide. For example, the tool can set the active layer that new icons are added to, can add and delete custom layers, allow loading a new file without losing items in the custom layers, and also can query the user if items in the layers should be removed. While the new Map solution supports the existing layers in a Vector based map at the original edit NOTE time, once the map is imported for runtime use, the original layers are inaccessible. When a map has been imported for runtime use, you can add new layers to the map which can be manipulated in edit mode. You can add layers to a Map that contains different object icons. You can show or hide any layers of the Map. If you save the Map as a Map template, you can use the Map as the basis of additional Maps that show some layers and hide others. You only need to import the graphic image, size it once, and create the layers once. These attributes are inherited by the Maps created from the template. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter< 127 EFTA01225412 Map Editor Tasks Adding a Layer to the Map The original layers in a vector file are only supported when the map is being imported into the new map tool. At import time, you can click on a Layers button, which lists the layers specified in the vector file and allows you to include or exclude the layers from the final imported map. Once the map has been imported, your ability to edit the original layers will be unavailable. Raster file types do not allow you to import layers with raster file types. (In the case of raster file types, a new layer 0 is generated automatically because at least one layer is required.) This tab allows you to determine which layers should appear in the map. De-selecting a layer hides that layer in the map. To Add a Layer to a Map 1. Create a new Map or Map template. See: • Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 or • Creating a Maps Template on Page 123. 2. On the Map Editor toolbar, select (the Show map layers button). The Maps Layers dialog box appears (0 is the current layer). (see Figure 50 on Page 128). For definitions of the fields and buttons in this dialog box, see The Map Editor Toolbar on Page 120. Figure 50: Maps Layers Dialog Box area Gera rlaa.•a •.s OJSTONATER2 ci CVSKIWAIR3 3. Click the Custom tab. 4. Click Add layer. A new row is added to the table of layers in the Map. 5. You can click in the Layer field to edit the name of the layer. For example, if you plan to add Input icons to this layer, you could re-name it "Inputs Layer" 6. Select the check box in the Display in map field to have the layer visible in the Map, or clear the selection to have the layer hidden (not displayed on the Map). 7. You can click Add layer again to add more layers to the Map. You can remove a layer from the Map by clicking the Row Selector ► for the layer you want to delete, then clicking Remove layer. 128 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225413 Map Editor Tasks 8. Click Save and Close to save the layer definitions for this Map. The Map Layers dialog box closes. 9. To save your Map with the layers you defined, click Save and Close in the Map Editor. Alternatively, if you want to save the Map and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Map is saved and closed, but the Map Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Map. Deleting a Map Layer You can delete a Custom layer from a Map by opening the Maps Layers dialog box. To Delete a Map Layer I . Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. On the Map Editor toolbar, select M (the Show map layers button). The Maps Layers dialog box appears (see Figure 50 on Page 128). 3. Click the Custom tab. 4. You can remove a layer from the Map by clicking the Row Selector ► for the layer you want to delete, and clicking Remove Layer. 5. Click Save and Close to save the layer changes you made. The Map Layers dialog box closes. 6. Click Save and Close in the Map Editor to save the Map, preserving the layer changes you made. Alternatively, if you want to save the Map and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Map is saved and closed, but the Map Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Map. Setting the Active Map Layer When you add icons to a Map, you can set the Active Map Layer to control the layers to which you are adding the icons. To Set the Active Map Layer 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. On the Map Editor toolbar, click the drop-down arrow on the Show map layers button. 3. Click the layer in the drop-down list that you want to be active. 4. When you add an icon to the Map, the icon indicates which layer(s) are the active layers. If there is only one layer, 0 is the current layer. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter< 129 EFTA01225414 Map Editor Tasks Figure 51: Customizing Map Layers Showing or Hiding Map Layers You can use the Map Layers dialog box to set Map Layers that are visible when the Map is viewed. To Show or Hide Map Layers 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. On the Map Editor toolbar, select (the Show map layers button). The Maps Layers dialog box appears (see Figure 50 on Page 128). 3. On the Original tab or the Custom tab, for each layer that you want to show or hide. • Select the check box in the Display in map field to have the layer visible in the Map. • Clear the selection to have the layer hidden (not displayed on the Map). 4. Click Save and Close in the Map editor to save the layer changes you made. The Map Layers dialog box closes. 5. Alternatively, if you want to save the Map and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Map is saved and closed, but the Map Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Map. The software supports editing existing layers at the original edit time; however, once the map is NOTE imported for runtime use, the original layers are not available and you cannot edit them. Changing the Map Zoom Level You can change the zoom percentage of the Map by clicking the Lij and - zoom in and zoom out buttons or using the mouse wheel. 130 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225415 Map Editor Tasks To Change the Zoom Level 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click the arrow on the Zoom button to select a zoom percentage ranging from 50% to 5000% You can also type a zoom level in the box and press Enter to select a new zoom level. Table 23: Map Editor Toolbar Zoom into map- as long as the button is held down, the map continues to zoom in untilthe maximum is reached. + 100 ,c, - Zoom Units - select a zoom percentage ranging from 50% to 5000% The field percentage defaults to 100%. _ Zoom out from map - as tong as the button is held down. the mapcontinuestozoom out until the maximum is reached. 3. If you click and hold one of these zoom buttons or click the Zoom/Pan mouse , the map will continue to zoom in or out until the maximum or minimum zoom level is reached. General [j buldr.g.clm; AO' G 0 I I I ions aJI gd, I i ti] 4. Alternatively, you can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or zoom out. If the icon is off-the screen, a message may recommend that the user zoom out. The system displays the icon locations, layer and scaling information. The system displays the map scaling but does not display the current mouse position or the height and width of the map in pixels (always 2000 x 2000 pixels) . The Zoom tool has the ability to zoom a map in and out from 50% to 5000%. Fitting the Map in the Window You can to.t• the Fit map in window button to size the Map to fit within the Map window at 100% zoom. To Fit the Map in the Window 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click El (the Fit map in window button) to fit the map into the existing window and reset the zoom percentage to 100%. Adding an Object Icon to the Map You can add an icon representing an object in the C•CURE 9000 database to a Map. You can also assign an action to the icon so that a user viewing the map can click the icon to perform such actions as Editing the object, Setting a property of the object, Arming or Disarming the object according to the icon type and the action you assigned to the icon. C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter< 131 EFTA01225416 Map Editor Tasks You can create an icon library where custom job specific icons can be created, stored, and used. You can configure an icon to launch another map when clicked. The tool also has the ability to print the map with the icons in their current state. See Adding an Icon to the Icon Template Library on Page 137. You can open a map for viewing from an icon on a map; this lets you create nested maps so that you can, for example, look at a Map that displays icons for other maps in the system. You can click on any of these Map icons to view its related Map. See Opening a Map from an Icon on Page 141 You can also use the mouse to hover over an icon in view mode, and display the text or label of the C•Cure 9000 item. Example: You can design a Map that represents a multi-building campus, where each building is represented by an icon that, when clicked, opens a different map that shows the building's floor plan. See Opening a Map from an Icon on Page 141. You can also add an icon to the Map from the Maps Icon Template Library (a list of icons that you have previously saved). See Adding an Icon to the Icon Template Library on Page 137 for instructions for adding an icon to the library. To Add an Object Icon to the Map 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click the arrow on (the Add an Icon to the Map button). The context menu for the button appears (see Figure 52 on Page 132). Figure 52: Add Icon Drop-down M Addan ken Add an icon From tentte • LIJ Ian 10,1'OE° 'Eery 1 3. Click Add an icon to the map..1.2.:, Alternatively, click Add an icon from template, and then choose an icon from the drop-down list that appears. (See Adding an Icon to the Icon Template Library on Page 137 for instructions for adding an icon to the template library.) 4. A Maps Icon Properties dialog box appears. See Figure 53 on Page 133. 132 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225417 Map Editor Tasks Figure 53: Map Icon Properties Dialog Box map. icor, Praperlies eni Ono Leer lor Rrt won ICUST0ML4YER2 Ins to the Open Type Type IN« 0tirt 5. Click I in the Type field to open a Select Type dialog box that allows you to select an icon type for the icon. Click the icon type you want to choose for the icon, for example,Door is used to specify a door in the system. Figure 54: Map Icon Properties Dialog Box Stir. I in - Drag columns to Group by hete Class Descretion ask here to lite, data Ild epC Comm Pod TFis class is used to specify a apC comm pod in the sy apt Lanolin This class is used to specify an apt ccreciler. epC Dos A door associated wth an apC contralti. art Input An irput associated wlll an apC weds. apt Reader A leader associated hit}, an apC controls. Area Pis class is used to specify an Area is the system Alas IP Comma Tlis class is used to specify an IP Comma in the system. Brian Pis doss is used to specify elevalot buttons CCTV Swich IN. class is used to specify a CCTV swath ii the system Data Import Resit Data Import Result obiects keep infoimation about manua Document Pis class is used to specify the Documents n the system Door This class is used to scecily a Door n Pe system. 6. Click ljj in the Object field to open a dialog box that allows you to select an object of the same type as the icon. Click the object you want to choose for the icon. The expanded Maps Icon Properties dialog box appears. See Figure 55 on Page 134. tio 7. Select an icon on the map C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter< 133 EFTA01225418 Map Editor Tasks Figure 55: Map loon Properties Dialog Box Maps Icon PruHr.r I ws S kg Save and Cbse lays la this icon to — Link to this Object Type Type: Obteci: — Fltorne Opban Acton to Re, on Idt cick. , Tooltil to &splay al Ivyer. IUdak D cal F Show context menu onnght click r Request Contematicn 0 Display Icon States Ottflatt PloPatit MontoState State I Appearance I Image Faced Wound fl Held Open Pared ICLI — Open Normal I I retwl Nerm.4 1 8. Click the Action to run on left-click drop-down arrow and select an action from the list. The actions that are available are those that are appropriate for the icon you have chosen. 9. You can type a tooltip in the Tooltip to Display on hover field if you want to display a tooltip message about the icon. 10. If you want the icon to have a context menu enabled for the user to perform additional actions, select Show context menu on right-click. 11. If you want to require the user who clicks the icon to also perform the action, select Request Confirmationto confirm the action. (The default is unselected.) 12. Click Save and Close. The icon that you configured appears on your Map. 134 Chapter 0 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225419 Map Editor Tasks Figure 56: Add an Icon to the Map WSW< Wok Ora ik Sam ,ted lire Haar nen H,npnnVw L-1 I Dekapork lhs • Warn. tithe Door Ice IS t•C•wl Moll Gwrl • To mbake the can '<kWh. or, end env. to LI 6 toed Izabal ca hy mw. • to Klee de CM mixt ihen 1r morn Ole Ka+ Yd use the mute Ned a 511117 4.<0.01 clot brow. Hooeol ea th•cm, o. mune tee Es w kikkIN IT Sag r San IT 13. Click and drag the icon into the position you want on the Map. 14. To resize the icon, select the icon and use the mouse wheel, or SHIFT+Right Mouse Key or SHIFT+Left Mouse Key to zoom In and Out. 15. You can right-click the icon to save it to the Map, or perform other functions listed on the context menu (see Map Icon Context Menu on Page 139). Save Icon Cancel Icon Edit Icon Delete Icon Cancel this popup 16. Click Save and Close to save the icon changes you made to the Map. 17. Alternatively, if you want to save the Map and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Map is saved and closed, but the Map Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Map. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 4 135 EFTA01225420 Map Editor Tasks Editing an Icon on the Map You can edit an icon that was previously placed on the Map to change its position and configuration, as long as the icon was not Saved in a permanent position. To Edit a Map Icon 1. Open an existing Map or Map template . 2. Click . E the Select icon on the map button. The cursor becomes a cross-hair. 3. Right-click the icon to select it or drag the icon to a new position on the Map, if necessary. 4. Right-click the icon and choose Edit Icon from the context menu to change the properties.. 5. Click I- 1 in the Object field to open a dialog box that allows you to select an object of the same type as the icon. Click the object you want to choose for the icon. 6. The expanded Maps Icon Properties dialog box appears. See Figure 55 on Page 134. 7. Follow steps 5-11 in Adding an Object Icon to the Map on Page 131 to edit the icon. 8. You can edit the icon, relocate the icon, or drag the icon to a new location 9. Right-click on the door icon to Save, Cancel, or other options. Be sure to select Save Icon to save your changes before selecting Cancel or exiting the screen. Figure 57: Map Icon Properties Dialog Box It• Kn. an..a. pow rdnyTh SUL • IllinHOPS..1 ••••••••••tt• • • • •••••••••••• l• • •/.4e de tenor • ••••••••4 Lateg • no •• a • • • r co.*estireocnow• II eo • • • E et • • 4 w z, • • _ •• • • • •• • • , —L • • • • •• tH 4:•11. I- Moving and Adjusting Icon Locations You can move or adjust one icon at a time, that is, until you Save the previous icon in a fixed position. To remind you that an icon can be moved, the icon has a pale green border. You can left-click and drag the icon to a new 138 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Data Wawa Guide EFTA01225421 Map Editor Tasks position. When the icon is Saved in a fixed position that you cannot move, you will be unable to adjust the icon resizing handles or move its location. The icon will be grayed-out and the icon border will be the default color. Figure 57 on Page 136 shows map icons with various locations and magnification. When you move an icon, the system updates the icon map to reflect the precise location coordinates. 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click ESE (the Select icon on the map button). The cursor becomes a cross-hair . 3. Left-click an icon to select it. 4. You can left-click and drag the icon to a new position on the Map if necessary. 5. Right-click the icon and choose Edit Icon from the context menu. 6. The Maps Icon Properties dialog box appears at the bottom of the screen. See Figure 55 on Page 134. Follow steps 5-11 in Adding an Object Icon to the Map on Page 131 to edit the icon. 7. Right-click the icon and choose Save Icon from the context menu to save your changes.If the icon can be moved or dragged, the icon has a light green border. 8. If the icon can be moved, left-click the icon and drag it to a new position. 9. If the icon cannot be moved, it will be grayed out. Adding an Icon to the Icon Template Library You can define a Map icon and add it to the Icon Template Library so that you can re-use the icon on multiple Maps. To Add an Icon to the Icon Template Library 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click the arrow on la L.c.1 and select Icon template library from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 52 on Page 132. 3. The Maps icon template library dialog box specifies the Icon template name, the Type, and the action Editfor example, the Icon type, for example, Input, Door, etc. See Figure 58 on Page 138. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter< 137 EFTA01225422 Map Editor Tasks Figure 58: Maps Icon Template Library Dialog Box [.®taw. and Close Gera& 4. Click eg to display the Maps Icon Properties-(Template]dialog box. See Figure 59 on Page 138. Figure 59: Maps Icon Properties (Template) Dialog Box lave and Oose r Li* to ait otesel bce Tge 5. Select a name for the icon in the Name field. 6. Click Q in the Type field to open a Select Type dialog box that allows you to select an icon type for the icon.Click the icon type you want to choose for the icon. 7. The Maps Icon Properties dialog box appears. See Step 5 on Page 133 in Adding an Object Icon to the Map to edit the icon. 8. Click Save and Close to save the new icon in the Icon template library. Selecting an Icon on the Map To edit or move an icon that you have placed on the Map, you need to select it first. 138 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225423 Map Editor Tasks To Select art Icon on the Map 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click . 4 (the Select object on map button). The cursor changes to a cross-hair. 3. Click an icon to select it. Once the icon is selected the cursor changes to a cross-hair and you can click and drag the icon to a new position on the Map. As you move the icon, the coordinates value settings move in conjunction and display the updated values. 4. You can also right-click the icon to select a function from the context menu. 5. To exit from Icon selection mode, click the Select Icon again. 6. If an icon is still selected, you must right-click the icon to open the context menu (see Table 24 on Page 139) and choose Save Icon to save any editing you have done, or Cancel Icon to discard any changes you have made. When you select Save Icon, you cannot make additional changes to the current icon. Figure 60: General Maps Bar Icon Gonad I bul7n0.dw0 An -I I + t00% - - [IE ± lig - Map Icon Context Menu This context menu appears when you right-click on a Map Icon. Figure 61: Map Icon Context Menu 0 Save Icon Cancel Icon Edit Icon Delete Icon Cancel this popup Table 24: Map Icon Context Menu Definitions Selection Description Save Icon Click this selection to save the icon on the Map. If you do not save the icon in this manner, and just save the Map, you whose the icon. Cancel Icon Clickthisselection to canceladding the icon to the Map, if you have not already saved the icon. Edit Icon Click Ins selection to edit the loon. The Map Icon Properties Dialog Box opens. See Figure 55 on Page 134. Delete Icon Click Ins selection to delete the Icon. CanCel MIS Click this selection to close the menu without dloosing to save, edit, or delete the loon. popup C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter < 139 EFTA01225424 Map Editor Tasks Printing a Map You uan print the Map from the Maps Editor menu. To Print a Map 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click Print to Print the map. 3. The Map prints to your default printer. Clearing the Map It \ oil \cant to start over with an existing Map object, you can clear the Map completely with one click. To Clear the Map 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click D to Clear the Map and start anew. Modifying a Map You can edit a Map using the following procedure: To Modify a Map 1. In the Navigation pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Maps from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click a. to open a Dynamic View showing all Map objects. 4. Right-click the Map in the list that you want to modify and select Edit from the context menu. 5. You can edit a Map using the following procedure: To Change the Background Color of a Map 1. In the Navigation pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Maps from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click jam to open a Dynamic View showing all Map objects. 4. Right-click Map in the list that you want to modify and select Edit from the context menu. 5. Select options from the list to edit the map 6. You can set the background color of a Map to a default or custom-defined color equivalent to the standard Microsoft Basic Colors selection. 140 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225425 Map Editor Tasks Figure 62: Microsoft Banc Colors last colors: ■ ■■■■■■■ ■ ■■■■■■■ Custom colors: F I- EFFETE rrrrrrrr Define Custom Colors » OK Cancel a 7. Click OK. Opening a Map from an Icon You can create an icon on a Map and configure it to open another Map in the C•CURE 9000 database. This ability lets you create nested maps so that you can, for example, look at a Map that shows icons for the other maps in the system, and can then click on any of these Map icons to view its related Map. To Open a Map from an Icon 1. Open an existing Map or Map template (see Modifying a Map on Page 140). 2. Click the arrow on al (the Add an Icon to the Map button). The context menu for the button appears (see Figure 52 on Page 132). 3. Click Add an icon. 4. A Maps Icon Properties dialog box appears. (See Figure 53 on Page 133.) 5. Click n in the Type field to open a Select Type dialog box that allows you to select a type for the icon. 6. Choose Maps as the Type from the Select Type dialog box. 7. Click n in the Object field to open a dialog box that allows you to select an object (a Map).Click the Map that you want the icon to represent. For example, you want the expanded Maps Icon Properties dialog box to appear. See Figure 55 on Page 134. 8. Click the Action to run on left-click arrow and select an action from the list. ■ Select Popup View if you want the Map to open in a new window. (Choose this option if you want to use the Maps in the C•CURE 9000 Monitoring Station.) The View and the View in Current Tab options are only used with the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application content area.) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter < 141 EFTA01225426 Map Editor Tasks The maximum number of maps that you can simultaneously popup is 8 (eight). NOTE ■ Select View if you want the Map to open in a new tab in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application content area. ■ Select View in Current Tab if you want the Map to open in the current tab in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application content area. 9. You can type a tooltip in the Too!tip to Display on hover field if you want to display a tooltip message about the icon. 10. If you want the icon to have a context menu enabled to perform additional actions, select Show context menu on right-click. 11. If you want the user who clicks the icon to perform an action to be required to confirm the action, select Request Confirmation. (The default is unselected.) 12. Click Save and Close The Map icon that you have configured appears on your Map. 13. Click and drag the icon into the position you want on the Map. 14. Select the icon and use the mouse wheel to re-size the icon if necessary. 15. You can right-click the icon to save it to the Map, or perform other functions that appear on the context menu (see Map Icon Context Menu on Page 139 for more information). Figure 63 on Page 142 shows a Map with several Map icons. Note that the Map icons have been re-sized to fit the rooms on the Map. Figure 83: Map with Map 'CMS Mein Equipment/00•rations Containment Area LLNTRAL EXCHANGE BUILDING Site Phone 555-8367 .n440 EAST IlAiN STREET Site Ed Cowen 16. You can repeat Steps 244 to add additional icons to the Map. 17. Click Save and Close to save the icon changes you made. Alternatively, if you want to save the Map and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Map is saved and closed, but the Map Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Map. 142 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225427 Map Viewer Map Viewer The Map Viewer allows you to view an existing Map (such as a building floor or site plan) and also view security objects represented as icons on the Map. These icons can be placed on the Map using the Map Editor (see Adding an Object Icon to the Map on Page 131). The Map objects can also be viewed using the context menu. The context menu is displayed when you right-click a Maps row in the Data Views pane and also when you right-click an icon on the Map Popup View. See the example in Figure 64 on Page 143, where the selection of the Popup View of Map 2 is displayed with a subsequent Popup View of a security camera, both showing runtime conditions. Figure 64: Map Viewer Popup Views Oil 9000 - Adminhtrallon Stilton Mdminialialorl Hs, 1:22=3S3 r‘ ; 6,4glACI1 Owl le rica IJ iSTM Colds a MIN in &bola tiel 149 oa+C.aasICe videcuneta > Data Views C,3 Z 1:21 OE V ce Coati The context menus differ from one object type to another. In addition, the appearance of each context menu depends on the setting of the Show context menu on righ6click option configured in the Maps Icon Properties dialog box. You can also display a runtime popup of a camera by clicking the icon. Map Viewer Toolbar The Map Viewer Toolbar displays Map Formats and Size Information Table 25 on Page 144 lists the tools available in the Map Viewer Toolbar. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter < 143 EFTA01225428 Map Viewer Figure SS: .Map Viewer Toolbar giMaps - newmap PUDE' + 100% - — tzi I MAP: newmap Table 25: tvlap Viewer Toolbar Button Function + Zoom Into map - as long as it is held down, the map continues to zoom in until the maximum size is reached.(from 50% to 5000%) _ Zoom out from map - as long as it is held down, the map continues to zoom out until the maximum size is reached. (from 50% to 500%) Zoom Units - select a zoom percentage ranging from 50 to 5000%. 100% - Fit map in Window - fits the map into existing window. The percentage is reset to 100%. Fl Show too!Ups -when selected, icon toottips appear when the mouse hovers over an icon. Show previous map - clickthistogo to the previousty d'splayed map. This button is available when an icon action opens another a" Map - you can click this button to go back to the first Map.This button is unavailable when the first map is active. Example: You create a Map of your campus, and add several Icons, each representing an building. You assign a left click action to each of the Icons to open a map of that building. If you open one of those Maps, the Show previous map button is active in the Map Viewer so that you can navigate back to the original Map. Print map - invokes the Windows Print dialog box allowing you to print the current Map using the default printer. La 144 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225429 5 Query This chapter explains how to configure C•CURE 9000 Queries so that you can quickly and reliably find information about objects in C•CURE 9000. In this chapter: Query Overview 146 Query Editor 147 Using Wildcard Characters in Queries 154 Using Special Characters in Queries 157 Query Tasks 159 Complex Queries 172 Performing a Quick Search 175 Defining a New Query from Advanced Search 177 Defining an Instant Query from Advanced Search 178 Query Parameter Prompts 180 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapters 145 EFTA01225430 Query Overview Query Overview A C•CURE 9000 Query is used to search through the C•CURE 9000 database for objects, and provides the ability to enter criteria that narrow the search. The search results from a Query are displayed in a Dynamic View, in the Content pane or a popup window, where you can filter the search results. C•CURE 9000 includes pre-defined Queries. Some of these Queries work with pre-defined Reports; others of the pre- defined Queries are stand-alone and included as general examples. These pre-defined Queries can be used "as is," or copied and customized to meet your specific needs. For detailed information, see the Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views on Page 254 for pre-defined Queries, Reports, and Dynamic Views, as well as Creating a Copy of a Query on Page 163. ■ You create and save Queries using the Query Editor. Your Query can include multiple query criteria that you define by choosing fields from the object type you are querying, and filters that are based on the fields you have chosen. Example: If you choose a logical field as a filter, the filter type is limited to Equals or Not Equals, and the possible values reflect the filter type. ■ You can create and save a Query Template to use as the basis for other Queries. ■ You can include prompts to the user running the query, allowing the user to specify values for one or more filter criteria at runtime. For more information, see Configuring a Query on Page 161, especially Step 7. ■ You can also create a Query that is able to be edited at runtime "on-the fly." ■ You can attach a previously built Query to a Dynamic View, Export, or Report so that the results can be controlled by the Query Editor's filters. For more information, see • Dynamic View Editor on Page 82 • Report Editor on Page 201 • Chapter 3, "Exporting Records" in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide ■ You can perform a Quick Search on C•CURE 9000 object types. ■ You can build and save a Query for an object type and also create and run an instant query for an object type from the Advanced Search tab. 146 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225431 Query Editor Query Editor A C•CURE 9000 Query is used to define a search of the C•CURE 9000 database. The Query Editor lets you design and save Queries for every object type in the C•CURE 9000 database. See the Query Overview on Page 146 for an explanation of how Queries are created and used in C•CURE 9000. The tasks you can perform with Queries are listed in Query Tasks on Page 159. The Query Editor has the following tabs: • General tab - see Query Editor General Tab on Page 148. • Advanced tab - see Query Editor Advanced Tab on Page 152. The Query Editor has the buttons described in Table 26 on Page 147. Table 26: Query Editor Buttons Button Description Save Clidahis button when you have completed any changes to the Query and wish to save those changes. The Query doses. (This button and is not avaiable for the Software House pre-defined Queries.) Close Save Clidahis button when you want to create a new Query using the current entries on the Query Editor as a template. and If the Query is user-created and has been modified in the editor, a warning appearsasking whether you want to save your original New before creating the oopy. Click Yes to save the originalQuery, No to not save it, and Cancel to return to the originalQuery without making a oopy. Clid< this button when you want to dose the Query Editor without saving your changes. XI If the Query has been modified in the editor, a warning appears asking whether or not you want to save your changes before dosing the editor. Click Yes to exit and save and No to exit and cancel your changes. Accessing the Query Editor You can access the Query Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Data Views pane. To Access the Query Editor 1. Click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Query. 3. Click New to create a new Query. - Or - Click &L i to open a Dynamic View showing all Query objects. 4. Right-click the Query in the list that you want to modify and select Edit from the context menu to open the Query Editor (See Figure 66 on Page 148). C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 147 EFTA01225432 Query Editor Query Editor General Tab The Query Editor General tab lets you define the name and type of your Query, as well as specify the criteria for the Query. The General tab is shown in Figure 66 on Page 148 and the Advanced tab is shown in Figure 67 on Page 153. Figure 86: Query Editor —GeneralTab Stentart tin Moven ney as? aLmli a in. kla See the following sections for information about the fields and buttons on the top of the Query Editor and on the General tab. ■ Query General Tab Definitions on Page 148 ■ Query General Tab Criteria Table Definitions on Page 149 ■ Query General Tab Buttons on Page 151. Query General Tab Definitions Table 27 on Page 148 describes the fields on the top of the Query dialog box and on the General Tab. Table 27: Query General Tab Definitions Field Description Name The name of the Query. This field is required. Description Type a textual description of the Query that will help you distinguish it from other queries. It can be helpful to include the Target object type in the description. Partition A read-onty field displaying the name of the Partition to which this Query be bngs. (This field is visible only if the CCURE 9000 system is partitioned.) 148 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225433 Query Editor Query General Tab Definitions (continued) Field Description Query Choose the object type for which to search from the selection dialog box that appears when you click n. target type NOTE: This field cannot be changed once the Query is saved. Sub type Most object types include several Sub types with different setsof fields. If the object type you chose has muttiple Sub types. choose the Sub type on which to base your query from this drop-down list. NOTE: This field cannot be changed once the Query is saved. The Basic Configuration is the default Sub type for every object type and includes the basic information you can query on for that object. Most object types also have Group, Audit Log. and JournalSublypes. Example: Clearance has the following four Sub types: - Basic Configuration - Clearance and Clearance item - Clearance Group- Clearance, Clearance item, and Group member - Clearance Audit Log - Clearance, Clearance item, and Audit Log - Clearance Journal - Clearance, Clearance item, and Journal A Query on the Clearance Audit Log Sub type would allow you to find all Clearances edited by a specific Operator within the specified date range; a Query on the Clearance Journal Sub type would allow you to find all messages that reference Clearances within a specified date range. NOTE: If there are no Clearances edited by that Operator in that date range nor anyJournal messages referencing Clearances. the Query would respectively return no Clearance records. In addition, such a Query would not return Clearance records for Audit entries/Journal messages where Clearance was referenced only as the secondary object. not the primary. For the Group object type, the Sub type drop-down list includes, in addition to the Basic Configuration, Group Audit Log, and Group Journal, onty Groups that exist in the particular C•CURE 9000 system. Example: If the system has groups of doors and of readers. then Door Group and Reader Group will be in the Sub Type list. Allow Lets a user modify the query"on-the-fly' at runtime without saving it. editing at NOTE: Even a user without Edit privileges for the querysobject type can change the query in the Query Parameters dialog box runtime when this option is selected. Query The Query Criteria table lets you specify the fitters for your Query, and whether or not a prompt displays for the user to adjust the Criteria filter at runtime. To narrow your Query results, you can create multiple filters and block fitters that perform AND/OR operations—and in the case of bbck fitters, AND NOT IN/OR NOT IN operations as well. For definitions of the fields in the Query Criteria table, see Table 28 on Page 150. Query General Tab Criteria Table Definitions Table 28 on Page 150 describes the fields in the Query Criteria Table on the Query General Tab. (These fields are also available from the Query Parameters dialog box in Edit mode, shown in Figure 73 on Page 182 and Figure 74 on Page 183.) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 149 EFTA01225434 Query Editor Table 28: Query General Tab Criteria Table Definitions Field Description Operator For every row in the table, you must choose an Operator from the drop-down list, which changes depending on the type of row. • When you click Add - - If this is the very first row in the Query expression- IN is the only available Operator. - For every row after the first row, you must choose a logical Operator that defines the relationship between the current row arid the row that preceded it - available choices are AND. OR and WITH. - The WITH operator allows you to put additional conditions on a preceding AND or OR clause. so that a given record is tested for multiple conditions. See Using the WITH Operator on Page 167 for an example of WITH Operator usage. • When you click Add Block - - If this is the very first row in the Query expression, you can choose IN or NOT IN. - For every bbck after the first bbck (or row), you must choose a logical Operator to define the relationship between the new bbck and the bbck/row that preceded it- available choices are AND. OR. AND NOT IN, or OR NOT IN. Examples: If the first row queries for Personnel with a Last name that begins with 'B', the next row must specify if its criteria is ANDed or ORed with the first row. Type Select the Object Type for this Query Criteria from the Object Types related to the Query target type. Example: If you are defining a Personnel Query with a sub type of Basic Configuration, you can choose from Personnel, Personnel Clearance Pair, Clearance, Clearance Item, Credential, and Images, because these Object Types are child objects of Personnel. Child objects are indicated by indenting and prefixesof one or more dashes C- 'or'- - 'or'- - - '). Personnel - Personnel Clearance Pair - - Clearance - - - Clearance Item Field Select the field for this Query Criteria from the drop-down list of Fields in the Object Type chosen. Fitter Thisdrop-down list lets you chose a filter type for this Query Criteria. The choicesvarydepending upon the type of field chosen for this Type row. Example: If the Field is a True/False or On/Off field, the Filter Types are Equals or Not Equals. Value Type in or select a Value for the field in this criteria or keep as <IGNORED>, the default, to allow the value of the field to be populated at runtime. The allowable Valuesdepend upon the Field chosen and the Filter Type chosen. Example: For a True/False field. a check box isdisplayed in this column. For a text field. an edit box that you can type text into isdisplayed. Prompt Select this check box to have the fitter criteria in this row displayed as a Query Parameter Prompt when an Operator runs the Query. The Operator can then type in a value for this field at runtime. This adds to the flexibility of the Query. NOTE: Thisoption is selected bydefault. If you clear the check box. you must enter a value in the Value field. 150 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225435 Query Editor Query General Tab Criteria Table Definitions (continued) Field Description Field Type in a Value to be used at runtime instead of the actual field name. This field also allows you to create an "alias" for several rows. so Name that at runtime one prompt'svalue is used torah the fields with that alias. Alias Example: in Personnel. if you wanted to query on the same values for Date1 and Date2 all the time, you could create hvo criteria rows and use a Field Name Alias of Date for both of them. Then you would only see a single row with the Field Name Date when the Query Parameters dialog box appeared. Entering the value once for Date would use the same value for both the Date1 and Date2 fields when the query was run. Query General Tab Buttons Table 29 on Page 151 describes the buttons on the Query General Tab. (These buttons are also available from the Query Parameters dialog box in Edit mode, shown in Figure 73 on Page 182 and Figure 74 on Page 183.) Table 29: Query General Tab Buttons Name Description Add Chck this button to add a row to the Query Criteria table. Each row in the table can act as a query Met. Each new row is added after the last. To add a new row after a specificexisting row. dick the row selector ► to select a row and then click Add.. Remove Click this button to remove a selected row from the Query Criteria table. You have to click the row selector ► toselect a row to remove. If no row is selected, this button is not available. NOTE: If the selected row is the beginning of a block, the system removes the entire block once you confirm the deletion. Move Click this button to move a filter row up in the table. The position of fitter rows can affect search results. You have to dick the row Up selector ► to select a row to move. If no row is selected, this button is not available. Move Click this button to move a filter row down in the table. The position of fter rows can affect search results. You have to dick the row Down selector ► to select a row to move. If no row is selected, this button isnot available. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 151 EFTA01225436 Query Editor Query General Tab Buttons (continued) Name Description Add Click this button to add a block of liter rows to the Query Criteria table. A Block is one or more rows whose internal relationship is Block resolved prior to relations with other table rows, much like a parentheticalelement in a mathematical or logicalexpression. Without Blocks, each row is resolved in top to bottom order. For some queries, you may not get the results you Intended without using Blocks. In addition, Blocksalow you to search the database for Security Objects that are NOT IN a particular subset as wellas those that are, such as "Personnel who do not have Clearances for a specified Door. Example of Using a Block: If you had four rows as below (simplified for example): - Personnel Last Name starts with G [single row] - AND [Block rows start] Disabled equals V OR Logicall equals .i. • [Block rows end] - AND NOT IN[Block rows start] Clearance Name equals mag_clear • [Block rows end] The query finds all Personnel with Last Name starting with G, then tests those records against both conditions in the Block filter, and finaly tests the remaining records for not having a Clearance with the Name of mag_clear. After you have added the block, dick the row selector ► to selecta row in the bbck and click Add to add more rows to the block. If your added rows are not correctly positioned outside or inside the block, select the row and dick at or LI to correct the positioning. Clear Clears out any values entered for a prompt fora criteria and returns the default value for the criteria prompt, <IGNORED> usualty. Prompt NOTE: Additionalqueryariteria that were not set as prompts (and are not displayed on the Query Parameters Details dialog box) do Values not have their valueschanged. Query Editor Advanced Tab The Advanced tab, shown in Figure 67 on Page 153 allows you to set the amount of time a Query can run before it times out: either the default time of five (5) minutes or a custom time between one (1) and 60 minutes. The Query functionality in C•CURE 9000 is very flexible and allows you to build complex queries on existing system data in many different ways. Basically, you can use any property of any system Object in a Query expression. Consequently, the time the server takes to run a particular query cannot be predicted. If the database has accumulated a significant amount of data (a few months of activity can generate a Journal with 60 million records in it, for example), a query may run more than five minutes —the default database timeout for running SQL queries. If a complex Query is running, each SQL statement executed as part of the Query will use the timeout NOTE value set on this tab. Therefore, the overall time that the Query can run on the Server may exceed the timeout value set here. (A complex Query is one that evaluates search criteria in more than one Object Type Table. For more information, see Complex Queries on Page 172.) 152 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225437 Query Editor Figure 67: Query Editor -Advanced Tab Csavir• Quay Immo lb.IhtSot OA" WHOA O thenteteatO10,10•00Uld •r"e: Query Advanced Tab Definitions Table 30 on Page 153 describes the fields on the Advanced lab. Table 30: Query Advanced Tab Definitions Field Description Use the default query Select this option to configure the default database timeout value of five (5) minutes for this Query. timeout Use a custom query Select thisoption toconfigure a customized timeout value for this Query, and then enter a time value in minutes, timeout of ntt minutes between one (1) and 60, in the field that becomes available. Software House recommends that you enlarge the default timeout value only if absolutely necessary. NOTE You should first try to redefine your Query to optimize its performance. Example: For string values, the Query expressions "starts with" and "equals" work more quickly than the expression "contains". C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 153 EFTA01225438 Using Wikicard Characters in Queries Using Wildcard Characters in Queries C•CURE 9000 supports the use of SQL wild card characters on the Query Editor and the Query Parameters dialog box. The wild card characters are % (per cent) and _ (underscore). Table 3 : Query VVIdcard Characters Wildcard Character Description % (Per Cent Symbol) Matches any string of zeroor more characters. _(Underscore) Matchesexactly one character. Using Wild Card Characters This documentation uses double quotes ("") to indicate wild card characters and match strings. Do NOTE not include the quote marks when you are entering wild cards and match strings. Example: Table 32: Examplesof Widcard Character Use This Wildcard Character Finds: B_ii Ball, bell. bill. and bul. wh% Who, what, why, when, where, and whistle. Jon, John, Johnson, Johnsen, Johnsson. J% Alentries that start with J. %n All entries that end with n. Johnsson and Johansson. (Starts with Jo followed by ss followed by n.) Johnsson. (Starts with Joh followed by 1character followed by ss followed by 1character followed by n.) Smith%B Al Smiths with a first name that starts with B (in a field such as full name). These wild cards cannot be used in Date fields or Numeric fields. You might have to precede the wild NOTE card characters with an F2 function key. For more information about the F2 function key, see Period Character (.) with F2 on Page 157 Using C•CURE 9000 Query Filters ■ The C•CURE 9000 Standard Query filters are the following: • Equals • Not Equals 154 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225439 Using VVIdcard Characters In Queries • Contains • Starts with • Ends with • > (Greater than) • => (Equal to or greater than) • < Less than • =< (Equal to or less than) • In List ■ Equals and Not Equals filters - Wild card characters are not useful with these filters. ■ In List, Contains, Starts with, and Ends with filters - Wild card characters are most useful with these filters. ■ In List Filter - Allows for multiple entries that are logically OR'ed together on one line of the Query. The filters Contains, Ends with, Starts with, and In List are not casesensitive. NOTE Example: "=" would return Mast, must, mist. Contains Filter If wild cards are used with the Contains filter, they define the sub-string the filter is searching for, but do not act like Start with or End with filters Example: "nny%ami%ez" finds Manny Ramirez, Lanny Ramirez, and Manny Ramirezdodger Starts With Filter Example: • "MP' would return Mast, Must, Mist, Most, Mystery, etc. • "=" finds entries such as Mast, Must, Mist, Moist, Marist, Marxist, Mystery, etc. • ' finds entries such as Masterson, 'Mount St. Helen', etc. • finds 'My Mystery'. Ends With Filter Example: • "M "would return Mast, 'I Must', Mist, Most, etc. • "=" finds entries such as Mast, Must, Mist, Moist, Marist, Marxist, etc. • ' finds entries such as 'Mr. Masterson', 'Mount St. Helen', Mystery, etc. In List Filter ■ "A%" means starts with A. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 155 EFTA01225440 Using Wildcard CharactersIn Queries ■ "%Z" means ends with Z. ■ "%B%" means any string that contains B. Example: • "Jo%, Ko%, Lo%" finds all entries that start with Jo OR Ko OR Is. • "%x, %y, %z" finds all entries that end in x OR y OR z. • "%smith%, %jones%, %john%" finds all entries that contain smith OR jones OR john. 158 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225441 Using Special Characters in Oucnes Using Special Characters in Queries There are certain special characters that can be useful when dealing with Queries. Control 0 (CTRL zero) This character is used to set a field back to the default value of <IGNORED> on the Query Editor or the Query Parameters dialog box. Sometimes you may change your mind when you are building and/or executing a Query and no longer want to filter the data by a value you entered into a field. To return the field to the default <IGNORED>, use CTRL 0 — which matches on all records in this field. [Blank] or [Space] are considered to be legitimate characters. In other words, if you put a Space in a NOTE field, the Query is looking specifically for a Space. The <IGNORED> value indicates [NULL] meaning that everything matches. There is a similar relationship in numerical fields. Zero (0) is not the same as <IGNORED>. Period Character (.) with F2 When you are searching the Audit or Journal databases, it can be useful to use searches that contain [.door], [.input], or [.output], etc., because the general form of entries in the Audit and Journal (in the primary/secondary type fields) is - SoftwareHouse.NextGen.Common.SecurityObjects.Object Example: Figure 68 on Page 158 illustrates an Audit Query that finds the following: MI Doors that were created, deleted, or edited by operators Wood or Hasbrouck in the last twelve months. (The 'Reference Added' or 'Reference Removed' values mean any changes to the readers, inputs, or outputs that are components of the door.) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 157 EFTA01225442 Using Special Characters in Queries Figure 68: Use of Period Character (.) with 12 Key in a Query Query parameters - 18 audit • • Cleat ;react Values Feld Nave Feel Type Vdue — Ala LOSOPelataNalT. Mist v ittebouck h,..col — L:2— AmIlLectSems dateNme Wave v Led 12 math, Audl LegElaceselion Intel v Cade Delete, Eat Refeielice Added, RefeenceRemwed G.• Objet tyre cram Ma* Pur You could entir the suffix '.Clearance' or '.Output' instead, to search for changes to those objects. You can query on doors, inputs, outputs, etc., in the primary or secondary object type fields by NOTE preceding the name of the object with a period (.). To enter the . (period) character in the field, you must first press the F2 key. 158 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225443 Query Tasks Query Tasks You can perform the following tasks using the Query Editor. ■ Creating a Query on Page 159 ■ Creating a Query Template on Page 160 ■ Configuring a Query on Page 161 ■ Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20 ■ Modifying a Query on Page 162 ■ Creating a Copy of a Query on Page 163 ■ Adding Query Criteria to a Query on Page 163 ■ Using Add/Add Block Buttons to Configure a Query on Page 168 ■ Removing Query Criteria from a Query on Page 170 ■ Running a Query on Page 170 ■ Performing a Quick Search on Page 175 ■ Defining a New Query from Advanced Search on Page 177 ■ Defining an Instant Query from Advanced Search on Page 178 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 Deleting a Query affects all the other objects to which the Quay is attached— Dynamic Views, NOTE Exports, and Reports. Creating a Query You can create a new Query to search for objects in the C•CURE 9000 database, using filters to narrow the search to the data you are looking for, and prompts to allow the user to change the filters at run-time. In addition, if you select the Allow editing at runtime check box, the user can modify the query "on-the-fly" at runtime. You can create a Query in different ways: 1. Using the Query selection from the Data Views pane. See To Create a Query from Data Views on Page 160. 2. Using a Query Template to create the Quay. See To Create a Query from a Quay Template on Page 160. 3. Using a copy of a Pre-defined Query or other existing Query. See To Create a Copy of a Query on Page 163. 4. Using New Query under Advanced Search under any object type. See To Create a New Query from Advanced Search on Page 177. 5. Using Instant Search under Advanced Search under any object type. See To Create an Instant Query from Advanced Search on Page 178. The first four methods launch the full Query Editor and allow you to save the Query object. The fifth method opens a Query Parameters dialog box and allows you to create a complex "one-time-only" query that you can execute immediately without saving. You can also use Quick Search for simple searches on object name. See To Perform a Quick Search on Page 175. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 159 EFTA01225444 Query I usks To Create a Query from Data Views 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Query from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click New to create a new Query. The Query Editor opens, and you can configure the Query. 4. To save your new Query, click Save and Close. - or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Query as a copy of the existing Query, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Query on Page 163. To Create a Query from a Query Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Query from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click the arrow on New to display a list of query templates that you have created, as in the example in the following figure. ----Templates Query Template for Reports Persomel Query template 4. Click a template in the list. The Query Editor opens, and you can configure the Query (see Configuring a Query on Page 161). 5. To save your new Query, click Save and Close. Or Alternatively, if you want to create a new Query as a copy of the existing Query, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Query on Page 163. Creating a Query Template You can create a Query template to use as the basis of new queries. In a template, you enter field values that will have the same values for all Queries, and you can then use that template when you are creating new queries. Example: You could create a template for queries that search for Personnel objects. Then whenever you are creating a new query of the Personnel type, you would be able to save time by creating it from the template instead of from the default blank Query. 160 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225445 Query Tasks To Create a Query Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Query from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click the arrow on New and click Template to create a new Query template. /'New 7 Query Template The Query Editor opens where you can configure the Query. 4. Any fields for which you configure values become part of the template, and when you subsequently create a new Query from that template, these field values are already filled in. 5. Type the name to use for the template in the Name field. Example: "Query Template" 6. To save your new Query template, click Save and Close. Configuring a Query When you create a Query, you can choose to add one or more filters to determine which data the Query returns. To Configure a Query 1. Create a new Query or modify an existing Query. 2. Type a Name and Description for the Query that specify what the Query is searching for and how it filters the data. An accurate name and description are important to making it straightforward to choose the NOTE appropriate Query.You want the user who needs a Query to run or to add to a Dynamic View, Export, or Report to be able to select the correct Query quickly and easily. If you do not properly describe the Query and what it is searching for in these fields, the user will have to view the Query details on the Query Parameters dialog box (if the Query has prompts) or on the Query Editor itself. 3. Choose the object type for the Query from the Query target type drop-down list. (You cannot change the object type once you have saved the query.) 4. Leave Basic Configuration as the sub type for the Query or select another sub type from the Sub type drop-down list. (You cannot change the sub type once you have saved the query.) For the Group object type, the Sub type drop-down list includes, in addition to the Group Audit Log NOTE and Group Journal, the additional Sub type for each kind of Group that exists in the particular C•CURE 9000 system. If the system had groups of doors, elevators, and readers, then Door Group, Elevator Group, and Reader Group will be in the Sub Type list. 5. Select the Allow Editing at runtime check box if you want users to be able to modify this query whenever they run it. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 161 EFTA01225446 Query Tasks 6. You can add Query Criteria to the query to filter the results by clicking: • Add for single rows. For detailed steps, see Using the Add Button on Page 168. - or - • Add Block for blocks of rows. (For some queries, you may not get the results you intended without using Blocks.) See Add Block on Page 152 for general information about 'Blocks' and Using the Add Block Button on Page 169 for detailed steps. Using a block of rows is essentially equivalent to adding a parenthesis to an equation: NOTE Example: A*(B+C) However, the software will not allow you to nest blocks: Example: A*(B+(C-D)). 7. Under Prompt in the Query Criteria table, you can select ID to have that Query Criteria row appear when the user runs the Query. For each row that has Prompt = E, the user can modify a value to search for when the Query runs. (For each row that has Prompt = 0, you must specify a value in the Value column when configuring the Query.) 8. Click the Advanced tab to open and then click one of the two available options to select a query timeout for this Query configuration: • Use the default query timeout (the system default) of 5 minutes. • Use custom query timeout of tin minutes. Enter a value in minutes between one (1) and 60 in the field that becomes available. Modify the default timeout value only after verifying that the Query times out and that there is no NOTE way to optimize its performance. Example: For string values, replacing the expression "contains" with the expressions "starts with" or "equals" increases the performance of the Query. 9. To save your new Query, click Save and Close. - or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Query as a copy of the existing Query, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Query on Page 163. Modifying a Query You can modify a Query that you created and saved. To Modify a Query 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Query from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 162 Chapter 5 C•CDRE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225447 Query Tasks 3. Click P to view a list of existing Queries. 4. Click the Query you wish to modify to select it. 5. Right-click the selected Query and choose Edit from the context menu. The Query Editor opens. 6. You can change the Name and Description fields by tabbing to the field and typing over or inserting new text. You cannot change the Query target type or sub type. To query on a different object type and sub NOTE type, you must create a new Query for that Query target type/sub type. 7. You can add Query Criteria by clicking Add or Add Block, picking a field to query, and setting a filter. For more details, see Adding Query Criteria to a Query on Page 163. 8. You can remove one or more Query Criteria rows by selecting the entire row(s), using ► and then clicking Remove. For more details, see Removing Query Criteria from a Query on Page 170. 9. When you are done making changes, click Save and Close to save the Query. - or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Query as a copy of the existing Query, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Query on Page 163. Creating a Copy of a Query You can create a copy of a Query, using it as a blueprint for a new Query. Any fields configured in the existing Query are copied for the new Query—only the Name field is blank. (For information on copying one of the pre- defined Queries, see To Customize a Pre-defined Report/Query/Dynamic View on Page 269.) To Create a Copy of a Query 1. Create/modify a Query on the Query Editor. (For information, see Creating a Query on Page 159 or Modifying a Query on Page 162.) 2. Click Create Copy. The warning message "save original before creating a copy" appears if the current Query has been modified in the editor*. warning: Changes will be lost see orgritlhelve creating a ee0Y7 as Cake. • Click Yes to save the existing Query and its configuration and open a copy on the Query Editor. • Click No to open a copy on the Query Editor without saving the existing Query. • Click Cancel to return to the Query Editor without creating a copy. If you clicked either Yes or No, the Query Editor re-appears with a copy of the Query displayed and the Name field blank. Adding Query Criteria to a Query You can add rows to the Query Criteria table to add filters to your Query. C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter 5 183 EFTA01225448 0acylasks To Add Query Criteria to a Query 1. Create a new Query or modify an existing Query. See Creating a Query on Page 159 or Modifying a Query on Page 162. 2. Click Add to add a new row to the Query Criteria table with the criteria that will filter the query results. (For detailed steps, see Using the Add Button on Page 168.) Click Add Block to add a new block of rows to the Query Criteria table. (See Add Block on Page 152 for general information about 'Blocks' and Using the Add Block Button on Page 169 for detailed steps.) 3. Once your Query contains rows, to add a new row/block of rows after a specific existing row/block of rows, click ► to select the row and then click Add or Add Block 4. Choose an Object Type for the criteria from the drop-down list. This list contains the database tables that are related to the Query target type for this query. 5. Pick a field to query from the Held drop-down list of fields in the table you chose. 6. Pick a Filter Type for the criteria from the Filter Type field drop-down list. The Filter Types available depend on the type of field you choose. Examples: If you choose a True/False field like Active, the Filter Type is limited to Equals or Not Equals. If you choose a Date/Time field like Activation Date Time, the Filter Type includes: - In range, which lets you select a value such as Today, Yesterday, Last Hour, Last 24 hours, Last 7 days, etc. from a drop-down list in the Value field. - In custom range, which lets you select two date values so the pair can be used as a single date/time interval value in the Query expression. (The bottom date/time specifies the maximum value in the interval and is set by default to the current date/time, while the top date/time specifies the minimum value in the interval and is set to seven days in the past.) no Ts vaw In anonla //22/2C09120103All S 5/2S'3 24320 PM S If you choose an enumerated field like Access Type for Credential, the Filter Type includes In list, which lets you click El in the Value field to open a dialog box, like the following, with a list of possible values. You can then click to select as many of the items as you wish and click OK to return your selections to the Value field (separated by semi-colons) in the Query Criteria table. The Query will then search for records that contain any one of these field values. 141 list of values Ix a Cale& Wias ❑ CadAccete P O FIN Orb El Unknown If you choose any text field, the Filter Type also includes In list, which lets you click El in the Value field to open a dialog box such as the following with a blank field for the entry of a text string. 164 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225449 Query Tasks fA (Oil list of values When you enter text into the field, another line opens for entry. Enter as many lines of text as you wish, and click OK to return your multiple selections to the Value field (separated by semi-colons) in the Query Criteria table. The Query will then search for records that have any of the specified text strings as a value. ff i Edit list of values To search for a substring, enter the sign'; as a wildcard. Example: "lov%" = starts with substring "%lov" = ends with substring "%lov%" = contains substring These values would find the following names respectively: "Lovsky", "Orlov", and "Orlovsky". If you choose any Name field, the Filter Type includes: — Equals or Not Equals, which lets you click ri in the Value field to open a selection list, like the following, with a list of possible names. You can then click one of the names to return your selection to the Value field in the Query Criteria table. The Query will then search for records that contain the specified Name. (You can also type in the name without using the list.) V Na PeistanIteete I Dotal f Ckk Nolo MK Ott 0. a, Aks.Hoicild WWI J BoonHeins NW Fototee.RhicKle If NM LOMMIS.Est PIM PopsMos* Dilla Rsitiven. this Delia Shoos Rabat Delia Sines OM DOS Novato toy DIM a - In list, which lets you click ri in the Value field to open a dialog box, like the following. idol Inl ol wain, OK Cancel = C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 165 EFTA01225450 Query Tasks You can type a Name (or any text) in the blank field or you can click Elin the Value field to open a Name selection dialog box, like the following, which allows you to select multiple Object names at the same time. Dr.op odurnns to Grout) gnus to Md dab LE Ok Salt r Wart Kama Date ✓ Fougo.ftenlioll Data ✓ Laura ES, Date ✓ Net Midadth Date ✓ Aitwan.Eker Date Click in the check box(es) in the first column to select one or more rows and then click OK to return your multiple Name selections to the Value field (separated by semi-colons) in the Query Criteria table. The Query will then search for records that contain any one of the specified Names Reference fields such as Personnel Type, Report Type, and Query Type work similarly to Name field. You can select a value from a list, but cannot type a value directly into the field. If the Object type to be displayed for selection contains more than 2500 Objects, a warning appears NOTE informing you that this could take a long time and asking if you would like to refine the search criteria. Click Yes to change the search criteria for the Object Name, No to display all the Objects, and Cancel to stop the operation. If you click Yes, the Name Selection dialog box appears with a blank list and the Name starts with field available for you to enter a letter such as "b" or "r to narrow the search. 7. Type or select a value for the filter in the Value field (partially described in Step 6). Example: If you are querying on Name and choose "Starts With" as the Filter Type, type Br to find objects with a Name that starts with those letters. The Default value for all field types is <IGNORED>, indicating that the system will not search on the field when the query is run. For True/False fields, such as Active or Enabled, the default 'ignored' is indicated by ID. When you click in the check box, it becomes empty El , indicating False (not selected); when you click again, a green check appears El, indicating True (selected). 166 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225451 Query Tasks A blank Value Field represents an empty value and will be used in the query when it runs. NOTE Example: To find all personnel with blank middle names, leave the Value Field empty. 8. If you want the query to display a prompt for this filter at runtime, so that the Operator can modify the filter information, select El in the Prompt field. 9. You can move a Query Criteria row Up in the Query Criteria table by clicking the row selector ► and then clicking di. 10. You can move a Query Criteria row Down in the Query Criteria table by clicking the row selector ► I and then clickinga. 11. When you are done adding Query Criteria, click Save and Close to save the Query. Using the WITH Operator The Query editor provides the ability to use the WITH Operator to specify that multiple operations are performed on the same record. Example: A customer wants to find all Personnel who have a specified Clearance, and with a Credential that is not expired, Lost, Stolen, or Disabled. The Customer creates a Query written with AND statements: Find all Personnel who have a Clearance named "Lobby" AND Credential with Expiration Date > datetime AND Credential Not equal Stolen AND Credential Not equal Lost AND Credential Not equal Disabled As written, this query would not return the desired results, because the AND clauses would be evaluated separately for each Credential, not grouped to find single Credentials that are not Stolen, Lost, or Disabled. The addition of a WITH Operator allows the creation of the intended Query, which tests each Credential for all of the conditions together, rather than each condition individually. (See Figure 69 on Page 168.) Find all Personnel who have a Clearance named "Lobby" AND Credential with Expiration Date > datetime WITH Credential Not equal Stolen WITH Credential Not equal Lost WITH Credential Not equal Disabled C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter 5 187 EFTA01225452 Query Tasks Figure 69: Example Query Using the WITH Operator **(wry Pnionn,lwah -1.2.h a jave end dose L0Cioate copy lbw kesaOla re Peatenel mah lthbr Own. h a Clockwid the did Excised. Disabled.lo:t a Stolen Genoa' I AckecedI Wan spot Ine IPentonei r kb.. sling s Renee St.(21xe, 'Bac Calwatan ChienCdois , _I, • =3 oat pock rt Cigar Promo Vales Opeasta I Tips I Me bre I WA* Prong F•1i Herr., AM: [ MI in ml , • Cleteaxe zjitlenx MI InIx copy _AM !I GedeniAl JI Egmaton Dmeln* J 0110201511 23A14 P With zj • Cieckenhal zj Onatied zj Ha pugs ml p p Wth zi , Crocienial J lost MI p la Using Add/Add Block Buttons to Configure a Query When you create a Query, you can use the Add and Add Block buttons to add one or more rows and/or blocks of rows to the Query Criteria table as filters for your Query. Sometimes you need to use Blocks in a Query to get your intended results. Using the Add Button To Use the Add Button to Configure a Query 1. Create a new Query or modify an existing Query, configuring the fields on the top of the Query Editor and on the General tab. 2. In the Query Criteria box, click Add to add a single row to filter the Query results. 3. For this first row you do not need to choose an Operator as the only available Operator —IN—is already entered in the field. 4. Click Add to add another row and then choose a logical Operator for the row— AND, OR, or WITH (See Using the WITH Operator on Page 167 for examples of WITH Operator useage. 5. Choose the criteria you need as filters for your query for the other fields in the table, as detailed in Adding Query Criteria to a Query on Page 163 188 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225453 Query Tasks 6. Repeat the two preceding steps and/or Step 4 in the following "Using the Add Block Button" procedure in whatever combinations your Query requires. Using the Add Block Button Blocks allow you to create complex searches of the database and also let you search for Security Objects that are NOT IN a particular subset. To Use the Add Block Button to Configure a Query 1. Create a new Query or modify an existing Query, configuring the fields on the top of the Query Editor and on the General tab. 2. In the Query Criteria box, click Add Block to add a block of rows to filter the Query results. 3. When the block row is the first row in the table, choose an Operator —IN or NOT IN are the choices. 4. Click Add Block to add another block of rows and then choose a logical Operator for the row— AND, OR, AND NOT IN, OR NOT IN . 5. Choose the criteria you need as the filters for your query for the other fields in the table, as detailed in Adding Query Criteria to a Query on Page 163 6. Repeat the two preceding steps and/or Step 4 in the preceding "Using the Add Button" procedure in whatever combinations your Query requires. Example: Using Add Versus Add Block In this first example, you want to define a Query for Personnel that finds all Contractor personnel whose access has been disabled or whose card has been stolen. The example shows how using only single rows in the Query does not return the desired results. ■ If the following three conditions are resolved separately: • Row 1 selects only Personnel where Personnel Type = Contractor - AND - • Row 2 selects from the Row 1 result only Personnel where Disabled = - OR - • Row 3 selects all Personnel with Credential Stolen = Ej • The final result shows all Personnel who met the criteria of Row 1 as well as Row 2 —all personnel who are contractors whose access is disabled —or all Personnel who met the criteria of Row 3—their credentials had been stolen. This result is not what you actually wanted. ■ With the second and third row grouped in a block: • Row 1 selects only Personnel where Personnel Type = Contractor - AND - [Block starts] • Row 2 selects from the Row 1 result only Personnel where Disabled = - OR - • Row 3 selects from the Row 1 result only Personnel with Credential Stolen = C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 189 EFTA01225454 Query Tasks [Block ends] • The final result shows all Personnel who met the criteria of Row 1 —all the contractors, and who also met the criteria of either Row 2 OR Row 3—either had their access disabled or their credentials stolen. This is the result you wanted. Example: Using Add Block with NOT IN In this second example, you want to define a Query for Personnel that finds all Contractor personnel whose access has not been disabled, or whose card has not been stolen. The example shows the selection of all personnel who meet the criteria of Row 1 —all Contractors (just like in the preceding example) and then uses a NOT IN' block to exclude those contractors whose credentials are either disabled or stolen from the results (unlike the preceding example). ■ With the second and third row grouped in a block: • Row 1 selects only Personnel where Personnel Type = Contractor - AND NOT IN - [Block starts] • Row 2 selects from the Row 1 result only Personnel where Disabled = - OR - • Row 3 selects from the Row 1 result only Personnel with Credential Stolen = [Block ends] ■ The final result shows all Personnel who met the criteria of Row 1 —all the contractors, but who did not meet the criteria of either Row 2 OR Row 3 —either did not have their access disabled or their credentials stolen, or both. Removing Query Criteria from a Query You can delete rows from the Query Criteria table to remove filters from your Query. To Remove Query Criteria from a Query 1. Modify an existing Query. See Modifying a Query on Page 162. 2. Click the row selector ► to select one or more rows you wish to remove. 3. Click Remove to remove the row from the Query Criteria table. If you select the row that starts a block, the entire block is removed. NOTE 4. When you are done removing Query Criteria, click Save and Close to save the Query. Running a Query You can run (invoke) a Query by doing any of the following: ■ Double-clicking a Query displayed in a Dynamic View list of Queries. ■ Double-clicking a Query displayed in a list of Queries on the Advanced Search pane for an object type. 170 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225455 Query Tasks ■ Clicking Instant Query on the Advanced Search pane for an object type. (See Defining an Instant Quay from Advanced Search on Page 178.) ■ Double-clicking a Dynamic View object with a Query attached. ■ Running a Report which has a Query attached. ■ Running an Export which has a Query attached. To Run a Query from the Query Dynamic View 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Query from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. dick E6i. to open a Dynamic View listing all Query objects. (You can also click the arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view). 4. Right-click the row of the Query you wish to run to open the context menu. 5. Choose one of the following: • View to run the Query in a new tab in the Content Pane • Popup View to run the Query in a floating window. • View in Current Tab to run the Query in the current Content Pane, replacing the Dynamic View of Queries. If the Query you run has user prompts available, the Query Parameters dialog box appears. For more information about Prompts, see Quay Parameter Prompts on Page 180. To Run a Query from the Advanced Search Pane for a Specific Object Type 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, navigate to the object type you want to query. Example: To search for Video Servers, click Video to open the Video pane, then choose the object type Video Server from the drop-down menu. 2. dick the Search tab if it not already open. 3. dick Advanced to open the Advanced tab under Search. MI the existing Queries for this object type are listed on the Advanced pane. (You can right-click a Query in the list to open the context menu and perform any of the functions on that menu.) 4. Double-click a Query in the list or select the Query from the list and click ak to run it. If the Query you run has user prompts available, the Query Parameters dialog box appears. For more information about Prompts, see Quay Parameter Prompts on Page 180. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 171 EFTA01225456 Complex Queries Complex Queries Complex Queries are Queries that evaluate search criteria in more than one Object Type table in the C•CURE 9000 database. Example: Suppose you want to find all Personnel who are employees and are assigned a particular Clearance named "Lobby". Personnel and Clearance are two different object types that are related. They are stored in separate tables in the database, so your query will have to evaluate separate tables and merge the results. This is a Complex Query. The query parameters would be: Operator Type Field Filter Type Value Personnel PersonnelType Equals Employee And Clearance Name Equals Lobby The first part of the query returns all Personnel who have "Employee" as their Personnel Type. The second part of the query returns Personnel who are assigned a Clearance called "Lobby". The query then merged these results using the AND operator. The result displayed is every Employee with the Lobby clearance. Suppose instead that you wanted to find all Personnel who are employees OR are assigned the Lobby Clearance. In this case, some Personnel who are not employees may hold the Lobby Clearance, so the Query finds all Personnel who are employees, and all Personnel who have the Lobby Clearance, and then merges the results using the OR operator. The result will include all Personnel who are Employees, and also include all Personnel who have the Lobby Clearance. Some of the Personnel records returned will be non-Employees who have the Lobby Clearance. The Query Editor tells you the object types you can use in a Complex Query. When you specify an target object type for the Query, and then add a row to the Query Criteria, you can only select an object type in the Type field that can be used for a Query with your Query target type and Sub Type, so it is not possible to create a Query between unrelated tables. The way Complex Queries work is that each row in the Query Criteria table is evaluated separately, then the Operator relationships are applied to form a combined Query result. An OR Operator between two rows returns all of the results from both rows (results in both rows are returned just once). An AND Operator between two rows returns only the records that are the same in both rows. In simple Queries (that search just one object type, such as a Personnel Query on Last Name Starts with "b"), the Query evaluates all rows together, not separately. Example: Row 1 of the Query finds all Personnel who are Employees. Row 2 finds all Personnel who have the Lobby Clearance. If an OR Operator was used to relate the two rows, it would return all Personnel who are Employees as well as all Personnel with the Lobby Clearance. Any Employee who also has the Lobby clearance is listed in the result only once. 172 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225457 Complex Queues If an AND Operator was used to relate the two rows, it would return all Personnel who are Employees and also have the Lobby Clearance. Employees without the Lobby Clearance are not included in the result, nor are Personnel who have the Lobby Clearance, but are not Employees. Because each row is evaluated separately, some Complex Queries using the AND operator can give NOTE different results than if the rows were evaluated together in a simple Query. Example: Define a Personnel Query to return Personnel with Clearances that are active as of April 20 and expire as of June 30. 'flock/ r. Add Ircck kw Ram. Via: Opoopen. Ise NIS hie VA. nowt Cleawce v Actroabm Dee 4/20/2:031COCOPIM And v Glenna v EatikaDele G/20/71:0810103PM Then assign these two Clearances to Personnel: Clearance 1: Active 4/ 22/ 2008, Expires 12/31/2008 Clearance 2: Active 4/1/2008, Expires 5/30/2008 The Query would return each Personnel record with these clearances in the result because each row in the complex query is evaluated separately. If you define this same Query as a Clearance Query (a simple query), the query result does not include these Clearances, because neither Clearance is active as of April 20 AND expires as of June 30. You can also use a Complex Query to find Credentials of Personnel based on some facet of the Personnel record or of any of the Personnel child records. See the Personnel chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Personnel Guide for information. Interpreting Unexpected Results Whenever a query does not return the results that you expected, it is useful to carefully examine the query terms you defined. You may find that the Query is not searching for the information you wanted it to find. You may also find that you have asked a question that the Query Editor cannot formulate. Example: You want to define a Query to find all Personnel who do not have a clearance named "Lobby". You define a Personnel Query as: Operator WWI Field Filter Type Value Personnel Personnel Type Equals Employee And Clearance Name Equals Lobby C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter 5 173 EFTA01225458 ComplexQueries However, when you run the Query, it returns a list of Personnel, some of whom do have the Clearance named "Lobby". Why? The Clearance parameter is actually searching for "All Personnel who have a clearance whose Clearance name is not "Lobby". That is different from the intended Query - Find all Personnel who do not have a clearance named "Lobby". All of the Personnel found by the Query have at least one Clearance that is not named "Lobby". They may also have the "Lobby" clearance, but the Query as designed will not exclude them from the Query result. Personnel can have multiple Clearances, and the Operators and Filters available in the Query editor do not provide a way to exclude one value among many. Essentially, you cannot build a Query to answer the original question: Find all Personnel who do not have a clearance named "Lobby". You would have to create a separate query of all Personnel who do have the "Lobby" Clearance and manually compare the results of the two Queries. 174 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225459 Performing a Quick Search Performing a Quick Search You can perform a Quick Search of an object type from the Navigation pane for that object. Example: When you click Data Views to open the Data Views pane, the Quick Search tab is opened. (For both the Hardware and Video Functions, the Hardware Tree/ Video Tree tabs open by default. Click the Search tab to open the Quick Search tab.) You can then pick an object type from the drop-down list and search for objects of that type without needing to create and save a Query. Most of the Quick Searches for objects are for object name only, so if you need to search for more NOTE complicated data, such as Hardware Inputs that are in an Armed state, you need to create a Query using the Query Editor. For a Name field search, the search performed is a 'Starts with' search. Example: If you type b in the Name field, you will get a list of all objects with names that start with "b", for example. If there are additional fields in which you can enter search criteria, these fields are ANDed with the Name field. Example: Find Events whose name starts with 'b' AND Enabled = True. example. To Perform a Quick Search 1. Click the Navigation pane for the object for which you want to search. Example: To search for Personnel-related objects, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select the object type you wish to search for from the drop-down list at the top of the pane. Example: If you are on the Personnel pane, you can choose from Personnel, Badge Layout, CHUID Format, Clearance, Credential, and so on. 3. If the Search tab is not open, click the Search tab to open it and if necessary click Quick. The Quick Search tab opens. 4. Depending on the object type you choose, enter search data in one or more fields. Typically the Name field is included, and some object types include other choices. Example: Images lets you select an Image Type (such as Portrait, Signature, Fingerprint, etc.) from a drop-down list. 5. When you have finished typing the data you wish to search for, click ath i to perform the Quick Search. Quick Search results are displayed in a Dynamic View. 6. You can perform additional new Quick Searches by typing different data into the fields on the Quick Search tab and clicking C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 175 EFTA01225460 Performing a Quirk Search 7. You can choose to open the search result in the current tab in the content pane, or in a new tab by clicking the mow on the Start Search button. MIMI Display in Current Tab Display in a New Tab 176 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225461 Defining a New Query from Advanced Search Defining a New Query from Advanced Search You can create and save a new Advanced Search Query for an object type from the Navigation pane for that object. When you click a Function button such as Configuration, Data Views, or Personnel to open respectively the Configuration, Data Views, or Personnel pane, the Quick Search tab is opened. When you click either the Hardware or Video Function button, the Hardware Tree/ Video Tree tabs NOTE respectively are open by default. Click the Search tab to open the Quick Search tab. You can click the Advanced Search tab to create a new complex query or run an existing query on the object type currently selected in the drop-down menu in the Navigation pane. This is most useful if you want to perform a kind of search on an object type that a Quick Search cannot accomplish. Example: To search for Hardware Inputs that are in an Armed state, you need to create a Query, because Quick Search does not include the fields you would need to search. To Create a New Query from Advanced Search 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, navigate to the object type you want to query. Example: To search for Credentials, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane, then choose the object type Credential from the drop-down menu. 2. Click the Search tab if it not already open. 3. Click Advanced to open the Advanced tab under Search. 4. Click New to create a new Query. The Query Editor opens, as shown in Figure 66 on Page 148, and you can configure the Query. See Configuring a Query on Page 161 and Adding Query Criteria to a Query on Page 163. 5. To save your new Query, click Save and Close. -Or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Query as a copy of the existing Query, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Query on Page 163. Once the Query is saved, it appears in the list on the Advanced Search pane. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 177 EFTA01225462 Defining an Instant Query from Advanced Search Defining an Instant Query from Advanced Search You can create and run an Instant Query from Advanced Search for an object type from the Navigation pane for that object. This is useful for creating complex queries on-the-fly without the requirement of saving the query. In addition, Instant Query allows you to select an existing query for the object type, modify it (if the Allow editing at runtime option was set for that Query when it was configured), and then run it. When you click a Function button such as Configuration, Data Views, or Personnel to open respectively the Configuration, Data Views, or Personnel pane, the Quick Search tab is opened. You can then click the Advanced Search tab and Instant Query to create and immediately run a query for the object type currently selected in the drop-down menu in the Navigation pane. dMI To Create an Instant Query from Advanced Search 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, navigate to the object type you want to query. Example: To search for Video Servers, click Video to open the Video pane, then choose the object type Video Server from the drop-down menu. 2. Click the Search tab (if it is not already open). 3. Click Advanced to open the Advanced tab under Search. 4. Click Instant Query to create an Instant Query. The Instant Query button is available even if the user does not have privileges to create a Query. NOTE You can click the down arrow next to the Instant Query button to select one of the query subtypes from the drop- down list. When you click Instant Query, the default of the Basic Configuration is automatically chosen. Instant Query... Event Group Basic Configuration Event Audit Log Event Journal The Query Parameters dialog box for the object type and sub type opens, as shown in Figure 70 on Page 179. For definitions of Query Parameters fields and buttons, see: • Table 28 on Page 150 • Table 29 on Page 151 178 Chapters C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225463 Defining an Instant Query from Advanced Search F!gore 70: Query Parameters Dialog Box for Instant Query m Llwriraorarnst. g 11.0.11•44, C • m+. ,n• fs.11 his 'pas Yik• 5. Configure the Query as described in Configuring a Query on Page 161 and Adding Query Criteria to a Query on Page 163 and enter values. Click in in the Predefined Query field to select an existing Query for this object type as your Instant Query. The Query list for the object opens. nen' la * L 'II tui,, , lu lit ),V by h ,,' Nara 1 Pattikn I Denriplian 5 Ckk hete io filer dye u. 41 1 Everdlutcyl Defect EverdQuay2 Detail a. Click a row to select a Query. The Query Parameters dialog box reappears with the selected query displayed. If the query was configured to allow editing at runtime, the button on the lower left reads Modify as shown in the similar Query Parameters dialog box in Figure 73 on Page 182. On the other hand, if the query does not allow editing, the button reads Details, as shown in Figure 71 on Page 180. b. Modify the Instant Query, if applicable, and enter values. 6. Run the Instant Query. If you click Run without having configured the Query, the search returns all the objects of that type. NOTE C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 179 EFTA01225464 Query Parameter Prompts Query Parameter Prompts When you run a Query that has Prompts enabled, or open a Dynamic View, an Export, or a Report to which a Query is attached and the n Query has at least one row with Prompt = E, the Query Parameters dialog box appears. Example: When you select the Audit Log or the Journal from Options & Tools, a Query Parameters dialog box for these functions is displayed. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information. The Query Parameters dialog box has a slightly different appearance and functionality depending on whether or not a user can modify the query at runtime (set when the query was created/edited). ■ When you run a Query with Prompts enabled that cannot be edited at runtime, a dialog box such as the example in Figure 71 on Page 180 appears. Figure 71: Query Parameters Dialog Box for a Non-editable Query Click Details to change to Query Detail mode. See Figure 72 on Page 180. All the fields that appear in the Query Criteria table in the Query Editor (see Figure 66 on Page 148 are shown. For field definitions, see Query Editor - General Tab on Page 148. Figure 72: Query Parameters Dialog Box Detais fora Non-editable Query •4_, Irt••••0411NOly Mir Trait. 615N r*hw LN:su rod %ye Yin • • 1.. P4••• V 2 MI • •• keen .“•erne. • A rl..•••• 1.ry • INitani • %Mot • 4.0a • O t 180 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225465 Query Parameter Prompts Qu criteria that do not allow changing values at runtime (no prompts) appear on this Details NOTE ay mode dialog box, though they are not displayed on the Prompts mode dialog box in Figure 71 on Page 180. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 181 EFTA01225466 Query Parameter Prompts You can click Run to run the Query as is, or you can first enter filtering data in any of the Query Parameter rows and then click Run. You can change the Filter Type as well as enter/change prompt values. Example: If a Quay Prompt displays PersonnelLastName with a Filter Type of Contains, you could type Br and then click Run to find Personnel with the letters "be in the Last Name field. Creating a Query with prompts lets the Operator who is running the Query choose to change one or more filter values before the Quay is actually run. Example: If your Operators often search for Personnel by Last Name, with other criteria that do not change, you could configure a Prompt for the Last Name field to allow Operators to enter different Last Name values before running the Query, rather than creating multiple Queries with different values for Last Name. • When you run a Quay with Prompts enabled that can also be edited at runtime, a dialog box such as the example in Figure 73 on Page 182 appears. Figure 73: Query Parameters Dialog Box for an Editable Query Pr Cutrymt, gdwrintieskg Ntline iMi IM IYe rtuTelbyreeng bat •I D rEl Click Modify to change to Query Edit mode (see Figure 74 on Page 183). MI the buttons that appear in the Quay Criteria table in the Query Editor (Figure 66 on Page 148) are now available, as well as all the fields. 182 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225467 Query Parameter Prompts For definitions of Query buttons and field definitions, see: • Query General Tab Buttons on Page 151 • Query General Tab Definitions on Page 148. F Igo re 74: Query Parameters Dialog Box Detals loran Eatable Query . 0wy pcmpott Pit...W0W! nib Pt OrVi 5,.... Ise 'S Oat* Vs. Pm. tr.. • Pusani v rale. w Cat. v _ F. v4 v P.n., . LVIInt y COOVI V ., ..t: a N• Nano • hrowi'm • Est •• csaskt W a As • ”..,,,„. . (...t..• • (PA 0 C ird • honel • Will • ES. 0 C You are able to modify the entire Query without saving it—adding and deleting criteria, for example—as well as simply changing the filter types or entering/changing the prompt values. Even a user without Edit privileges for the query's object type can change the query in this Query Edit NOTE mode. In addition, entries in the Filter Type field can be changed on the Query Parameters dialog box shown in Figure 73 on Page 182. When you finish making changes to the Query and/or entering filtering information, click Run. CCURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 5 183 EFTA01225468 Query Parameter Prompts 184 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225469 6 Reporting This chapter explains how to use the Reporting functionality provided in C•CURE 9000. In this chapter Reporting Overview 186 Accessing the Report-Related Editors 189 The Report Service 190 Basic Reporting Tasks 191 Report Editor 201 Report Editor Tasks 202 Report Tab 204 Report Layout Design Tab 212 Report Layout Design Tab Tasks 223 Report Layout Preview Tab 226 Report Form Editor .230 Report Form Layout Design Tab 231 Report Form Editor Tasks 232 Report Form Layout Design Tab Tasks 235 Report Form Layout Preview Tab 236 Report Form Viewer 237 Report Result Overview 238 Report Result Editor 239 Report Result Tasks 242 Report/Report Result Viewers 245 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 785 EFTA01225470 Repor ling Overview Reporting Overview C•CURE 9000 Reports provide the capability to create detailed reports about any C•CURE 9000 object, to customize the appearance of reports, print reports, view reports, save reports for later printing/viewing, or convert reports to several output formats. C•CURE 9000 also includes eighteen pre-defined Reports with related pre-defined Queries that you can use "as is," or copy and customize to meet your specific needs. For detailed information, see the Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views on Page 254 for Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Views. Table 33 on Page 187 summarizes the Reporting tasks you can perform. C•CURE 9000 Reports are built using the following components: ■ Report Editor - Design report data schema and layouts and preview report formats. ■ Report Form - Create re-usable report header/footer layouts to give your reports a consistent look and feel. (The system also provides two predefined Report Forms: Default Form and Advanced Form.) ■ Report Result - Store and view reports that you have run. ■ Report Service - This service on the C•CURE 9000 server executes Reports that are invoked as "Run on Server". C•CURE 9000 Reports let you do the following: ■ Create reports about any C•CURE 9000 Object ■ Access and use System pre-defined Reports ■ Create report templates to simplify report design ■ Run reports on demand ■ Save Report Results for sharing between different users of the application or for historical purposes ■ Make copies of existing Reports, pre-defined and user-created ■ Export reports into formats such as Portable Document Format (PDF) ■ Specify a query to select and filter the records on which to report ■ Specify the object types and related data fields to be included in a report ■ Design a Report Form to be used as a layout for headers/footers for multiple reports ■ Access and use System Pre-defined Report Forms ■ Specify a design for the report layout by selecting tabular, multi-line, or free form report layouts ■ Report on objects linked together with parent/child relations ■ Schedule reports to run automatically on a customizable schedule ■ Send exported report files to the printer or to external recipients via e-mail C•CURE 9000 also allows you to quickly and easily create ay reports in Excel spreadsheets by NOTE exporting data from Dynamic Views. For information and detailed procedures, see Default Dynamic Views on Page 93. 188 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225471 Reporting Overview Table 33: Reporting Tasks Task See... To access the Report Editor Accessing the Report-Related Editorson Page 189 To access the Report Form Editor Report Form Editor on Page 230 To access the Report Results Editor Report Result Editor on Page 239 To create a Report Creating a Report on Page 191 To create a Report template Creating a Report Template on Page 191 To configure a Report Configuring a Report on Page 192 To run a Report Running a Report on Page 193 To schedule a Report Scheduling a Report on Page 194 To save a Report Saving a Report and its Results on Page 195 To create a copyof a Report Creating a Copyof a Report on Page 196 To export a Report Result Exporting a Report Result on Page 197 To view a Wel Reports Viewing a List of Reportson Page 202 To modify a Report Modifying a Report on Page 202 To delete a Report Deleting a Data Views Pane Objecton Page 19 To choose a Report Type and Sub Type Choosing a Report Type and Sub Type on Page 208 To use the Class Selector Using the Class Selector on Page 208 To use the Field Selector Using the Field Selector on Page 209 To select Report features Selecting Report Featureson Page 210 To create Sub-Reports Creating Sub-Reportson Page 211 To add a field to the layout Adding a Field to the Layout on Page 223 To add a header/footer to the layout Adding a Header or Footer on Page 223 To adjust report settings Adjusting the Report Settingson Page 224 To add a page break Adding a Page Breakon Page 224 To add a text box/picture/shape/line Adding a Text Box. Picture. Shape. or Line on Page 225 To view a Report preview Viewing a Report Preview on Page 228 To print a Report preview Printing a Report Preview on Page 228 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 187 EFTA01225472 Reporting Overview Table 33: Reporting Tasks (continued) Task See... To create a Report Form Creating a Report Form on Page 232 To create a Report Form template Creating a Report Form Template on Page 232 To view a list of Report Forms Viewing a List of Report Formson Page 234 To delete a Report Form Using a Report Form to Format a Report on Page 234 To preview a Report Form Report Form Layout Preview Tab on Page 236 To view a Report Form To View a Report Form on Page 237 To view a list of alVselected Report Results Viewing a List of Report Resultson Page 242 To delete a Report Result Deleting a Report Result on Page 243 To view Report Result Information Report Result Editor on Page 239 To view a Report or Report Result Report/Report Result Viewerson Page 245 Creating large Reports with associated Images may cause high memory utilization on the Client NOTE station. Reports larger than available memory may cause the report to terminate. Methods of mitigating this are: ■ Increasing the virtual memory size on the client station. ■ Utilizing filtered queries (based on date, location, or message type) to create several smaller Reports or a more focused Report. ■ Avoiding running large reports on the Server with the "Run On Server" option, to prevent the Server from running out of memory. ■ Changing the Report Result Page Limit default of 2500 pages by reducing the limit. (The Report Result Page Limit entry is found under Reporting on the System Variables General Tab.) ■ Software House recommends not creating a Personnel report exceeding 25k records excluding Images. If you create a large report with Images, use the Query to limit the size of the Report or an out-of-memory exception may occur. 188 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225473 Accessing the Report-Related Editors Accessing the Report-Related Editors You can access the three Report-related Editors from the C•CURE 9000 Data Views pane of the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation. To Access the Report Editor 1. Click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report. 3. Click New to create a new Report - or - Click a m to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Report objects, right-click the Report you want to change, and click Edit from the context menu that appears. The eighteen C•CURE 9000 pre-defined Reports are in the list by default. Although you cannot NOTE modify these 'hard-coded' objects, you can create copies of them for customizing. For information, see Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views on Page 254. The Report Editor opens. (For examples of the editor/tabs, see Figure 80 on Page 204, Figure 82 on Page 212, and Figure 89 on Page 226.) To Access the Report Form Editor 1. Click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report Form. 3. Click New to create a new Report Form. - or - Click a m to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Report Form objects and then do either of the following to the Report Form you want to change: — Double-click it. — Right-click it and click Edit from the context menu that appears. The two system-supplied pre-defined Report Forms, Default Form and Advanced Form, are in the list NOTE by default. The Report Form Editor opens. See Figure 90 on Page 231 To Access the Report Result Editor 1. Click the Data Views pane button . 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report Results. Click a m to open a Dynamic View listing all existing Report Result objects, right-click the Report Result you want to review or change, and click Edit from the context menu that appears. The Report Result Editor opens displaying that Report Result. See Figure 93 on Page 239. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 189 EFTA01225474 The Report Service The Report Service The Report Service is a separate service process that runs on the C•CURE 9000 server. The Report Service executes Reports that are Run on Server by an Operator, or that are configured to run as an Event Action. Reports that are run and viewed on the Administration client or Monitoring Station application do not use the Report Service. The Report Service must be enabled and running for it to execute Run on Server reports. The Report Service is disabled by default, like other optional services, until you enable it NOTE ■ If you try to run a report on the server and the Report Service is not running, an error message appears stating that the service is not running. ■ If an Event that is configured to run a Report is activated and the Report Service is not running, an error is logged to the system Event Log by the CrossFire Framework Service. ■ If an error occurs during report creation of a Run on Server report, a description of the error is entered into the Description field of the Report Result (if a Report Result object can be created and saved in spite of the error). You can enable and run the Report Service using the Server Configuration Application. See the C•CURE 9000 Server Configuration Application Guide for more information. 190 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225475 Baser Repor ling Tasks Basic Reporting Tasks The primary tasks related to the generation of reports that the C•CURE 9000 Report Editors allow you to accomplish are: ■ Creating a Report on Page 191 ■ Creating a Report Template on Page 191 ■ Configuring a Report on Page 192 ■ Running a Report on Page 193 ■ Scheduling a Report on Page 194 ■ Saving a Report and its Results on Page 195 ■ Creating a Copy of a Report on Page 196 ■ Exporting a Report Result on Page 197 Creating a Report You can create a new Report using the Report Editor. To Create a Report 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click the Data Views pane button . 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report. 3. Click New to create a new Report. The Report Editor opens. (For examples of the Report Editor and its tabs, see Figure 80 on Page 204, Figure 82 on Page 212, and Figure 89 on Page 226.) 4. You can now configure the Report, selecting the fields you want to report on, designing a layout for the report, and previewing the way the report will look using sample data. 5. To save your new Report, click Save and Close. - or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Report as a copy of the existing Report, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Report on Page 196. If you create and save a new report with its report type, subtype, and fields already selected and Free NOTE form as the Layout style, when you view it on the Report Editor Layout Design or Layout Preview tabs or run the report, it will be completely blank. The Free form style requires you to create the layout yourself on the Layout Design tab. Creating a Report Template You can create a Report template that can then serve as the basis of new reports of a specific type. In a template you can enter field values so these fields are pre-populated for all reports, and you can then use the template when you are creating new reports. Example: C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 191 EFTA01225476 Basic Repor ling Tasks You could create a template for all reports of a certain type, such as Personnel, that includes a set of Personnel fields. Then whenever you were creating a new report of this type, you would save time by creating the new report from the template, instead of the default blank form. To Create a Report Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Report from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click the down-arrow on the New button and click Template to create a new Report template. The Report Editor, where you can configure the Report template, opens. (For examples of the Report Editor and its tabs, see Figure 80 on Page 204, Figure 82 on Page 212, and Figure 89 on Page 226.) NO, Report Teoviate Chick 4. Any fields for which you configure values become part of the template (including the layout); then when you subsequently create a new Report from that template, these field values are already filled in. 5. In the Name field, enter the name you wish to use for the template (Report Template, for example). 6. To save your new Report template, click Save and Close. Configuring a Report Configuring a report is the process of specifying the content of the report, creating or applying a layout to a report, and previewing the report layout to make sure you will get the results you want. You configure a report by opening it in the Report Editor. To Configure a Report 1. Open an existing report using the Report Editor, or create a new report. 2. Use the Report tab, as shown in the example in Figure 80 on Page 204, to specify the object type on which you want to report and the data fields you want to include in the report. 3. Use the Layout Design tab, as shown in the example in Figure 82 on Page 212, to specify the report layout (the appearance of the report, including colors, fonts, headers, and footers). 4. Use the Layout Preview tab, as shown in the example in Figure 89 on Page 226, to view your report layout with sample data to verify that the report will meet your needs. 5. To save your Report, click Save and Close. - or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new report as a copy of the existing Report, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Report on Page 196. 192 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Went Guide EFTA01225477 Base t Running a Report You can run a report from the Dynamic View list of Reports, or you can schedule a report to run once on a specified time and date, or on a recurring basis. For more information, see Scheduling a Report on Page 194. If you are running a very large report, it is often best to use the Run on Server option. Sometimes a NOTE very large report can cause a client workstation to run out of memory. In addition, avoid opening a very large report multiple times using View, Popup View, and View in Current Tab, because this can cause a client workstation to run out of memory or perform slowly. To Run a Report 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click the Data Views pane button. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report 3. Click g ig to open a Dynamic View listing all Reports. (You can also click the down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view). 4. Right-click a Report in the list to open the Report Context menu (for information, see Table 36 on Page 202). 5. Take one of the following actions: • Click View to run the report as a new tab in the C•CURE 9000 content area. • Click Popup View to run the Report and view it in a separate popup window. • Click View in Current Tab to run the report in the current tab in the C•CURE 9000 content area (replacing the Reports Dynamic View). • Click Run on Server to start the report running in the background. The Report is run on the server by the Report Service. (If the Report Service is not running, an error message appears to tell you that the service needs to be started.) The finished report is saved and is accessible from the Report Result Dynamic View. A system variable in the Reporting category lets you set a maximum page count limit for reports NOTE generated in your system. For information, see the System Variables chapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. If the Report has an attached query without prompts, the query filter is applied automatically. If the Report has an attached query with prompts, a Query Parameters dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 75 on Page 194, after you click any of the preceding buttons. (For more information about queries, see Query Overview on Page 146.) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 193 EFTA01225478 Banc Roper Mg Tasks Figure 75: Query Parameters Dialog Box "Query ',ammeters Pelson by Card Num Interval Ent V3,1,C1,,,i"C,C Duey POIOTRAtil Object fps/ ret1 Ott CoadeitelCacthrrbee ICaedertelCadlutte gee Ouse Owe 6. To view all the information about the query's search criteria, click Show Query Detail. 7. Enter values for the parameters and then click Execute Query to retrieve data for the Report you are running. The progress of the report generation displays on the Status bar as shown in the following examples: ( Aid tenderly mm19006031 le Once the status bar shows the number of records being processed, a Cancel Report button on the top of the screen becomes available for use. When the report processing is completed, the report appears on the Report Viewer. (See Figure 95 on Page 245 for an example.) The Cancel Report button disappears and the Save Result and Export Document buttons become available. Scheduling a Report You can schedule reports for execution using C•CURE 9000 Schedules and the Run Report action. Reports scheduled to run based on an Event action are "Run on Server" by the Report Service. The Report Service must be enabled and running when a Run Report action is activated; otherwise NOTE the Report cannot run, and an error is written to the system Event Log. For information about creating Schedules and Events, see the relevant chapters in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. To Schedule a Report 1. Create a Report. (For information, see Creating a Report on Page 191.) 2. Create a Schedule for running the report. 3. Create an Event. 194 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225479 Basic Reporting Tasks 4. Create a Run Report action in the Event. a. Click the Event Action tab. b. Click Add to add an Action. c. Select Run Report from the Action drop-down list. The Report box opens on the bottom of the screen as shown in Figure 76 on Page 195. Figure 76: EventAction Run Report box B.000 Pa it python JOIOACS Qeee result deer the Iacono; run:ado:0s r O fowl teRits C40111P:Ombh- AI wait n tlst *CO woos N logesve toes ant 5. Enter information as follows a. In the Report to run with privileges of: (Operator name) field, click [nand select the report you want to run from the list of Reports (which includes both the pre-defined Reports and user-created). The system automatically enters the name of the Operator configuring/modifying this event (and NOTE their Partition, if relevant). This indicates that the Run Report action uses their Privilege. (The Operator name [and Partition, if existing] are logged in the Journal message recording the running of this Report at its scheduled times.) If the selected Report has an attached query with prompts, the Report is executed as if the Operator were running it without populating any prompt values. b. If you wish, select the Delete results after the following number of days option and enter the value in the box on the right. c. Select the Export results option if you wish and click the Export Properties button to open the Export dialog box and fill in and select the export parameters. The export action is performed after the report execution is completed. (For information on exporting, see the procedure in Exporting a Report Result on Page 197. In addition, see on Page 249.) 6. Click the Event General tab. 7. In the Activate on Schedule field, click El and select the Schedule you want to use to schedule the report. 8. Enable the Event by selecting the Enabled check box. 9. Arm the Event by selecting Armed in the Default State box. 10. Save the Event by clicking Save and Close. Saving a Report and its Results You can save a Report that you designed with the Report Editor. When you run a report either manually or by scheduling a report action, the output of the report can be saved as a Report Result. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 195 EFTA01225480 Basic Repor ling Tasks To Save a Report You Have Edited 1. Create or modify a report using the Report Editor. (For information, see Creating a Report on Page 191 or Modifying a Report on Page 202.) 2. To save your Report, click Save and Close. Alternatively, to create a new Report as a copy of the existing Report, click Create Copy. See Creating a Copy of a Report on Page 196. To Save a Report You Have Run 1. Run a Report. (For information, see Running a Report on Page 193.) 2. If you are viewing the Report, you can click Save Result to save the Report output. The Report is saved as a Report Result. You can find the saved Report Result by Viewing a List of Report Results (see Viewing a List of Report Results on Page 242) or by right-clicking a Report in a Dynamic View and then clicking Find Results on the Report context menu (see Table 36 on Page 202). If you run the Report by clicking Run on Server on the Report context menu, the Report Result is NOTE automatically saved on completion. Creating a Copy of a Report You can create a copy of a Report, using it as a blueprint for a new Report. Any fields and/or layouts configured in the existing Report are copied for the new Report —only the Name field is blank. (For information on copying one of the pre-defined Reports, see To Customize a Pre-defined Report/Query/Dynamic View on Page 269.) a To Create a Copy of a Report I. Create/modify a Report on the Report Editor. For more information, see: • Creating a Report on Page 191 • Modifying a Report on Page 202 2. Click Create Copy. The warning message "save original before creating copy?" appears. Warning: Changes ll be lost Ix sine cordbele. creetno e care In Be Cancel • Click Yes to save the existing Report and its configuration and open a copy on the Report Editor. • Click No to open a copy on the Report Editor without saving the existing Report. • Click Cancel to return to the Report Editor without creating a copy. If you clicked either Yes or No, the Report Editor re-appears with a copy of the Report displayed and the Name field blank. 196 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225481 Base 12 Exporting a Report Result Once you have run a report or saved it as a Report Result, you can export it to a different format—any of those shown in Table 34 on Page 197 —and/or e-mail, print, and save the exported report. Table 34: Export Formats Format Name PDF Portable Document Format MHTML MIME HTML Format NOTE: Because MHTML Is not a wel-supported format in browsers and does not function wellwah very large Reports. Software House recommends using PDF or another Export format instead. NOTE: The MHTML Be type is not supported for Printing. RTF Rich Text Format TXT Text Format TIF Tagged Image File Format XLS Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet You can export a Report Result from the following three different places: ■ Report Result List ■ Report Viewer ■ Report Result Viewer You can also export a report scheduled to run automatically on a selected schedule (see Scheduling a Report on Page 194). To Export a Report from the Report Result List 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click the Data Views pane button . 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report Result. 3. Click jami to open a Dynamic View listing all Report Results. (You can also click the down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view). 4. Right-click the Report Result you want to export. The Report Result Context menu appears, as shown in Figure 77 on Page 198. For descriptions of the menu options, see Table 48 on Page 242. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 197 EFTA01225482 Basic Reporting Tasks Figure 77: Report Result Context Menu Edit View Popup view 23 View in current tab X Delete Set property Find in Audit Log... Find in Journal... b. Export document... ise, View Query... (t.b Stop running report Cid Change Partition 5. Click Export Document. The Export Report Document dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 78 on Page 198. For descriptions of the fields, properties, and buttons see Export Report Document Dialog Box on Page 249. Figure 78: Export Report Document Dialog Box Egal Palms Detelon ROWS E-nsi d Aces lo Deal by Pew Semzl ems' Fehm (gamut :Man from mixxIMI vcoard Lora MaTML -L kickers M S.tmct Imal-nallnurt tom pertornr1 admlind to -4t Repot.. lin, ...mat I ID Mac mewl SochmorliStyle a Platt CParfrateSat Prim file FS* Ctesetarnesehp PcI4eHmO•midef Purtee VadeRnelkwrt a S-a %a g* Saved. Tne CmipAiyot ReramVamcalSorm Folder Trte Can mimeos Fir Inntkie vacua Fist CbaraeleSS sc Santa awe to 0am-wrung...no:mg thlt geld atacpnrse Wag viewer te Cprod to AI bit wadet IM 0.tputed 0,291* 61.01/0 thlt dralrldad *mut 6. Type a file name for the report you want to export in the File name field. (By default, it is set to the name of the Report Result you selected.) 7. Select the format in which you wish to save the report from the Format drop-down list. 198 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225483 Basic Reporting Tasks 8. Set any properties you wish in the Format Properties sheet (the properties on this sheet change depending on the format you choose). 9. Set the destination(s) for the exported report. • If you want to e-mail the report, enter the E-mail Address To and Address From and any Message Text you want to send; change Send e-mail to True; and enter a subject for the e-mail. To send e-mails, you first have to set up the e-mail parameters for your entire system using the NOTE System Variables Customer Support category. For information, see the relevant chapter in the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. • If you want to print the document, change Print File to True and select a printer from the drop-down list in the Printer field, or enter a dollar sign ($) to print to the default printer. • If you want to save the document, set Save File to True and enter a folder name, or enter a dollar sign ($) to save in the default user's document folder. • If you want to view the saved document, set Invoke Viewer to True. Printing and/or viewing exported report documents works only if the appropriate third-party Viewer NOTE application (Adobe Reader for PDFs, for example) is installed and configured on the computer. 10. Click Export to perform the specified actions. A Status dialog box opens with progress information on the actions, as shown in Figure 79 on Page 199. Figure 79: Exporting Report Document Status Dialog Box E cowl rcco do-wer cenE...1 tt,P*0 F*e sre * xn* (co*, 11. Click the appropriate button to print or e-mail the status information. 12. Click OK to close the Status dialog box. 13. Click Close to exit the Export Report Document dialog box. To Export a Report from the Report/Report Result Viewers 1. Run a Report (see Running a Report on Page 193). or select a Report Result to view (see Report/Report Result Viewers on Page 245). 2. On the Report/Report Result Viewer, click Export Document. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 199 EFTA01225484 Basic Repor ling Tasks The Export Report Document dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 78 on Page 198. Follow Step 6 through Step 13 in To Export a Report from the Report Result List on Page 197. 200 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225485 Report Editor Report Editor The Report Editor in C•CURE 9000 lets you create reports about C•CURE 9000 objects. From the Report Editor, you can choose the objects and fields to include in your report, design the layout of the report, and preview that layout; you can then choose to save the report. The following topics give more information about the Report Editor and how to use it. ■ Reporting Overview on Page 186 ■ Report Editor Tasks on Page 202 The Report Editor has the following tabs: ■ Report Tab on Page 204 ■ Report Layout Design Tab on Page 212 ■ Report Layout Preview 1'ab on Page 226 The Report Editor has the buttons described in Table 35. Table 35: Report Editor Buttons Button Description Save Click this button when you have completed anychanges to the Report and wish to save those changes. The Report closes. and Close Save Click this button when you want to create a new Report using the entries in the Report currenttyon the Report Editor as a template. and If the Report is user-created and has been modified in the editor, a warning appears asking whether you want to save your original New before creating the copy. Click Yes to save the original Report. No to not save it, and Cancel to return to the original Report without making a copy. Click this button when you want to close the Report Editor without saving your changes. A warning appears asking whether or not you want to save your changes before closing the editor. Click Yes to exit and save and No to exit and cancel your changes. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 201 EFTA01225486 Report Editor Tasks Report Editor Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the Report Editor. ■ Viewing a List of Reports on Page 202 ■ Modifying a Report on Page 202 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 Viewing a List of Reports You can display a list of the reports you have created by opening a Dynamic View of reports. See Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20. Double-clicking a report in the list runs the report and opens it on the Report Viewer, as NOTE though you clicked View in the Context menu. Report List Context Menu The context menu that opens when you right-click a report in the Report Dynamic View includes the selections described in Data Views Object Context Menu on Page 20. In addition, there are Report-specific options described in Table 42 on Page 217. (Double-clicking a report in the list runs the report, opening it on the Report Viewer, as though you clicked View in the Context menu.) Table 36: Report List Right-ClickContext Menu Options Menu Description Selection Run on Click this menu selection to run the Report on the C•CURE 9000 server and save the result as a Report Result. You can then Server choose Find Results from this menu to view a list of saved versions of this report. Once the Report has begun running, the system opens a Dynamic View that lists the running Report Result. You can close the view and let the Report run on the Server without waiting for its completion, or you can stop the running of the Report. NOTE: A system variable in the Reporting category lets you set limitson the page count of the reportsgenerated in your C•CURE 9000 system. For information, see the System Variables chapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Find Click to open a dialog box that lists all Report Results for this Report. A Report Result stores a completed report as a document. in Results addition to the report query and the set of report parameters used to generate that report document. Modifying a Report You can modify an existing report by editing it using the Report Editor. To Modify a Report 1. Click Data Views. 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report. 202 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225487 Report Editor Tasks 3. Click 7 , to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all Report objects. 4. Right-click the report you want to change and click Edit from the context menu that appears. 5. The Report Editor opens for you to edit the report. • Use the Report tab to change the object type for the report and the data fields to be included in the report. If you change the object type, the report layout is recreated and you will lose any NOTE customized formatting you previously applied. • Use the Layout Design tab to change the format and appearance of the report data. • Use the Layout Preview tab to view your report layout with sample data to verify that the report will look the way you want when you finally run it. 6. To save your modified Report, click Save and Close. - Or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new report as a copy of the existing Report, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Report on Page 196. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 203 EFTA01225488 Report Tab Report Tab The Report tab, as shown in Figure 80 on Page 204, is used to define the following for the report: ■ Report Schema • Report type—the kind (class) of C•CURE 9000 object on which the report is based. • Sub type—the kind of subordinate object on which the report is based. All C•CURE 9000 objects, except for the Group class type, have three possible Sub types: Basic Configuration, Audit, and Journal. • Data fields for the object you chose for the report. • Data fields for any child objects to include in a sub-report of the report. ■ Report Features you can include are: • Report Form (if any) used to format the report. • Report Query (if any) used to filter the report data. • Layout Style of the report. Figure 80: Report Editor Report Tab imiSe.oardClose CIO•it•Copy Nem I 0ektisbre A anon ILavesEltso I LapeutReVarel RepaiDde Rego.Fela %%tippet I Nocil.e. Sob we I I Ow abaft Fold soled= nopal owl I 11 O Sebned tchene r Pawl iwaven 1 OW 'Tatar :to. 204 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225489 Report Tab Figure 81: Report Editor Report Tab with Data Entered Report Layout Design Layout PleVieW Rout Data &Mat tor Penedo' Side toe Elasc Coliguratien Class seeder Fead selects. = 2 Selected Schema 0 FaM Nerve 2 Penornd E Last Rare 2 °envied ▪ Molt Nome E Paton' Ce Norte O Wars ❑ Akemate Shunt {RDA) ❑ Associonon Cenanw 0 NW ❑ Date> ❑ Disabled 0 IRMODecoded FIN Irtl fl IN2 Report Tab Definitions The Report tab has the fields described in Table 37 on Page 205. Also see Figure 81 on Page 205 for an example of entered Report data. Table 37: Report Editor Report Tab Fields Fields Description Name The name of the Report. This field is required. Description A textual description of the Report. This field is not required. but if used can make it easier to identify the specific Report you wish to edit. Partition A read-only field displaying the name of the Partition to which this Report belongs. (This field isysible only if the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned.) Report Data - See Figure 81 on Page 205 for an example with data entered Report Select the type of object to use as the basis for your report from this drop-down list. Type Example: If you want to create a report about Personnel, choose the Personnel object type. If you want to create a report about Doors, choose the Door object type. You can choose only one object type for a report. If you change the object type after saving the report, the layout of the report changes because the fields from the previous object type no longer apply. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 205 EFTA01225490 Report Tab Report Editor Report Tab Fields (continued) ...., Fields Description Sub Type Some object types include a Sub type that has a different set of fields. If the object type you chose has more than one Sub type. you can choose the Sub type on which to base your report from this drop-down list. The default Sub type for everyobject type is known as the Basic Configuration and includes the basic information that can be reported on for that object. Example: Personnel has three Sub types: Basle Configuration, PersonnelAudlt Log. and Personnel Journal. The Personnel Basic Configuration includes Personnel and its three child objects: Credential. Images, and Personnel Clearance Pair. Class The Class selector displays a tree showing the fields available for a report for the selected lass. You use both the Class Selector selector and the Field selector to specify the fields that will appear on your report. Each branch of the tree shows a group of data fields that can be included in the report. Each branch that you select appears as a separate nested subreport in the report layout. You can click a or p to expand and contract the tree. To include every field in a group of data fields in the report, click the m next to the branch (it becomes a Eg and every field in the branch is displayed in the Field selector with a p). To select individual fields to include in the report, click the branch name, and the individual field names appear in the Field selector (unselected m). You can then dick any field to select it ( isi). [ The Field selector displays the fields assodated with the Class selector branch currently selected. Example: If your report is about Personnel objects and you dick the branch name Personnel in the Class selector, the fields that are part of the Personnel record are listed in the Field selector. To choose a field to appear on the report, click the field name to select it and then dick the name again; or click the m to the left of the field name. A appears to indicate the field is selected for the report. IN To clear a field so it does not appear on the report, double-dick the field name, and a m appears to the left of the name to indicate it is no longer selected; or dick the to the left of the field name. is' To change the order in which fields appear on the report, dick a field and then dick a to move the field up or 95 to move the field down. Report Features Report A Report Form is a layout design for the Headers and footers Form If you have designed a Report Form that you want to use for this report, specify that your report use that form by clicking El and choosing a Report Form from the dialog box that appears. Two predefined Report Forms are also provided for your use (for information. see Pre-defined Report Forms on Page 230). If you do not choose to use a saved Report Form, you can use the Report Layout Design tab to define a custom layout for the report you are dealing. In this case you can leave this field blank. You can also use both a Report Form and your own layout design for a report. In this case, the two are merged for the final report. as described in the note in Adding a Header or Footer on Page 223. 206 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225491 Report Tab Report Editor Report Tab Fields (continued) Fields Description Report A Report Query is a Query object that you appty to your report to fitter the results. You can use the Query to determine the Query particular data the finished report contains. (For more information about queries, see Query Overview on Page 146 in this guide.) Example: If you are creating a Personnel report and want the report result to show only Personnel records for Contract Employees, you can create a query to titer all Personnel by Employee Type = Contractor. After you save that query object, you can use it to filter your report. To specify a Report Query click El and on the Dynamic View that appears either choose a Query from the list or click the New button to create a new Query. Prompt for Select this check box to have the system prompt you with a Query Parameters dialog box when the report is run. You can then Query either specify criteria values on-the fty or select a pre-existing Query of the same Object type as the Report to filter your results. If you have attached an existing Query to the report in the preceding field, when the Query Parameters dialog box opens, that Query is entered in the Predefined Query field. If the query is editable, you can change the criteria. You can also select another existing Query to run instead. For information on using the Query dialog box, see Query Parameter Prompts on Page 180. If there is no attached Query, the Query dialog box looks and behaves as for Instant Query. See Defining an Instant Query from Advanced Search on Page 178. Layout Style You can choose one of three layout styles from thisdrop-down box. If you choose either the Tabularor Multi-line style, the system automaticalty generates a design layout for the report when you save it. If you choose the Free form style. you have to create the layout yourself. You can also choose either the Tabular or Mult l- 1Ine style and then modify it as needed (the system automaticalty changes the report's Layout style to Free form). Tabular style - if the report has no sub reports, a single table is formed for the top-level report data. If the report does include sub reports, the top-level report data is formatted multi-line while the sub reports are formatted as tables. This is the default layout. NOTE: If a table does not fit on a Portrait layout. the orientation of the report is automaticaltychanged to Landscape. If the table becomes too wide for even printed Landscape, the report is automatically split into multiple pages while printing. (The Layout Previewdisplaysthe report as a single, very wide page.) Multi-line style - the layout for all sub-reports is formed by placing a field's label in front of its value. If too many fields are selected for the report to fit on a single line. the first field that does not fit, with its label, is automatically moved to the next line. Consequently. the report can have several lines per record. Free form style - No automatic layout is generated for the report. This layout type allows you to use the Design Layout tab to create a layout manually. (However, fields that are no longer selected on the Field Selector 1st Will have no data when the report is run, although these fields still appear on the layout design. The layout retains the space occupied by the removed field, if any.) NOTE: If you select Tabularor Multi-line style and make any changes to the Layout Design, the editor automaticalty changes the Layout Style to Free form in the Layout Style field. Conversely, if you change the style from Free form to Tabular or Mult l-1Ine, any changes you made to the layout will be replaced with an automaticaltygenerated layout. Report Tab Tasks You use the Report tab to accomplish the tasks listed below, needed to configure a Report object. The procedural steps for each task are detailed in the following subsections. • Choosing a Report Type and Sub Type on Page 208 • Using the Class Selector on Page 208 • Using the Field Selector on Page 209 • Selecting Report Features on Page 210 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 207 EFTA01225492 Report Tab • Creating Sub-Reports on Page 211 Choosing a Report Type and Sub Type A Report must have a defined C•CURE 9000 object Report type and Sub type. Both Report type and Sub type determine the data fields that can be displayed on the report. Every Report type has a Basic Configuration Sub type. Example: If you want a report that displays information about Personnel, the Report type for the report must be Personnel. You can then select Basic Configuration, Audit log, or Journal as a Sub type. Selecting the Basic Configuration would allow you to report on all Personnel fields and the fields of its sub classes —Images, Personal Clearances, and Credential. You select the both the Report type/Sub type for a Report on the Report Editor Report tab. To Choose a Report Type and Sub Type 1. Create or modify a report. See Creating a Report on Page 191 or Modifying a Report on Page 202. 2. In the Report type field, click n to display a list of classes. 3. Click a Class in the list to select a Report type for your report. 4. In the Sub type field, click the down-arrow to display a list of the Sub types for the Class you selected for your Report type. 5. Click a Sub type in the list to select it for your Report. If you change the Report type/Sub type for a report, a dialog box appears asking you to confirm the NOTE change. If you click OK, any fields you previously selected from a different Report type/Sub type are removed from the report and the report's layout is changed accordingly. If you click Cancel, your Report type/Sub type selections are unchanged, and the fields and layout for your report are not affected. Using the Class Selector The Class selector allows you to choose the class and sub-classes for your report, and also to quickly select or clear the fields to include in your report. The Class selector displays a tree showing the Report type you have chosen for your report, as well as any sub- classes related to the selected type. Example: If you chose a Report type of Personnel, the Class Selector displays the Personnel class and the sub-classes related to Personnel —Credential, Images, and Personnel Clearance Pair. If you click O to select (El) the class or sub-class branches of the tree, you cause all the fields of that class or sub- class to appear selected in the Held selector, as well as all fields in its sub-classes (if there are any). If you click the class or sub-class name in the tree, you cause all fields of that class or sub-class to appear in the Field selector, but none of them are selected. You can then select 0) individual fields to appear in the report. 208 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225493 Report Tab Once you select a field for a class or sub-class in the Field selector, the Selected Schema, class, and NOTE any sub-class(es) higher in the Class selector hierarchy appear selected in the tree, with El next to their name. To Use the Class Selector 1. Create or modify a report. See Creating a Report on Page 191 or Modifying a Report on Page 202. 2. Choose a Class type for your report. 3. In the Class selector tree: • Select 0 a class or sub-class to select all fields of that class and all its sub-classes. • Click a class or sub-class name to display all the fields in that class or sub-class. You can then double-click individual fields in each class to select 0) them for inclusion in the report. Using the Field Selector The Field selector is blank until you choose a Report type for the report and then use the Class selector to add fields to the Report. To Use the Field Selector 1. From the Report tab, choose a Report type. 2. From the Class Selector, click the Class name; the fields for that class appear in the Held Selector. 3. In the Held Selector, choose the fields you want to appear in your report —either by clicking to select the field name and then clicking the name again, or by clicking 0 to the left of the field name. A 2 appears in the check box. When a field is highlighted, field information displays at the bottom of the Held selector. NOTE 4. To change the order in which fields appear on the report, click a field and then click A to move the field up or a to move the field down. The names of Report column headings that use Customer Fields do not automatically update if the NOTE Customer Field Label is changed after the Report is saved. To correct this: • If the Report's Layout style is Free form style, change the column headings manually. • If the Report's Layout style is either Tabular style or Multi-line style, not Free form style: 1. Open the Report. 2. Edit something on the Report tab and undo it (for example, select an additional field and then clear it, or change the layout style from Tabular style to Multi-line style and back). 3. Save and Close the Report. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 209 EFTA01225494 Report Tab Selecting Report Features You can select one or more of the following: Report form - to apply a layout design for report and page headers/footers to one or more Reports to give them a consistent appearance. Report query - to filter the data to be included in the report. Layout style - to apply an overall style of layout for the report. To Select a Report Form 1. From the Report tab Report form field, click to display a list of Report forms. 2. Click n to open a list of Report forms. 3. Click a Report Form in the list to select a Report form for your report. The layout of the Report form is merged with any layout you created with the Report Layout Design tab and already applied to your Report (as described in the note in Adding a Header or Footer on Page 223). To Select a Report Query 1. From the Report tab Report query field, click to display a list of available queries. 2. Click n to open a list of Report queries. If you select a query before you select a Report type, the list displays all the queries in the NOTE system. In this case, selecting a query also selects the appropriate Report type. On the other hand, if a Report type has already been selected, the system displays only queries for the selected type. 3. Click a query in the list to select a Report query for your report. 4. Select the Prompt for Query check box if you want the Query Parameters dialog box to open when the report is run. • If you have attached an existing Query to the report in the preceding field, when the Query Parameters dialog box opens, that Query is entered in the Predefined Query field. If the query is editable, you can change the criteria. You can also select another existing Query to run instead. • If there is no attached Query, the dialog box looks and behaves as for 'Instant Query'. You can then either specify criteria values on-the-fly or select a pre-existing report of the same Object type as the Report to filter the Report results. To Select a Layout Style ■ From thu Report tab Layout style field, select a layout style from the drop-down list. 210 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225495 Report Tab If you choose either the Tabular or Multi-line style, the system automatically generates a TIP design layout for the report when you save it. If you choose the Free form style, you have to create the layout yourself on the Report Editor Layout Design tab. You can, however, choose the Tabular or Multi-line styles and modify them for your needs. The system then changes the Layout style to Free form, as described in the following note. If you use the Layout Design tab to modify the report layout, NOTE C•CURE 9000 changes the Layout style to Free form style. If you then modify the report layout further and, in addition, change the layout style back to Tabular or Multi-line, a message warns you that your layout changes will be lost. Creating Sub-Reports Some C•CURE 9000 objects, such as Personnel, have parent/child relationships with other C•CURE 9000 objects. Example: A Personnel record contains a list (called a collection) of Clearances (a separate C•CURE 9000 object) assigned to that person. That collection of Clearances has a child relationship to the parent Personnel record. C•CURE 9000 lets you report on such complex data relationships by designing and creating sub-reports within a report. Using the Report Editor, you simply pick the parent/child objects from a tree structure and pick the fields from each object on which you want to report; The system automatically generates a layout that includes sub-reports for the objects you chose. Example: To Create a Report Listing All Personnel in the Database and Each of Their Assigned Clearances: 1. Create a new report a. Choose the Person's First and Last Name and Personnel Type from the Personnel fields. b. Select Personnel Clearance Pair as a child object. c. Select the Clearance Name field. 2. Run the report. The resulting report lists each person by name and personnel type, and under each person is a list of assigned clearances. If you choose Free-form as the layout style, the system no longer creates Sub-reports on the Layout NOTE Design tab automatically. In this case, you have to create Sub-reports manually, using the SubReport button on the Layout Design Toolbar. (For information, see Table 38 on Page 212.) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 211 EFTA01225496 Report Layout Design Tab Report Layout Design Tab The Layout Design tab, as shown in Figure 82 on Page 212, allows you to make advanced report layout adjustments to the formatting and appearance of your report. Figure 82: Report Editor Report Layout Design Tab • Report RepottPetst Off diary cedtboe Smite Coot Sow rotorrott Sitoreolort Pertim DIM Row t4C.aOU9 UralReam it At atl P \ lb. 12 MU.) PErEErrvi Pupate' I Ii: 10O PeiJindlE Repoe apexes ShtoPoono. T. Warw. = E PeotorooLGoxpyloodo WEEnrus1415 tem- WakeralPr PERSONNEL wooroiSo Balsevior E DOS itoPtoet 0 Pnivivs, 31 n4 SaplavErs Co B Delo Dothfrobo SollimareHeate 0.440•Ee Doto Dm. Woe:tots B Drys E.E0'1•1n EO TeoElnica Itoo B Min CrootorCto Lootopt Poo Wood,* Foto = E3 Peetortel_Gmtooloset - Foote. Report Editor Layout Design Tab Toolbar Definitions The toolbar on the Layout Design tab has the buttons described in Table 38 on Page 212. Table 38: Report Editor Layout Design Tab Toolbar Buttons Icon Meaning Description k Pointer Use this button to select objectson the Layout Design grid. Label To add a label to the report. dick this button and then dick and drag on the layout grid. You can use the Layout Design Ate Fields Properties tab to format the label. If you assign a field to the label, the field data isdisc•layed; otherwise, the text that you enter in the Text property isdisplayed. 212 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225497 Report Layout Design Tab Report Editor Layout Design Tab Toolbar Buttons (continued) Icon Meaning Description Textbox To insert a text box on the report, click this button and then click and drag on the layout grid. You can use the Layout abl Design Fields Properties tab to format the text box and assign a data field to it. Use the Data Field property to link the control to data in the database. Checkbox To add a check box to the report. click this button and then click and drag on the layout grid. You can use the Layout Design Fields Propert les tab to format the check box. and you can assign a boolean data field to it. (The check box then reflects the boolean value d the field you assign.) Use the Data Field property to link the control to data in the database. pc Ps,twe To add a picture to the report, click this button and then click and drag on the layout grd. You can use the Layout Design F!olds Propert les tab to choose the picture to insert. as well as a colored background or border. (This is useful, if you want to put a corporate logo in the report header.) Use the Data Field property to link the control to data in the database. or use the image property to insert an external image into the layout. NOTE: including Picture controls in the Detail area enlarges the size of the Report Result significantty. 0 Shape To draw a shape on the report. click this button and then click on the layout grid. You can use the Layout Design Fields Propert les tab to format the shape, choosing Rectangle. Ellipse, or RoundRect (a rectangle with rounded corners), for example. Line To draw a line on the report. click this button and then click on the layout grid. You can use the Layout Design Fields Propert les tab to format the line. Sp Rich Use this button to add a text box to the report. The text box can contain a data field from the report'sobject type. or it can Textbox contain a reference to an RTF (Rich Text Format) or HTML file. (The RTF or HTML file is embedded in the report.) Use the Data Field property to link the control to data in the database. or right-click the Rich Text box control and click Load the to embed an externaldocument. SubReport Click this button and draw a rectangle in the Detail section of the layout grid to open a SubReport dialog box. It lets you select an additional (child) table for the object type chosen for your report. NOTE: You onty need to do this. to create a Sub-report ma nualty. if you chose the Free-form layout style for the report on the Report Editor Report tab. If you chose the Tabular or Multi-line style. the Sub-report layout is created automaticalty. CAW V se,,,,„,,,,,,,,_,,.„,,., Cancel Example: Personnel has three child tables: Images, Credential, and Personnel Clearance Pair. You can choose one of these tables to add to the report as a Sub-report. When you add a Sub-report to your report, the Sub-report is added to the Class selector drop-down list and you can click ft from the list to display the SubReports Layout. NOTE: Cancelling out of the SubReport dialog box preventscreation of a new Sub-report. a Page To create a manual page break in the report at a particular position, click this button and then click and drag the pointer on lm Break the layout grid to the appropriate place in the design layout. C•CDRE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 213 EFTA01225498 Report Layout Design Tab Report Editor Layout Design Tab Toolbar Buttons (continued) Icon Meaning Description TO Barcode To add a bar code to the report, click this button and then dick and drag on the layout grid. You can use the Layout Design Fields Propert les tab to assign a data field to the bar code and specify the bar code format to be used, as well as whether or not to display a bar code caption. m Report Use this button to open the Report Settings dialog box, shown in Figure 85 on Page 219, where you can chooseoptions Settings related to the page setup. printer settings. styles, and global settings for your report. (For descriptions of these setting options. seeTable 43 on Page 220. Report Editor Layout Design Tab Grid Definitions The Layout Design Grid has the sections shown in Table 39 on Page 214, some of which do not appear unless you add them using the Right-click menu. You can add graphical objects and data fields to each of these sections of the report using the Layout Design Toolbar buttons shown in Table 38 on Page 212. Table 39: Report Editor Layout Design Tab Grid Sections Sections Description ReportHeader This section, if added, appears first in the report above the page header. Set the NewPage property to After if you want the Report Header to be on a separate page. PageHeader The page header appears at the top of every report page, bydefautt. In a Tabular style report, bydefautt, the page header contains labels for each of the fields you have chosen to be in your report—if a single top-level table is selected. In a Multi-line style report, the page header is empty. (The labels for each of the fields you have chosen to be in your report are in the Detail section, rather than in the page header.) This is also true for the Tabular style report if it contains Sub-reports. GroupHeader A Group Header (if added) appears at the beginning of each group of data that you define in the report. NOTE: Adding a Group Header might requite selecting a field to group on from the Data Field property on the Propert les tab (Data section). Detail The Detail section contains the fields that you have designated as appearing in this report. In a Multi-line style report. the labels for each of the fields are included in the Detail section rather than in the page header. GroupFooter A Group Footer (if added) appears at the end of each group of data that you define in the report. PageFooter The page footer appears at the bottom of every report page by dela utt. ReportFooter This section. if added, appears last in the report below the page footer for the final page. Set the NewPage property to Before if you want the Report Header to be on a separate page. Report Editor Layout Design Tab Properties Sheet Definitions The Layout Design Properties Sheet lets you modify the properties of objects on the Layout Design Grid. The properties sheet has the fields and tabs shown in Table 40. 214 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225499 Report Layout Design Tab Table 40: Report Editor Layout Design Tab Properties Sheet Fields/Tabs Fields/1-abs Description Class Thisdrop-down list on the Layout Design tab. shown in the example below, shows the available Report and SubReport Layouts Selector used as parts of the Report Layout. Each item in the list is a Report or SubReport layout that was selected on the Report tab. Drop-down List p< crei €. ,.. - Perscerti Cosine° Pa • C.I4enbli When you select an item in the drop-down list. the layout for that Report or SubReport is loaded into the Layout Design Grid. It also changes the list of available properties in the Propert les tab and Fields tab so it shows the properties related to that Report or SubReport. To be invoked, each SubReport layout must be linked to a SubReport controlon a parent report layout. (For details, see the SubReport icon description in Table 38 on Page 212.) Double-clicking a rectangle of a SubReport control in the Layout Design Grid of a parent report is equivalent to selecting the linked SubReport layout in this drop-down list. Proper ties The Propert les tab on the right contains a grid control that allows you to modify the properties of an object currently selected on Tab the layout. The tab has a drop-down list attached to the top of the properties grid that contains all elements placed on the layout. Selecting an item in this list selects the related control in the designer area. Clicking a controlon the layout changes the selection in this list. NOTE: Each Report section has its own properties as well. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 215 EFTA01225500 Report Layout Design Tab Report Editor Layout Design Tab Properties Sheet Fields/Tabs (continued) Fieldsfrabs Description Fields Tab The Fields tab provides a fist of all the fields that have been selected on the Report tab. The Fields tab has three sections: the Report Contents section, the Fields section, and the Parameters section. t Li Repoli :7 Fields e - Petemeted Li. Seems The Report Contents section includes an expandable tree and provides an alternative way to select sections, fields, and other controls for the report layout. a Pege_Hemlee o Penned Geoc_Hosite as = Cielill = Fisecreiel_Grove_Foolee ''' Perimece The Fields section lists all the fields selected for the report from the Report tab. For each field, by default, there is a label in the PageHeader or Detail section and an actual field value in the Detail section. This is also reflected in the report layout grid, which shows the actual arrangement of the labels and fields as they would appear on a printed report. r.: Bond IT, tame II APSEvent [[ eateeeel IL Ira LL 1n2 iu: Cdoi*d You can select a field from the Fields list and drag it onto the layout area with the mouse. It creates a new control on the layout linked to the dropped field. Only the fieldsof the object selected on the Report tab are available on the Fields list. The Parameters section includes some pre-defined elements, such as Report Name and Operator, that are assigned when the Report isgenerated. -.. -r. On V Remotion: V OPOS4 V ROWDY< V Road/same Sort Tab The Sort tab allows you to add sorting criteria to the report: identifying fields to sort on and setting the sort order for these fields. NOTE: Only fieldsselected on the Report tab can be sorted, but these fieldsdo not have to appear on the Layout Design tab. Example: If you want the output for a Personnel report to be sorted by Last Name in ascending order: 1. ClickAdd. 2. Select a Field from the drop-down list On this case, LastName), and then select a Sort Order. Ascend order, in this case. - To add additional Sort fields, click Add again. - To delete a Sort field, click the row selector and then click Remove. - To move a field up in the soft order. click Up. - To move a field down in the sort order. click Down. 216 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225501 Report Layout Design Tab Report Editor Layout Design Tab Context Menu Definitions The Right-click context menu lets you add and remove report layout features, such as headers and footers, to the report. The selections on the menu depend on the item that you selected in the Report Layout grid. If you select a report element such as a header or footer, the selections described in Table 41 on Page 217 appear on the menu. Table 41: Report Editor Layout Design Tab Context Menu Options Menu Selection Description Insert>insert Inserts a Report Header and Footer into the Report Layout. You can then add objectsand formatting to the header and Report tooter. (This selection is unavaiable if the report already has a Report Header/Footer.) Header/Footer Insert>Insert Page Inserts a Page Header and Footer into the Report Layout. You can then add objects and formatting to the header and Header/Footer tooter. (This selection is unavaiable if the report already has a Page Header/Footer.) Insert>Insert Group Inserts a Group Header and Footer into the Report Layout. You can then add objects and formatting to the header and Header/Footer tooter. (You can add more than one Group header and footer to a report.) Reorder Groups Opens the Group Order dialog box where you can change the order of the Groups in the report. (See Figure 83 on Page 218.) Paste Pastes the contents of the paste buffer onto the report layout. Delete Deletes the selected object from the report layout. If you select a Report object such as a field, label, or graphical element, the additional selections described in Table 42 on Page 217 appear on the menu. Table 42: Report Editor Layout Design Tab Context Menu Additional Options Menu Description Selection Cut Cuts the selected object from the report layout and saves it n the paste buffer. Copy Copies the selected object from the report layout and saves it in the paste buffer. Bring to Front Moves the selected object in front of other objects. Send to Back Moves the selected object behind other objects. Format Border Opens the Format Border dialog box where you can change the formatting of the objects border. (See Figure 84 on Page 218.) Properties Switches to the Properties tab. Group Order Dialog Box If you select Reorder Groups from the Right-click context menu, this dialog box, shown in Figure 83 on Page 218, appears. It displays the Groups you created on the Report Layout and allows you to change the order in which the groups appear in the report by clicking and dragging any group(s). C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 217 EFTA01225502 Report Layout Design Tab Figure 83: Group Order Dialog Box Once you are satisfied with the arrangement of the Groups, click OK to make the changes. Or you can click Cancel to discard any changes you have made. Format Border Dialog Box If you select Format Border from the Right-click context menu, this dialog box, shown in Figure 84 on Page 218, appears. It includes a variety of preset borders and line styles that you can choose. You can also choose a line color from a drop-down color list. Figure 84: Format Border Dialog Box ormat [for An Act, Itrpotty Stylei Previte/ CS* co done Stant tee presets tooil talets JJ i!g o A Preview area shows you the borders that are currently applied. To Use a Preset Border: • Select a color for the border and then click one of the preset borders. That border is applied to the Preview. To Use a Custom Line Style: 1. Select a color for the line style and then click one of the custom line styles. 2. Click the border in the Preview to which you want to apply the line style. The line style you select is applied to the Preview border that you clicked. 218 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225503 Report Layout Desgn Tab Report Page Settings The Report Page Settings dialog box, shown in Figure 85 on Page 219, Figure 86 on Page 219, Figure 87 on Page 220, and Figure 88 on Page 220 lets you specify four types of settings for your report, as described in Table 43 on Page 220. Flgure 85: Report Page Settings Dialog Box- Page Setup Report Setongs Tee ."4, 9e tC Bna, nor9n 0W owl mow I 03 %St sane 0504-, a CLookeo OW4.2 Hew mopes C, a OK Can., FIgure 86: Report Page Settings Dialog Box- Printer Settings Report Settings Pore Sot lime °dal MoS. fl ora{ ottle Seat* Norio 850 arson 011aut a Poem . • to.. larenpo • 1.•••••PO OAS 0818a Oopita Pis Oslo/ POW SCutte [SteOda •I OK Cad C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 219 EFTA01225504 Report Layout Design Tab Figure 87: Report Page Settings Dialog Box- Styles Report Settogs Grl:fl Forcssene Hoadell KiddrI2 Fceisce HeadreP Bob Fete HEW:WO 'talc Feb* Wade* feM StAteely0.01 hist Paclitks !Ian) • [-B e' Fatela -I Eaatsbies taw_ I Anceol Ahoweem .I r itstalgola i — Say, Myna ice LIN Camel Figure 88: Report Page Settings Dialog Box- Global Settings i lia. Mob Wee • 9MOJW3 Sap ',God e Shea Gni Oen Sat, a ON Cane 6 Gnd Ross nne seeing, ere.Us Pion% P. Wes [ht Rees p_ )D OS Table 43: Report Page Settings Dialog Box Fields Fields Description Page Setup settings - control the report margins (For each setting. he Preview picture to the right changes to show the settings vtsually) Top Margin Bottom Margin Adjust by scrolling up or down through the numeric values or by typing in a number. Left Margin Right Margin Gutter 220 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225505 Report Layout Design Tab Report Page Settings Dialog Box Fields (continued) Fields Description Mirror Margins The right and left margins and the gutter can be set to be mirrored on successive pages. The first page has a right gutter and margin, while the second page has a left gutter and margin of the same width. Printer settings — control printer parameters: page orientation, duplex printing, paper source Paper Size Choose a paper size from this drop-down list. Width Adjust the width of the paper for some paper size selections. Use the up/down arrows. or type in a value. Some paper sizes (such as Letter and Legal) do not allow the width to be adjusted. Height Adjust the height of the paper for some paper size selections. Use the up/down arrows. or type in a value. Some paper sizes (such as Letter and Legal) do not allow the height to be adjusted. Orientation Select Default. Portrait. or Landscape for the paper orientation. The Preview picture changes to match your selection. NOTE: Creating a Tabular report layout for a Report with a significant number of selected fields automatically changes the page orientation to Landscape. In this case, you must use Fres form layout to force Portrait page orientation. Collate Choose Printer Default. Collate. or Don't Collate to determine how the printer handles collating the report. Typically, multiple copies of a collated report print in order 1.2.3...1.2,3, whereas a non-collated report prints 1,1,2,2,3,3. Duplex Choose Printer Default. Simplex. Horizontal. or Vertical to determine how the printer handles duplex (two-sided) printing. This setting has no effect if the printer does not support duplex printing. Paper Source Choose a value for Paper Source from the list. Not all printers ca n support every paper source in the list. See your printer manual for more information on the paper sources your printer supports. Styles settings — let you format the report text for data and headings Text Style Click a text style to select it. The values of the text style settings to the right of this list change to reflect the style you choose. The default text styles are Normal. Heading1. Heading2. Heading3. and Heading4. NOTE: To apply the Styles, select a field on the layout and change its property Class Name on the Properties Sheet (Data Section) to the valid style name Example: Select Last Name and enter Normal for the Class Name. New Click this button to create a new text style. A Create New StyledLalog box appears to let you enter a name for the style. and to optionally choose another style on which to base the new style. Click OK and the new style is added to the list of text styles. Export styles to You can save your Styles settings to a reportsettings file, and then import those style settings into other reports. This makes it file easier to set up custom styles and use them in multiple reports. To use this feature, customize your style settings (font, color, size, etc.) then click Export styles to file. Type a file name in the Save As dialog box that appears and click Save. Import styles You can import Style settings that you have saved using Export styles to file. This allows you to define custom style settings from file once and use them for multiple reports. Click import styles from file. select a reportstyle file from the Open dialog box that appears, and click Open. Importing styles from a file everwrites whatever style setting arecurrentlyselected. Delete Click this button to delete a text style from the list of text styles. You cannot delete the Normal style. Font Name Use thisdrop-down list to set the font for text. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 221 EFTA01225506 Report Layout Design Tab Report Page Settings Dialog Box F abs (continued) Fields Description Font Size Use this drop-down list to set the size for text. You can choose a value from the list or type in a value. Bold Select thischeck box to display te)d with the bold property. or clear this checkbox to turn off bold. Italic Select thischeck box to display text with the Italic property. or clear thischeckbox to turn off Italic. Underline Select this check box to display text with the underline property, or clear this checkbox to turn off underline. Strikethrough Select this check box to display text with the strikethrough property. or clear this checkbox to turn off strikethrough. BackCobr Use this drop-down box to set the color for the background of objects. (You can change the color for individuaIobject background by using the objects properties tab.) ForeColor Use thisdrop-down box to set the color for the text in objects. (You can change the color for individual text objects by using the objectspropertiestab.) Horizontal Use this drop-down list to decide whether you want text within an object to be aligned to Left. Center. Right. or Justify. Alignment Vertical Use this drop-down list to decide whether you want text within an object to be aligned to the Top. Middle. or Bottom edge. Alignment Script Use thisdrop-down list to set the script type for the text: Cyrillic. Arabic. Hebrew. Vietnamese. Central European. Greek. Balt lc. Turkish. or Western. Global settings - control the report layout grid size and usage Layout Mode You can select a layout mode for your reports that determines how controls are placed on the report in the report designer. SnapIInes - (the default setting) allow you to gbde your controls treaty instead of snapping to a grid. Blue horizontal and vertical lines appear to help you align your control with other controlsor section edges. Snap to Grid -causescontrols that you move to 'snap' to the report grid - align to the nearest gridpoint. None - allows you to treaty move your controls, but does not provide any alignment adjustments. Show Grid Select this check box to display a grid on the Report Layout Design tab. Clear this check boxdisplay the Report Layout Design tab without a grid. Show Delete Select this check box to have a warning prompt appear when you try to delete a parameter or calculated field from the Report Prompt Explorer Fields tab. Grid Columns Click the up or down arrows (or type in a number) to set the number of grid columns between 1 and 100. Grid Rows Click the up or down arrows (or type in a number) to set the number of grid rows between 1 and 100. Ruler Units Use thisdrop-down list to choose between displaying the Report Layout Design grid in inches or Centimeters. Preview Pages This parameter isnot used by C•CURE 9000. 222 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225507 Report Layout Design Tab Tasks Report Layout Design Tab Tasks You configure a layout for a Report object on the Report Layout Design tab, shown in Figure 82 on Page 212, by performing the listed tasks: ■ Adding a Field to the Layout on Page 223 ■ Adding a Header or Footer on Page 223 ■ Adjusting the Report Settings on Page 224 ■ Adding a Page Break on Page 224 ■ Adding a Text Box, Picture, Shape, or Line on Page 225 If you are creating a new report with report type, subtype, and fields already selected and NOTE Free form as the Layout style, when you view it on the Layout Design tab, the report will be blank. The Free form style requires you to create the layout yourself. Adding a Field to the Layout You can add a field to a Report Layout —controlling many aspects of its final appearance (color, size, etc.)—and also create a label for the field. To Add a Field to the Layout 1. On the Report Layout Design tab, click the Properties sheet Fields tab. 2. To place a field on the layout Design Grid, select a field in the Fields list and drag and drop it in the Grid Detail section.To re-position it, select and drag or use the up/down/left/right arrow keys. Only fields selected on the Report Editor Report tab appear in the Fields list. NOTE 3. To change the field's appearance, color, size, etc. in the report, click the Properties tab. 4. To add a label to the page header to match the field you added. a. Click AN to move the mouse pointer to the layout Design Grid. The pointer changes to a crosshair (+). b. Drag the pointer to create a box for the label. c. Select the label and use the Properties tab to match the label to the field you added by selecting the Held from the drop-down list for the DataField property. That field name will print on the label in the report. Adding a Header or Footer You can add three levels of headers and footers to a report. The Header and Footer are added as a pair. You can then add objects such as lines, graphics, text boxes, and fields to the Header or Footer. ■ Report Header and Footer ■ Page Header and Footer ■ Group Headers and Footers (you can have multiple groups in a report) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 223 EFTA01225508 Report Layout Desgn Tab Tasks If you use a Report Form for your report (for information, see Report Form Editor on Page 230), the NOTE headers/footers from the selected Report Form are merged with the headers/footers you choose on the Layout Design tab. In this merge, the Report Form header displays above the Layout Design header as one header in the final report. The converse applies to the footers: the Report Form footer displays below the Layout Design footer as one footer in the final report. To Add a Header or Footer to the Layout 1. On the Report Layout Design tab, right-click in the Layout Design Grid. 2. Use the Insert selection on the context menu to add a header and footer pair at any level. • Insert>Insert Report Header/Footer • Insert>Insert Page Header/Footer • Insert>Insert Group Header/Footer 3. To add objects from the toolbar or the fields list to the Header or Footer for the report, page, or group, click the field or button and place the object in the Header or Footer area on the grid. Adjusting the Report Settings You can change the Report settings for Page Setup, Printer Settings, Styles, and Global Settings by clicking the loolbar Report Settings button Ili . "MI To Adjust the Report Settings 1. On the Report Layout Design tab, click III in the Layout Design Toolbar or double-click Settings on the Fields tab. 2. The Report Settings dialog box, shown in Report Form Layout Design Tab on Page 231, appears. Click: • Page Setup to adjust the report margins and gutter. • Printer Settings to set paper size, page orientation, paper source, and other printer settings. • Styles to modify the font and color characteristics of text and headings in the report. • Global Settings to specify the design grid size and visibility. For more information on the options available, see Report Page Settings on Page 219. Each Sub Report has its own report settings, but some settings from the top-level Report can override NOTE those settings. Adding a Page Break To Add a Page Break lJ I . On the Report Layout Design tab, click e in the Layout Design Toolbar. 224 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225509 Report Layout Desgn Tab Tasks 2. Move the pointer to the Layout Design Grid. The pointer changes to a crosshair (+). 3. Drag the pointer to create a box for the Page Break 4. Select the Page Break object and use the Properties tab to change any settings as needed. Adding a Text Box, Picture, Shape, or Line To Add a Text Box. Picture, Shape. or Line On tin' Report tab Report Layout Design tab, click one of the following buttons in the Layout Design Toolbar. AEI to add a label. abl to add a Text box. • 17 to add a Check box. ' • E to add a Picture. 0 to add a Shape (rectangle, ellipse, or rounded rectangle). • \ to add a Line. Elm • grA to add a Rich Text box. • t to add a SubReport. 31[E to add a Barcode. 2. Move the pointer to the layout Design Grid. The pointer changes to a crosshair (+). 3. Drag the pointer to create a box for the object. 4. Select the object and use the Properties tab to change any settings for fields from each object on which you want to report; C•CURE 9000 Reports then automatically generates a layout that includes sub-reports for the objects you have chosen. Most of the controls have a Data Held property for linking the control's value with data retrieved TIP from the database. The property allows you to select a field name from a list of available fields on this report. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 225 EFTA01225510 Report Layout Preview Tab Report Layout Preview Tab The Report Layout Preview tab, as shown in Figure 89 on Page 226, gives you a visual approximation of the way your actual report will appear, based on sample data representing your schema and the report layout you chose. If you are creating a new report with report type, subtype, and fields already selected and NOTE the Layout style, Free form, when you view it on the Layout Design tab, the report will be blank. The Free form style requires you to create the layout yourself on the Report Layout Design tab. Figure 89: Report Editor Report Layout Preview Tab h.p. • 143••••••<••• P..‘art kesPal k.••••••• osa se " CI" is . . • a 3 0 - 0Urten , ' PE PSOMMt eassaoLaaaadat Cetead %en 40.• •10.10.0aftn• AnwPisei 0.1041..• 0* 00.0 4 . awe w. IP waciewmas 0 trope teri80030•1 1 • tenger., Ontacsea I at= rr Airs Its• /al. we. Aen•Cia• OM • WM SAP PM lab "ow* %ono nein. •ditiX•q•MPIS 0•004••••••••• Oil a The sample data in the report preview shows you where the actual data will be positioned when you run the report. The buttons on the Layout Preview Toolbar, shown in Table 44 on Page 227, let you browse through the report preview, print it, search it, and copy data from it. Use these icons to examine the report and determine if the layout is formatting it as you expected. In that way, when you run the report, you will get the results you want. By default, the Layout Preview of the report opens at 100% zoom, but you can change the magnification. (The example in Figure 89 on Page 226 is displayed at 65%.) If you double-click the body of the report, the view shifts to a thumbnail view. You can also open a Table of Contents pane by clicking al and view either a Table of Contents or a Thumbnail in this pane. 228 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225511 Report Layout Preview Tab Table 44: Report Editor Layout Preview Tab Toolbar Buttons Icon Meaning Description Table of Click this button to open either a pane with a Table of Contents tab that lists the sections of the report or a Co Contents Thumbnail View tab that shows a reduced size image of the report pages. Click either tab to toggle the view. Print Click this button to print a copy of the Report Layout Preview with the sample data as it is d splayed on ...S Nit.. screen. This allows you to check your printed output for the desired result. Copy Click this button to copy the content of the Report Layout Preview into theclipboard. You can then paste I LZ3 the content into another application, such as Word or Notepad. Find Click this button to open a Windows find dialog box to search through the preview data for a text string. X Single Click this button to return to a Single Page View after clicking either Multiple Page View or Continuous Di Page View Soot (The tab opens in Single Page View initially, by default.) ca Multiple Click this button to choose how many pages to view in the Layout Preview tab at a time. A sub-menu co Page View opens to allow you to chose from page views from 1x1 to 2x3. Continuous Click this button to view the report as one oontinuous document, using the scrollbar or Page Up/Down keys Scroll to navigate the report. While page breaks in the report are visible, you can scroll past them (which you cannot do in single page view). The Current Page controls updated as you scrollthrough the report. Zoom Out Click this button to zoom out (make the zoom percentage lower). The percentage becomes 10% less each I g• time you click the button. (The minimum view is 10%.) Zoom In Click this button to zoom in (make the zoom percentage higher). The percentage becomes 50% more each Qn. time you click the button. (The maximum view is 800%.) Zoom Choose a value from the drop-down box or type in a percentage to zoom the preview in or out. (The TZ:. v Percentage minimum value is the maximum value is 800%. Two specialvalues, Page Width and Whole Page, allow you to calculate the scale based on the current page size.) Previous Click these buttons to navigate to the next or previous pages of a multiple-page report. P PI I Page Next Page Current Shows the current page being displayed in a multiple-page report preview. Change the number in the box . 1/5 Page and press Enter to move to the specified page of the report. I ,".:.:, aeckwom Backward Click to go backward one page in the historical list of previewed pages. Forward Click to go forward one page in the historical list of previewed pages. CY) Folnard C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 227 EFTA01225512 Report Layout Preview Tab Report Editor Layout Preview Tab Toolbar Buttons (continued) Icon Meaning Description Annotation Click to add a note to the Report. The available note types display: Id 32 0 m iETIP r Text. Cade, Rectangle. Arrow. Baton, and Line annotation. (Annotationsadded to the Layout Preview tab are not saved. They are saved only on the Report Viewer. See Report/Report Result Viewers on Page 245. Report Layout Preview Tab Tasks ■ Viewing a Report Preview on Page 228 ■ Printing a Report Preview on Page 228 Viewing a Report Preview You can view a report preview from either the Report Editor Layout Preview tab, shown in Figure 89 on Page 226, or the Report Form Editor Layout Preview tab, shown in Figure 91 on Page 236. A report preview uses sample data to show how your report will appear when you finally run it. The sample data represents the schema and format you have chosen for your report. To View a Report Preview 1. From the Report Editor or the Report Form Editor, click the Layout Preview tab. 2. A preview of your report appears with sample data (such as FirstName 0, FirstName 1 if your schema includes the FirstName field) showing you how the report information will appear in your report format. 3. The Layout Preview Toolbar provides access to the report preview, letting you print and copy data, scroll through, search, and zoom your report. See Table 44 on Page 227 for more information. You can also return to the Layout Design tabor Report tab„ make changes, and then click the Layout Preview tab again to see how the changes affected your report format. Printing a Report Preview You can print a report preview from either the Report Editor Layout Preview tab or the Report Form Editor Layout Preview tab. A report preview uses sample data to show how your report will appear when you finally run it. The sample data represents the schema and format you have chosen for your report. 228 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225513 Report Layout Preview Tab To Print a Report Preview 1. From the Report Editor or the Report Form Editor, click the Layout Preview tab. 2. A preview of your report appears with sample data (such as FirstName 0, FirstName 1 if your schema includes the FirstName field) showing you how the report information will appear in your report format. 3. Click Print on the Layout Preview Toolbar to print a copy of the report. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 229 EFTA01225514 Report Form Editor Report Form Editor The Report Form Editor in C•CURE 9000 lets you create Report Forms to use with C•CURE 9000 Report objects. A Report Form is a placeholder for a report layout with report header/footer and page header/footer information and predefined paragraph styles. You can design a Report Form and use it with multiple reports so your reports have a consistent appearance. A Report Form can be used with any Report object. The Report Form's layout parameters are appended to a report's layout to form the final output that you can display or print. This allows you to change the look and feel of an existing report, without editing the report layout itself, by electing to run it with a different Report Form. Styles defined by a Report Form override the styles of the same name defined in the Reports. Consequently, using different forms with the same Report can potentially modify the size, color, font, and other attributes of the labels and fields in the generated Report Result. Two predefined Report Forms are also provided for your use (for information, see Pre-defined Report Forms). The Report Form Editor has the following tabs: ■ Report Form Layout Design Tab on Page 231 ■ Report Form Layout Preview Tab on Page 236 See Report Form layout Design Tab Tasks on Page 235 for a list of the tasks you can perform with the Report Form Editor. Pre-defined Report Forms C•CURE 9000 provides two pre-defined Report Forms for your use: the Default form and the Advanced form. Both forms include: ■ Page Headers that print the C•CURE 9000 logo in the upper left of the report page and the Report Name in the upper right. ■ Page footers that print the date of the report, the name of the operator who ran the report, and the page number across the bottom of each report page. The only difference between them is as follows: ■ In the Default form, the page numbers simply display as Page 1,2, 3,....n. ■ In the Advanced form, the page numbers display as Page 1 of x, 2 of x,...n of x (where x = the total number of pages in the report). Using the Advanced form slows report execution since the total page count has to be NOTE calculated in the beginning. You can use these system-supplied Report Forms to format your reports as you would use any Report Form you created yourself. You can create copies of the form with the Create Copy button and then edit them, but you cannot delete the original pre-defined form. For more information, see Creating a Copy of a Report Form on Page 233. You access the predefined Report Fonns from the Dynamic View list of Report Forms. For more information, see Viewing a List of Report Fonns on Page 234. 230 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide EFTA01225515 Report Form Layout Desgn Tab Report Form Layout Design Tab The Report Form Layout Design tab, as shown in Figure 90 on Page 231, lets you create the layout for your Report Form. The Report Form Layout Design tab is similar to the Report Editor Layout Design tab, except that you cannot add fields for an object. Instead, a Report Form is used only to define the overall layout of the headers/footers for a report. The Report Form can then be applied to multiple reports to give them a uniform appearance, regardless of the object data appearing in the report. Figure 90: Report Form Editor Layout Design Tab • RiMorl 'tom y; ...am. :t19.aar Sa I L•ntaa:: it a a G E0 \ %ROM I . . . . . . 4 o El Mame ilaen rya fra.1 '..'senan, Caws Ce Bays B PM. 44 44C4 Dea Report Form Layout Design Tab Definitions [he Report Form Editor fields/buttons are fundamentally the same as the Report Editor fields/buttons for the Report Layout Design and Report Layout Preview tabs. For detailed information see the following: • Report Editor layout Design Tab Toolbar Definitions on Page 212 • Report Editor layout Design Tab Grid Definitions on Page 214 • Report Editor layout Design Tab Properties Sheet Definitions on Page 214 • Report Editor Layout Design Tab Context Menu Definitions on Page 217 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 231 EFTA01225516 Report Form Editor Tasks Report Form Editor Tasks ■ Creating a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 ■ Creating a Report Form Template on Page 232 ■ Creating a Copy of a Report Form on Page 233 ■ Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20 ■ Using a Report Form to Format a Report on Page 234 ■ Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19 Creating a Report Form You can create a new Report Form using the Report Form Editor. You can also use either of the two system-supplied pre-defined report forms, accessed from the Report Form Dynamic View list, with the Create Copy button as the basis for your Report Forms. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Report Form on Page 233. To Create a Report Form 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click the Data Views pane button . 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report Form. 3. Click New to create a new Report form. The Report Form Editor opens. (For examples of the Report Form Editor and its tabs, see Figure 90 on Page 231 and Figure 91 on Page 236.) 4. You can now configure the Report Form, designing a layout for the report 5. To save your new Report Form, click Save and Close. -or - Alternatively, if you want to create a new Report Form as a copy of the existing Report Form, click Create Copy. For information, see Creating a Copy of a Report Form on Page 233. Creating a Report Form Template You can create a Report Form template that can then serve as the basis of new Report Forms. In a template, you can enter values so they are the same for all Report Forms, and you can then use the template when you are creating new Report Forms. Example: You could create a template for all Report Fonns for reports of a certain type that includes the same corporate logo, headers, and footers. Then whenever you were creating a new report of this type, you would save time by creating the new report from the Report Form template, instead of the default blank Report Form. To Create a Report Form Template I . In tin• Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 232 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225517 Report Form Editor Tasks 2. Select Report Form from the Data View pane drop-down list. 3. To create a new Report Form template, click the down-arrow on the New button and click Template. The Report Form Editor, where you can configure the Report Form, opens. 4. In the Name field, enter the name you wish to use for the template ("Report Template", for example). 5. To save your new Report Form template, click Save and Close. Creating a Copy of a Report Form You can create a copy of a Report Form, using it as a blueprint for a new Report Form. Any values configured in the existing Report Form are copied for the new Report Form —only the Name field is blank. You can also use either the system-supplied pre-defined Default form or Advanced form on the Report Form Dynamic View list as the basis of a copy of a Report Form. To Create a Copy of a Report Form 1. Create/modify a Report Form on the Report Form Editor. (For information, see Creating a Report Form on Page 232.) 2. Click Create Copy. The warning message "save original before creating a copy?" appears if the Report Form was modified in the editor. Warning: Changes will be lost lx awe orgrni terve cream a eesae to Camel • Click Yes to save the existing Report Form and open a copy on the Report Form Editor. • Click No to open a copy on the Report Form Editor without saving the existing Report Form. • Click Cancel to return to the Report Form Editor without creating a copy. If you clicked either Yes or No, the Report Form Editor re-appears with a copy of the Report Form displayed and the Name field blank. \ l odify the Report Form to your liking and then click Save and Close. To Create a Copy of a Pre-defined Report Form 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Report Form from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click a.,to open a Dynamic View listing all Report Forms. (You can also click the down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view). 4. Right-click either of the pre-defined report forms, the Default form or the Advanced form, and click Edit from the context menu that appears. The Report Form Editor opens with the pre-defined form. 5. Click Create Copy. C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter 6 233 EFTA01225518 Report Form Editor Tasks The Report Form Editor re-appears with a copy of the pre-defined form displayed and the Name field blank. 6. Modify the Report Form to your liking and then click Save and Close. Viewing a List of Report Forms You can display a list of the Report Fonns you have created by opening a Dynamic View of Report Fonns. See Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20. The list also includes the two system-supplied pre-defined Report Fonns: Default form and Advanced form. Report Form List Context Menu The context menu that opens when you right-click a Report Form in the Report Form Dynamic View includes the selections described in Data Views Object Context Menu on Page 20. (Double-clicking a Report Form in the list opens it on the Report Form Editor, as though you clicked Edit in the Context menu.) Using a Report Form to Format a Report You can use a Report Form as the layout design for one or more Reports to give your Reports a consistent appearance. To Use a Report Form 1. Create or modify a report using the Report Editor. (For information, see Creating a Report on Page 191 or Modifying a Report on Page 202.) 2. In the Report tab Report Features area, click n to select a Report Form from the dialog box that appears. 3. Click the Layout Preview tab to preview the Report with the Report Form applied it. 4. To save your Report with the Report Form, click Save and Close. - or - Create Copy. 234 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225519 Report Form Layout Design Tab Tasks Report Form Layout Design Tab Tasks You use the Report Form Layout Design tab to perform the tasks in the following list and configure a layout for a Report Form object. Since the tasks are similar to those performed on the Report Editor Layout Design tab, with the exception of adding fields for an object, refer to the appropriate listed sections: ■ Adding a Field to the Layout on Page 223 ■ Adding a Header or Footer on Page 223 ■ Adjusting the Report Settings on Page 224. ■ Adding a Page Break on Page 224. ■ Adding a Text Box, Picture, Shape, or Line on Page 225. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 235 EFTA01225520 Report Form Layout Preview Tab Report Form Layout Preview Tab Use the Report Form Layout Preview tab (see Figure 91 on Page 236) to view a visual example of a Report Form's appearance, based on your report form design. The Report Form Layout Preview tab is similar to the Report Editor Layout Preview tab, except you cannot view an object's fields. (A Report Form only defines the overall layout of a reports headers/footers. You can then apply the form to multiple reports to give them a uniform appearance, regardless of the object data in the report.) For information, especially for definitions of the screen elements, see the Report Layout Preview Tab on Page 226 and Table 44 on Page 227. Figure 91: -Report Form Editor Preview Tab gleial•n Own,IntedialnYI peeu• Lmant-ern.. n.or, [:, CDT ChAbbdill co P.m " C-CIJRIVOre. RtPtct Name 236 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225521 Report Form Viewer Report Form Viewer The Report Form Viewer is used to view and print Report Forms. You can view a Report Form by selecting a Report Form from a Dynamic View list of Report Forms and then opening it in the Report Form Viewer, shown in Figure 92 on Page 237. Figure 92: ReportFormViewer To View a Report Form 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Data Views to open the Data Views pane. 2. Select Report Form from the Data Views pane drop-down list. 3. Click jam to open a Dynamic View listing all Report Forms. (You can also click the down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or to open a new tabbed view). 4. Right-click a Report Form in the list to open the Report Form Context menu. 5. Take one of the following actions: • Click View to view the Report Form in a new tab in the Content Area. • Click Popup View to view the Report Form in a separate popup window. • Click View in Current Tab to view the Report Form in the current Content Area (replacing the dynamic view list of Report Forms). For information, especially for definitions of the screen elements, see the Report Layout Preview Tab on Page 226 and Table 44 on Page 227. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 237 EFTA01225522 Report Result Overview Report Result Overview A Report Result is used to store a completed report as a document and includes both the report query and the set of report parameters used to generate the completed report. You create a Report Result by running a Report. When a report is run, you can save the generated view as a new Report Result object. You can then keep the report result as long as it is needed, and delete it when it is no longer useful. A Report Result is also generated when a Report is executed by a scheduled action. (In this case, the action can be configured to delete the Report Result automatically after a specified period of time.) When a Report is run on the server (whether manually or automatically), the finished report is added to the list of Report Results. You can view this list as a Dynamic view. You can then use the Report Result Context menu, as shown in Figure 77 on Page 198, to edit, view, delete, or export the Report Result. (For descriptions of the menu options, see Viewing a List of Report Results on Page 242.) 238 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225523 Report Result Editor Report Result Editor The Report Result Editor lets you view information about the report, such as when it was run, and what Query (if any) was used to generate the report. The Report Editor has the following tabs • Report Result Result Tab on Page 239 • Report Result Query Tab on Page 240 The Report Result Editor has the buttons described in Table 45 on Page 239. Table 45: Report Result Editor Buttons Button Description Save and Click this button when you have completed any changes to the Report Result and wish to save those changes. The Report Result Close closes. Click this button when you want to dose the Report Result Editor without saving your changes. •X A warning appears asking whether or not you want to save your changes before dosing the editor. Click Yea to exit and save and No to exit and cancel your changes. Report Result Result Tab the Report Result Result tab, as shown in Figure 93 on Page 239, gives you the information about the Report Result described in Table 46. F ig u re 93: Report Result Editor Result Tab SYMI1 • STAR Cartels Rep* Cotaislce, 5/1/2CO3 8 58 AN $41us Corrobled(1O1%) Paw 1oil Tad SecSKa15313DOHI The Report Result Result tab has the fields described in 'Fable 46. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 239 EFTA01225524 Report Result Editor Table 46: Report Result Editor Result Tab Fields Fields Description Name The name of the Report. Description A textual description of the Report. This field isnot required, but if used can make it easier to identify the specific Report Result you wish to edit. General Info Created on The date on which the Report that created this Report Result was run. (A read-onty. system-supplied value.) Status State of Report Result: Completed. Canceled. Failed. NOTE: A Report result stopped because it reached the maximum page count limit set in the Reporting System Variable will have a status of Canceled. For information. see the System Variableschapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Pages The actual number of pages in the Report Result, represented by two numbers: • If Report status is Completed. the two numbers are the same. Example: 10 of 10 or15 of 15 • If Report status is Canceled, the two numbers are different: the first number indicates the number of Report pages that actualty completed before the Report was canceled. while the second number is an estimate of what the total page count would be if the Report had completed. Example: 4 of 10 or15 of 25 Total size Size of entire Report Result in MB or KB, and also in Bytes. Expiration Delete The Date (if any) after which the Report Result can be deleted by C•CURE 9000. To set a date. select the Delete automatically automatically after check box. and click the drop-down arrow to open a Calendar to choose a date. after NOTE: By default, the 'obsolete' Report Result will be deleted through a pre-configured Event"Remove Report Results," that is triggered around 2:15 by the pre-configured Schedule. "Nighty." Report Result Query Tab The Report Result Query tab, as shown in Figure 94 on Page 241, lets you examine the Query used to create a Report Result. When you are viewing a saved report, understanding the parameters used to generate it provides valuable information. Looking at the Query that was used allows you to see which data would be included in the report and which data would be filtered out and not included in the report. The Query is presented as a table with rows representing the filtering performed by the Query, as described in Table 47 on Page 241. (The Query rows are read-only.) 240 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225525 Report Result Editor Figure 94: Report Result Editor Query Tab IPReport Result Query Report Q Prompt a rend( Nome OunyRopoot 0 Moroi Desciebol Teti la QuoyPtcma Resat aunt Omsk., hoe Feld Fee bee Vale Rom, FreldamieMes The Report Result Query tab has the fields described in Table 47 on Page 241. Table 47: Report Result Editor Query Tab Fields Column Description Operator The Logical Operator for the row (Blank. AND. OR). Type The Object Type for the report (such as Personnel). Fall The Field being queried for by this row. This is a field that is a propertyof the Object Type. Fitter The Filter Type for the Query row (depends on the type of field). Type Value The Value being tested for by the Query row. Prompt Whether or not a Prompt is displayed for Operator input. Fad AValue used at runtime instead of the actual field name. This field allows the creation of an "alias" for several rows. so that at runtime Name one prompt's value is used for all the fields WO that alias. Alias Example: In Personnel, if you wanted to query on the same values for Date1 and Date2 all the time, you could create two criteria rows and use a Field Name Alias of Date for both of them. Then you would only see a single row with the Field Name Date when the Query Parameters dialog box appeared. Entering the value once for Date would use the same value for both the Date1 and Date2 fields when the query was run. See the Tips about using an abas and the examples in some of the figures in Chapter 5, "Historical Tracking of System Activity in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. For more information about queries, see Query Overview on Page 146. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 241 EFTA01225526 Report Result Tasks Report Result Tasks ■ Viewing a List of Report Results on Page 242 ■ Deleting a Report Result on Page 243 Viewing a List of Report Results You can display a list of the reports you have created by opening a Dynamic View of reports. See Viewing a List of Data Views Pane Objects on Page 20. Report Result List Context Menu The context menu that opens when you right-click a Report Result in the Report Result Dynamic View includes the selections described in Data Views Object Context Menu on Page 20. In addition, there are Report Result-specific options described in Table 42 on Page 217. Table 48: Report Result List Right-ClidcContext Menu Options Menu Description Selection Export Clid< this button to export the Report Result to another format. For more information, see Exporting a Report Result on Page 197 Document and Export Report Document Dialog Box on Page 249. View Clid< this button to open a Query Parameters dialog box that displays the Query used to generate this report. This dialog box has Query two views: Prompts and Details. Prompts shows any Query prompts displayed when the Query was run and the parameters typed in by the Operator running the report. Details shows the entire Query: both the parameters displayed for Operator input and those executed without user intervention. NOTE: This option is not avaiable if the Report Result was created without using a query. Stop Click this menu selection to stop the report (avaiable only if the report you selected is still running on the C•CURE 9000 server). If a Running report is stopped before completion, it receives a status of Cancelled. However, you can still view the pages created before the Report report stopped. Deleting a Report Result There are three ways you can delete a Report Result: ■ Manually Delete a Report Result from the list of Report Results. See Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19. ■ Setting a Delete after date ■ Setting a Delete after Number of Days Action for a report generated by an Event 242 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225527 Setting a Delete After Date for a Report Result To Set a Delete After Date for a Report Result 1. Open a list of Report Results. 2. Select the Report Result you wish to delete. 3. Right-click the Report Result to open the context menu and click Edit 4. Select the Delete after check box. The date field for Delete after becomes active. 5. Click the down-arrow to open a Calendar control and pick a date from the Calendar as the Delete after date. The Remove Report Results Event, if not disabled, takes place on the night of the Delete after date and deletes the Report Result. The Remove Report Results Event is pre-configured by the system installation, but can be modified by NOTE Operators. Setting a Delete After Number of Days Action If you have an Event that generates a report, you can configure the Event so the Report Result is deleted a specified number of days after the Report Result is created. To Set a Delete After Number of Days Action 1. Edit the Event that has the Run Report action defined. 2. On the Event Action tab, select the Delete results after the following number of days checkbox. 3. Type in a number of days or use the up/down arrows to set the number of days. Once the Event creates the Report Result, the Report Result is deleted by the Remove Report Results event after the specified number of days has passed (if the Remove Report Results event has not been disabled). Deleting a Report Result There are three ways you can delete a Report Result: ■ Manually Delete a Report Result from the list of Report Results. See Deleting a Data Views Pane Object on Page 19. ■ Setting a Delete after date ■ Setting a Delete after Number of Days Action for a report generated by an Event Setting a Delete After Date for a Report Result To Set a Delete After Date for a Report Result 1. Open a list of Report Results. 2. Select the Report Result you wish to delete. 3. Right-click the Report Result to open the context menu and click Edit. C•CURE 9000 Data Wows Guide Chapter 6 243 EFTA01225528 Report Result Tasks 4. Select the Delete after check box. The date field for Delete after becomes active. 5. Click the down-arrow to open a Calendar control and pick a date from the Calendar as the Delete after date. The Remove Report Results Event, if not disabled, takes place on the night of the Delete after date and deletes the Report Result. The Remove Report Results Event is pre-configured by the system installation, but can be modified by NOTE Operators. Setting a Delete After Number of Days Action if you have an Event that generates a report, you can configure the Event so the Report Result is deleted a specified number of days after the Report Result is created. To Set a Delete After Number of Days Action 1. Edit the Event that has the Run Report action defined. 2. On the Event Action tab, select the Delete results after the following number of days checkbox. 3. Type in a number of days or use the up/down arrows to set the number of days. Once the Event creates the Report Result, the Report Result is deleted by the Remove Report Results event after the specified number of days has passed (if the Remove Report Results event has not been disabled). 244 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Went Guide EFTA01225529 Report/Report Result Viewers Report/Report Result Viewers You can view the Report Result in two ways —on the Report Viewer or Report Result Viewer, two similar screens with a noteworthy difference: the Viewer toolbar icons are the same on both, but the Viewer buttons are not. • Report Viewer - Select a Report from a Dynamic View list of Reports (see Viewing a List of Reports on Page 202) and run the report by clicking View, Popup view, View in Current Tab, or Run on Server, which opens it in the Report Viewer. • Report Result Viewer - Select a Report Result from a Dynamic View list of Report Results (seeViewing a List of Report Results on Page 242 on Page 242) and open it by clicking View, Popup view, or View in Current Tab, which opens it (the saved version of the report —a Report Result) in the Report Result Viewer. If the Report has an attached query without prompts, the query filter is applied automatically. NOTE If the Report/Report Result has an attached query with prompts, a Query Parameters dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 75 on Page 194 after you click one of the preceding buttons. (For more information about queries, see Query Overview on Page 146 in this guide.) Figure 95: ReportViewer I.Sbe A a .2 a 04 NEE O' I SWHIS • Pe01010101List Report PERSONNEL HIM Ilamtr: 14004 WENN Ns: Logi Oa: Me IMF 0 leo fl ea 3/5O:091734 14•80 Ilene Czerbeeld Core eombef Wm" Image PERSONNEL Ivo lame: Ilek.< Wee No,.. Lou Pas. Bea NMI Ins Sae. 3, 61C09125)1)Pw Intl llama Ovelarial CYO *ambit' Imrsr Oman C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chaptur 6 245 EFTA01225530 Report/Report Result Viewers Figure 96: Report ResultViewer I Apr, I-3 5" • vR IR C) - • C! e 2... I ...1... l l l I Mil in awe un lispert teals • IN000001001110p01 • Malt FIRIOIOSR rag a Ira us o at la 0 Liellifld =CO OS0.• inn O00 FIVISONNIL meows es ••••• O0 0 0102.01•11100 am PERSONNEL 04 10•0100 Own Mr. Yr W IN*. lami. ••• 1.1.010. War Unit.. IEFilaNNEt Mb 044/011.00 L.10s Pal 011 4001000006 a PEASCNAlt ON•rilit e Ran tad.. Nroi •• td. IERSSIONIa. !inns •••• SY, 0.011 NIOSJOJI•MON Pod • The Report/Report Result Viewers have the buttons described in Table 49 on Page 246. Table 49: Report Viewer Buttons Button Description Save Result Report Viewer only: Click this button when you are viewing the Report to save the output as a Report Result. Export Both Report Viewer and Report Result Viewer: Document Click this button to export the Report or Report Result to another format. For more information, see: • Exporting a Report Result on Page 1B7 • Export Report Document Dialog Box on Page 249 246 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225531 Report/Report Result Viewers Report Viewer Buttons (continued) Button Description View Query Both Report Viewer and Report Result Viewer: Click this button when you are viewing the Report or Report Result to open a Query Parameters dialog box that displays the Query used to generate this report. This dialog box has hvo views: Parameters and Advanced. Parameters- shows any Query promptsdisplayed when the Query was run, and the parameters typed in by the user running the report. Advanced — shows the entire Query: • Parameters displayed for user input. • Parameters executed without user Intervention. From the Report/Report Result Viewers, you can use the buttons on the Viewer Toolbar, shown in Table 50, to browse through the completed report, print it, search it, and copy data from it. By default, the view of the report opens at 100% zoom, but you can change the magnification. • The example in Figure 95 on Page 245 is displayed at 100% • The example in Figure 96 on Page 246 is displayed at 51% in Multiple Page View 1x2 Pages.) If you double-click the body of the report, the view shifts to a thumbnail view. You can also open a Table of Contents pane by clicking [ibi and view either a Table of Contents or a Thumbnail in this pane. Report/Report Result Viewer Toolbar Definitions Table 50: Report/Report Result Viewer Toolbar Buttons Icon Meaning Description I able of Click this button to open either a pane with a Table of Contents tab that 'Isis the sections of the report or a a Contents Thumbnail View tab that shows a reduced See image of the report pages. Click either tab to toggle the view. Print Click this button to print a copy of the Report Result. ..ii.0 Pit. - Copy Click this button to copy the content of the Report Result into the clipboard. You can then paste the content into another application, such as Word or Notepad. v Find Click this button to open a Windows find dialog box to search through the Report Result fora text string. ...c Single Click this button to return to a Single Page View after clicking either Multiple Page View or Continuous Scroll. Page View (The tab opens in Single Page View initially, by default.) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 247 EFTA01225532 Report/Report Result Viewers Report/Report Result Viewer Toolbar Buttons (continued) Icon Meaning Description co Multiple Click this button to choose how many pages to view at a time in the Report Result. A sub-menu opens to co Page View allow you to chose from page views from 1x1 to 2x3. Continuous Click this button to view the Report Result as one oontinuousdocument. using the scroll bar or Page Scroll Up/Down keys to navigate. While page breaks are visible. you can scroll past them (which you cannot do in single page view). The Current Page control is updated as you scroll through the report. Zoom Out Click this button to zoom out (make the zoom percentage lower). The percentage becomes 10% less each Cik, time you click the button. (The minimum view is 10%.) Zoom In Click this button to zoom in (make the zoom percentage higher). The percentage becomes 50% more each Os time you click the button. (The maximum view is 800%.) Zoom Choose a value from the drop-down box or type in a percentage to zoom the Report Resultin or out. (The 75: v Value minimum value is the maximum value is 800%. Two special values. Page Width and Whole Page. allow you to calculate the scale based on the current page size.) Previous Click these buttons to navigate to the next or previous pagesof a multiple-page Report Result. I @ M Page Next Page Page Index Shows the current page being displayed in a multiple-page Report Result. Changing the number in the box 115 moves to the specified page of the report. '"* aeckwaid Backward Click to go backward one page in the historical list of Report Result pages. Forward Click to go forward one page in the historical list of Report Result pages. 1Ni) Fomard Annotation Click to add a note to the Report. The available note types display: 0 . Ia 12 0 0 'b P -e/ Text. Circle, Rectangle. Arrow. Balloon, and Line annotation. To appty annotations: • Select one of the icons and drag it wherever on the Report page in the Viewer. To modify annotation text or other attributes: • Right-click one of the created annotation objects and select Properties from the context menu. NOTE: You can only save annotations placed on a Report displayed on the Report Viewer. Exporting a Report Result You can export a report result displayed on the Report/Report Result Viewer to a variety of different formats, as well as e-mail, print, and save the report in the exported format. For detailed information and procedures, see the 248 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225533 Report/Report Result Viewers following: • Export Report Document Dialog Box on Page 249 • Exporting a Report Result on Page 197 • To Export a Report from the Report/Report Result Viewers on Page 199) To send e-mails, you first have to set up the e-mail parameters for your entire system using the NOTE System Variables Customer Support category. For information, see the relevant chapter in the Co CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Export Report Document Dialog Box The Export Report Document dialog box (see Figure 78 on Page 198) lets you export a Report Result to the formats shown in on Page 249, as well as e-mail, print, and save the exported document. Once you click the Close button, the system saves the values you entered in this dialog box on the local computer for future use. Check boxes in reports do not display correctly after a report is exported to Excel, RTF, HTML or Text NOTE format. If the report is meant to be exported into one of these formats, it is important to use Textbox controls for representation of Boolean fields (check boxes) on the report's layout (Textbox controls are used by default when Reports are created). Once the text box is linked with the Boolean field, it will print the values "True" or "False" correctly in the exported report for any format. Checkbox controls (if placed on the layout manually) work correctly only if the report result is exported to PDF or TIF format. See Report Editor Layout Design Tab Toolbar Definitions on Page 212. The Export Report Document dialog box has the fields, properties, and buttons described in Table 51 on Page 249. Table St: Export Report Document Dialog Box F 'olds/Properties Field/Property/Button Description Export Parameters File Name T he file name for the report that you want to export-required. Format The format in which you want to save the exported report, selected (Because MHTML is not a well-supponed format in browsers, and does from the drop-down list—required. not function well with very large Reports, Software House recommends using PDF or another Export format instead.) Buttons Export button Clid< to perform the export actions you specify in this dialog box. An Exporting Report Document Status dialog box (see Figure 79 on Page 199) displays progress information. • Click the relevant button to print and/ore-mall the status information or dick OK to dose the status dialog box. Close button Click to dose the Export Report Document dlabg box. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 249 EFTA01225534 Report/Report Result Viewers Field/Property/Button Description Format Properties The properties on this Properties Sheet change depending on the format you choose in the Format field. As you select a property, a box at the bottom of the property sheetgives you information about the effect of the possible values you can choose from a drop-down list. Example: If you chose PDF in the Format field and then select the Security property in the ActiveReports Property Sheet that appears, the information box reads as follows: Security Returns a PdfSecurity object for initializing document encryption and security. Destination E-mail As you select an E-mail section property, a box at the bottom gives you information about the effect of the value you chose from a drop-down list or entered yourself. Example: If you select the Send e-mall property, the information box reads as folows: Send e-mall Should be set to true if the report is to be e-mailed. NOTE: To send e-mails, you first have to set up the e-mail parameters for your entire system using the System Variables Customer Support category. For information. see the relevant chapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Send e-mail Select True or False from the drop-down list to e-matt or not e-mail the Report. Default is False. Status Status of Send. A Read-only, system-supplied value. Address From Enter sender. Address To Enter recipient. Subject Enter e-mail subject. Message Text Enter e-mail message: 1. Click the down-arrow. A message box appears with directions. 2. Press Enter and type your text. 3. Press Ctri+Enter. The message text appears in the property sheet. Print As you select a Print section property, a box at the bottom gives you information about the effect of the possible value you chose from a drop-down list. Example: If you select the Print File property, the information box reads as follows: Print File Should be set to true if the report is to be sent to the printer. NOTE: The MHTML file type isnot supported for Print. 250 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225535 Report/Report Result Viewers Field/Property/Button Description Print File Select True or False from the drop-down list to print or not print the Report. Default is False. Status Status of Send. A Read-only, system-supplied value. Printer Select Printer: 1. Click the down-arrow. 2. Select a printer from the drop-down list. -Or- Select S (dollar sign) to print to the default printer. Either the selected printer path or S displays in the Value column. Save As you select a Save Section property, a box at the bottom gives you information about the effect of the possible value you chose from a drop-down list. Example: If you select the Invoke Viewer property, the information box reads as follows: Invoke Viewer Should an appropriate Output Viewer be opened to display the Extracted Output. Save File Select True or False from the drop-down list. Default is True. Status Status of Send. A Read-only, system-supplied value. Folder Select local folder in which to save information: 1. Enter S (dollar sign) to save in the default users document folder. - or - Click D.A Browse for Folder diabg box appears. - Select a folder. - Click Make New Folder and type a folder name. 2. Click OK. Either $ or the folder and path display in the Value column. Can Overwrite Select True or False from the drop-down list to overwrite or not overwrite an existing report file. Default is True. Invoke Viewer Select True or False from the drop-down list to display or not display the Report output on a viewer. Default is False. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Chapter 6 251 EFTA01225536 Report/Report Result Viewers 252 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225537 A Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Views This appendix describes the pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views included with C•CURE 9000 and the ways that you can use them. In this appendix Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views 254 Pre-defined Reports 255 Pre-defined Queries 262 Pre-defined Dynamic Views 268 Using the Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views 269 Example of Using a Pre-defined Report 270 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 253 EFTA01225538 Overview: Pre-defined Reports. Queries, and Dynamic Views Overview: Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views Ike-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views come with C•CURE 9000. ■ Many of the included pre-defined Reports can fulfill your needs "out of the box." You can also use the Create Copy functionality and make minor adjustments to customize any of these Reports to fit particular requirements you have. ■ Some of the included pre-defined Queries are associated with a particular Report. Other pre-defined Queries are stand-alone and included as general examples. ■ Two pre-defined Dynamic Views are also included as general models. Most of the included pre-defined Report Queries return all possibilities, but you can narrow the results when the Query is prompted. Example: The Report that shows Door accesses shows all accesses, by all Personnel, at all Doors, through the entire Journal. However, when the Query is prompted, you can input the following to filter the results: Figure 97: Query Prompts e One, y parameters SWHrepi 3 • Personnel Admitted at Dow sin Tine Pa nee Piedefried Dues SVMsto13 • PerscentlAthaled //Doors in Term Rees O.sy Prang; Clear front values FmU Nene net Type Jounal.Server Datertme In range Lae 7 daA PersonlNarns Godson John Swath p Dore Marne mad %Elate:al, 6TAR_Oxil See the following information: ■ Pre-defined Reports on Page 255 ■ Pre-defined Queries on Page 262 ■ Pre-defined Dynamic Views on Page 268 ■ Using the Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views on Page 269 ■ Example of Using a Pre-defined Report on Page 270 254 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225539 Pre-defined Reports Pre-defined Reports There are 52 pre-defined Reports in the following logical categories: ■ apC Controller Report (1) ■ Area Reports (9) ■ Clearance Reports (2) ■ Custom Clearance Reports (3) ■ Credential Reports (4) ■ Door Reports (3) ■ Guard Tour Reports (13) ■ Input Report (1) ■ ISC Controller Report (1) ■ iSTAR Controller Report (1) ■ Operator Report (1) ■ Personnel Reports (6) ■ Reader Report (1) ■ Query Report (1) ■ Time Zone Reports (5) The official 'Report Types' of theses pre-defined Reports may differ from the general categories listed NOTE above. The actual system Report Type references only one target security object of the Report. Example: The Report Type given in the system for the two Reports "SWH70 ApC Input Groups with Time Zones" and "SWH71 ApC Door Groups with Time Zones" is Group, whereas they are categorized above as Time Zone reports. The Reports (numbered from SWH01 to SWH16, SWH2O to SWH22, SWH40, SWH41, SWH50 to SWH55, SWH62 to SWH67, SWH70 to SWH74, SWH99, and SWH101 to SWH124) are displayed in the Report Dynamic View with their descriptions and related Queries, as shown in Table 52 on Page 256. ■ The Description field indicates the type of security information each Report returns and includes the notation, (swh-sample). ■ The Query Name field indicates the pre-defined Query used with the Report, if there is one. The Queries used with the Reports are named SWHrepxx. SVVH07 and SVVH0S use special scripting in the Report to display Door Forced and Door Held NOTE situations from the historical Journal. They are valid only with an English language Journal. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 255 EFTA01225540 Pre-defined Reports Table 52: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Reports Report Name Query Name Desaiption SWHO1 - AM SWHrep01 - All Lists alldearances including door, door group, elevator, and elevator group clearances. Report Clearances Report Door and Elevator shows list of door/elevator names and schedules assigned to each clearance. (swh-sample) Clearances IDefautt: <Partition Name] SWHO2 - All Doors SWHrep02 - All Lists all doors in the system, including apC, ISC. and STAR doors. (swh-sample) Report Doors In System IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWHO3 - apC Lists all apC panels including their address. type. port. and status. (swh-sample) Report SWHO4 - SWHrep041- Audit Lists all clearance creations, modifications and deletions from the Audit log. (swh-sample) Clearance Audit Clearance Report Configuration within Date Range IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWHO5 - Door SWHrep0506 - Lists all admits and rejects at a specified door by a specified person. If door or person is not Access Flat Report Cardholders specified, it lists &Moors and allcardholders. Thisversion produces a flat report. (swh-sample) (Admit or Reject) admitted or rejected Report at a specified door in a date range IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWHOSWHO6 - SWHrep0506 - Lists all admits and rejects at a specified door by a specified person for specified date/time range. If Door Access Cardholders door, person, or date range is not specified. it lists all cardholders at all doors. (swh-sample) Report (Admit or admitted or rejected Reject) at a specified door in a date range IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWHO7 - Door SWHrep0708 - Works with 'Door State Changed' query to list door forced journal entries. It hides records without Forced Report Door State the wordCdoor forced; so this report onty works with an English language journal. (swh-sample) Changed IDefautt: <Partition Name] SWHO8 - Door SWHrep0708 - Works with 'Door State Changed' query to list door held journal entries. It hides records without Held Report Door State the word 'door held', so this report ontyworkswith an English language journal. (swh-sample) Changed IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWHO9 - Input Lists inputs in the system including their status. type. and controller. (swh-sample) Status Report SWH10 - ISC Lists all ISC controllers in the system including their IP address and online status. Also. lists boards Controller Report mounted in the controller including their type and slot number. (swh-sample) 256 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225541 Pre-defined Reports Table 52: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Reports (continued) Report Name Query Name Description SWH11 - iSTAR Lists all iSTARs including their status and MAC address. (swh-sample) Controller Report SWH12 - Operator SWHrep12 - Lists Operator logins and logoutsduring a specified date/time range. (swh-sample) Shift Activity Report Operator Shift Aclivity within Date Range [Default: <Partition Name>I SWH13 - SWHrep13 - Lists all cardholders admitted at all doors. Change query to list a specified door or cardholder. PersonnelAdmitted PersonnelAdmitted (swh-sample) at Doors Report at Doors in Time Range [Default: <Partition Name>] SWH14 - SWHrep14 - Lists all personnelcredentials that have expired or will expire in specified date/time range. Personnel Personnel (swh-sample) Credential Expired Credential Expired Report within Date Range [Default: <Partition Name>] SWH15 - Lists all personnel with name, credential, and images. etc. (swh-sample) Personnel List Report SWH16 - Reader Lists readers in the system including their state. controller, and direction. (swh-sample) Status Report SWH20 - Roll Call SWHrep20 - Area Lists personnelgrouped by their Last known area. (swh-sample) Report Name [Default: <Partition Name>] SWH21 - Carpool SWHrep21 - Lists personnelgrouped by their Last known carpool area . (swh-sample) Area Roll Call CarpoolArea Report [Default: <Partition Name>I SWH22 - Carpool SWHrep20 - L ts all personnel members for a specified carpool group. (swh-sample) Group Report Carpool Group [Default: <Partition Name>] SWH40 - Door SWFIrep40 - Door Lists personnel with active clearances for the specified doors during the specified date/time Access by Time Access by Time range—the Activation and Expiration dates for the Clearances themselves. period Report period [Default: Run the report, enter the door(s) you want to report on, and then enter Activation and Expiration <Partition Name] dates for clearances. (swh-sample) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 257 EFTA01225542 Pre-defined Reports Table 52: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Reports (continued) Report Name Query Name Desorption SWH41 - First and SWHrep41 - First Lists First and Last Admitted Card Reads at specified door/doors for each day within the specified Last Card Read and Last Card Read date/time range—grouped by selected personnel records. Report is listed by Personnel Name Report IDefautt: <Partition with columns for the Date, First Read, Last Read, Read Count for the defined period of time, Name, ' duration from the first and last read for each day, and a total duration. Total duration is from first and last read byday and does not account for time in/out of special areas. (swh-sample) SWH50 - Visitors SWHrep50 - Visitors Lists Visitor and Escort Reject journal messages for last 24 hours, sorted by time. Can be modified and Escorts and Escorts when run to change both date/time range specified and Escort Options specified. Can be filtered Rejected by Time Rejected Query by Person, Door, Area, and Reject reason. (swh-sample) Report permit <Partition Name, ' SWH51 - Visitors SWHrep5153 - ListsVisitor and Escort Admitted journal messages for last 24 hours. sorted by time. Can be and Escorts Visitors and Escorts modified when run to change both both date/time range specified and Escort Options specified. Admitted by Time Admitted Query Can be filtered by Person, Door, and Area. (swh-sample) Report IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWH52 - Escorts SWHrep52 - Escorts Lists Escort Admitted and Rejected journal messages for last 24 hours, grouped by Door name. Admitted and Admitted and Can be modified when run to change both date/time range specified and Escort Options specified. Rejected by Door Rejected Query Can be filtered by Person, Door, Area and Reject reason. (swh-sample) Report IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWH53 - Visitors SWHrep5153 - Lists Visitor and Escort Admitted journal messages for last 24 hours grouped by Door name. Can and Escorts Visitors and Escorts be modified when run to change both date/time range specified and Escort Options specified. Can Admitted by Door Admitted Query be littered by Person, Door, and Area. (swh-sample) Report IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' SWH54 - Visitors SWHrep54 - Visitors Lists Visitor and Escort Rejected journal messages for last 24 hours grouped by Person's name. and Escorts and Escorts Can be modified when run to change both date/time range specified and Escort Options specified. Rejected by Person Rejected - Can be filtered by Person, Door, and Area. (swh-sample) Report PersonnelJournal Query permit <Partition Name, ' SWH55 - Escorts SWHrep55 - Escorts Lists Escort Admitted and Rejected journal messages for last 24 hours. Grouped by Person's Admitted and Admitted and name. Can be modified when run to change both date/time range specified and Escort Options Rejected by Person Rejected- specified. Resuttscan be filtered by Area or Personnel name. (swh-sample) Report PersonnelJournal Query [Defeat <Partition Name, ' SWH62 - SWHrep62 - Lists all credentials that should be Disabled by Inactivity on specified date. Can be modified when Credentials that Credentials that run to change the date specified. (swh-sample) Should be Disabled Should be Disabled by Inactivity Report by Inactivity IDefautt: <Partition Name, ' 258 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225543 Pre-defined Reports Table 52: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Reports (continued) Report Name Query Name Description SWH63 - SWHrep63 - Lists alicredentials that have been Disabled by Inactivityon specified date. Can be modified when Credentials that Credentials that run to change the date specified . (swh-sample) have been Disabled have been Disabled by Inactivity Report by Inactivity [Default: <Partition Name, ' SWH64 - SWHrep64 - Lists all credentials that should be Disabled by Inactivity on a specified date. but were not. This ca n Credentials that Credentials that be modified when run to change the date specified . (swh-sample) Should be Disabled Should be Disabled by Inactivity but by Inactivity but were not Report weren't (Default: <Partition Name>I SWH65 - All SWHrep65 - All Lists all custom clearances including door. door group. elevator, and elevator group custom Custom Door and Elevator clearances. Report shows fist of door/elevator names and schedules assigned to each person. Clearances Report Custom Clearances (swh-sample) (Default: <Partition Name, ' SWH66 - Custom SWHrep66 - Lists allcustom clearances including door, door group, elevator, and elevator group custom Clearance Custom Clearance clearances that have expired in specified date/time range. Report shows list of door/elevator Expiration within Expiration within names and schedules assigned to each person. (swh-sample) Date Range Report Date Range [Default: <Partition Name, ' SWH67 - Custom SWHrep67 - Audit Lists custom clearance creations and modifications from the Audit Log. (swh-sample) Clearance Audit Custom Clearance Report Configuration within Date Range (Default: <Partition Name>I SWH70 - apC Input Lists apC Input Groupswith Time Zone Name' field displayed for all group members. Groupswith Time (swh-sample) Zones Report SWH71 - apC Door Lists apC Door Groups with Time Zone Name' field displayed for all group members. Groupswith Time (swh-sample) Zones Report SWH72 - apC Time SWHrep72 - apC Lists apC Controllerswhose Time Zone isddferent from Time Zone of Event Action for Controller. Zone Mismatch Time Zone (swh-sample) Actions Report Mismatch Actions [Default: <Partition Name, ' C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 259 EFTA01225544 Pre-defined Reports Table 52: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Reports (continued) Report Name I Query Name Description SWH73 - apC SWHrep73 - apC Lists apC Controllers with Actions performed only when apC Controller is online, for following Online Only Actions Online Only Actions reasons: Report [Default: <Partition Actions are in different Time Zone from Controller. Name, ' Actions are activated by one Controller but modify item on another controller. Configuration is invalid. (swh-sample) SWH74 - Actions SWHrep74 -Actions ListsActionswhose Time Zone isdifferent from Time Zone of Target Object. The Report lists both with Time Zone with Time Zone Source Object Time Zone and Target Object Time Zone. (swh-sample) Mismatch Report Mismatch Query [Default: <Partition Name, ' SWH99 - Find A SWH29 - Queries Listsguerieswith 'swh-sample" signature in description. Special Word in Description [Default: Query Description <Partition Name>1 Report SWH101 - Guard SWHrep101 - Lists alloonfiguration data for a Guard Tour in the system, including Guard Tour Stops. Tour Configuration Guard Tour (swh-sample) Configuration [Default: <Partition Name>] SWH102 - SWHrep102 - Lists all Personnel in the system who can perform Guard Tours. (swh-sample) Personnel Defined Personnel Defined as Guards as Guards [Default: <Partition Name>] SWH104 - Guard Lists. by Personnel. all Guard Tours assigned to Guards. (swh-sample) ToursAssigned to a Guard SWH105 - All SWHrep105 - All Lists all Elevators assigned to Guard Tours. (swh-sample) Elevators ElevatorsAssigned Associated with to Guard Tour Stops Guard Tours [Default: <Partition Name>I SWH106 - Guard SWHrep106 - Lists all Events that operate on Guard Tours. (swh-sample) Tour Events Guard Tour Events [Default: <Partition Name>I SWH107 - All SWHrep107 - All Lists all Doors assigned to Guard Tours. (swh-sample) DoorsAssociated DoorsAssigned to with Guard Tours Guard Tour Stops [Default: <Partition Name>] 260 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225545 Pre-defined Reports Table 52: Ustof C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Reports (continued) Report Name Query Name Desaiption SWH108 - All SWHrep108 - All Lists all Inputs assigned to Guard Tours. (swh-sample) InputsAssociated InputsAssigned to with Guard Tours Guard Tour Stops [Default: <Partition Name] SWH109 - Guard SWHrep109 - Lists all Guard Tour Completed without ErrorsJournal Messages. (swh-sample) Tours Completed Guard Tours without Errors Completed without Errors (Default: <Partition Name, ' SWH116 - Guard SWHrep116 - Lists ail Guard Tour Status Journal Messagesduring specified Date/Time Range. (swh-sample) Tour Status by Guard Tour Status Date/Time by Date/Time [Default: <Partition Name, ' SWH119 - Guard SWHrep119 - Lists all Guard Tour Completed with ErrorsJournal Messages. (swh-sample) Tours Completed Guard Tours with Errors Completed with Errors [Default: <Partition Name] SWH120 - SWHrep120 - Lists all Guard Tour Canceled Journal Messages. (swh-sample) Canceled Guard Canceled Guard Tours Tours [Default: <Partition Name>I SWH122 - Guard SWHrep122 - Active Lists all Guard Tourswith a Current Statusof Activated or Resumed. (swh-sample) Tourswith Current Guard Tours Status: [Default: <Partition Activated/Resumed Name] SWH124 - Guard SWHrep124 - Lists oonfiguration data for all Guard Tour Schedules in the system. (swh-sample) Tour Schedules Guard Tour Schedules [Default: <Partition Name>1 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 261 EFTA01225546 Pre-defined Queries Pre-defined Queries There are thirty-nine pre-defined Queries associated with specific Reports in the following logical categories: ■ Area Type (8) ■ Clearance Type (2) ■ Credential Type (3) ■ Custom Clearance Type (3) ■ Door Type (2) ■ Guard Tour (12) ■ Operator Type (1) ■ Personnel Type (5) ■ Time Zone Type (3) These Queries (numbered from SWHrep01 to SWHrep14, SWHrep20 to SWHrep22 SWHrep40, SWHrep41, SWHrep50 to SWHrep55, SWHrep62 to SWHrep67, SWHrep72 to SWHrep74, and SWHrep101 to SWHrep124) are displayed in the filtered Query Dynamic View with their Query Target Type and description, as shown in Table 53 on Page 263. ■ The Description field indicates the type of security information each Query returns, names the pre-defined Report that the Query is used with, and includes the notation, (swh-sample). Query SWHrep0506 is used with Reports SWH05 and SWH06. NOTE Query SWHrep0708 is used with Reports SWH07 and SWH08. Quay SWHrep5153 is used with Reports SVVH51 and SWH53. In addition, there are sixteen pre-defined stand-alone Queries of the following types, included as general examples: ■ Clearance Target Type (1) ■ Credential Target Type (2) ■ Dynamic View (1) ■ Personnel Target Type (10) ■ Query Target Type (1) ■ Report Target Type (1) These Queries (numbered from SWH2O to SWH34, are displayed in the filtered Query Dynamic View with their Query Target Type and description, as shown in Table 54 on Page 266. (SWH01 is a stand-alone Query for Enterprise Architecture systems only.) ■ The Description field indicates the type of security information each Query returns and includes the notation, (swh-sample). There are also two unnumbered pre-defined stand-alone Queries: NOTE ■ Journal Default Query - default journal log query object. ■ Audit Default Query - default audit log query object. 282 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225547 Pre-defined Queries Table 53: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Queries used wan Pre-defined Reports Query Query Name Target Description Type SWHrep01 - All Door and Clearance Query for door and elevator Clearances. If a field contains <IGNORED>. the query will match all Elevator Clearances Query values. Used with Report SWH01. (swh-sample) SWHrep02 - All Doors in Door Query for doors whose names are in the list. Enter name in the value column. If a field contains System Query <IGNORED>. the query will match all values. Used with Report SWH02. Uses the pre-defined Dynamic View. SWHdvO2 - All Doors- DView. (swh-sample) SWFIrep04 - Audit Clearance Query for clearance configuration changes. including creation, modification, and deletion. Used Clearance Configuration with Report SWH04. (swh-sample) within Date Range Query SWHrep0506 - Personnel Query for cardholders admitted or rejected at specified door in specified date/time range. Enter Cardholders admitted or person name, door name, date range or start/end time. If person, door, or date/time range is not rejected at a specified door specified. the query returns all cardholder admissions/rejections at all doors. Used with Report in a date range Query SWH05 and SWH06. (swh-sample) SWHrep0708 - Door State Journal Query for journal door state changes in specified date/time range. Used with Report SWH07 and Changed Query (Door) SWH08. (swh-sample) SWHrep12 - Operator Shift Operator Query for operator logins/bgouts in specified date/time range. Used with Report SWH12. (swh- Activity within Date Range sample) Query SWHrep13 - Personnel Journal Query for cardholders admitted at specified door in specified date/time range. Enter person name. Admitted at Doors in Time (Personnel) door name, date range or start/end time. If person. door. or date range is not specified. the query Range Query returns all cardholder admissions at all doors. Used with Report SWH13. (swh-sample) SWHrep14 - Personnel Personnel Query for allpersonnelcredentialsthat have expired or will expire in specified date/time range. Credential Expired within Used with Report SWH14. (swh-sample) Date Range Query SWHrep20 - Area Name Area Query for allArea names and/or Area Group names. Used with Report SWH20. (swh-sample) Query SWHrep21 - CarpoolArea Area Query for all Carpool Areas. Used with Report SWH21. (swh-sample) Query (Carpool) SWHrep22 - Carpool Area Query for all Carpool Groups. Used with Report SWH22. (swh-sample) Group Query (Carpool) SWHrep40 - Door Access Personnel Query for Personnel with access to (active clearances for) specified door in specified date/time by Time Period Query range. Used with Report SWH40. (swh-sample) SWHrep41 - First and Last Personnel Query for Personnel who were admitted/rejected at specified door in specified date/time range. Card Read Query Used with Report SWH41. (swh-sample) SWHrep50 - Visitors and Journal Query for Card Rejected journal messages for Unescorted Visitors, Escorted Visitors, and Escorts. Escorts Rejected Query (Area) Thisquery may becopied and edited to fitter Escort Optionsdifferently: by Person. Door. Area. or Reject reason. Used with Report SWH50. (swh-sample) C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 263 EFTA01225548 Pre-defmed Queries Table 53: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Queries used with Pre-defmed Reports (continued) Query Query Name Target Description Type SWHrep5153 - Visitors and Journal Query for Card Admitted journal messages for Unescorted Visitors, Escorted Visitors, and Escorts. EsoortsAdmitted Query (Area) This query may becopied and edited to fitter Escort Options differentty: by Person, Door, Area, or Reject reason. Used with Reports SWH51 and SWH53. (swh-sample) SWHrep52 - Escorts Journal Query for Card Admitted and Card Rejected journal messages for Escorts. This query may be Admitted and Rejected (Area) copied and edited to filter Escort Optionsdifferentty: by Person, Door, Area, or Reject reason. Query Used with Report SWH52. (swh-sample) SWHrep54 - Visitors and Personnel Query for Card Rejected journal messages for Unescorted Visitors. Escorted Visitors. and Escorts Escorts Rejected - (Area) grouped by Person. This query may becopied and edited to filter Escort Options differentty: by PersonnelJournal Query Person, Door, Area, or Reject reason. Used with Report SWH54. (swh-sample) SWHrep55 - Escorts Personnel Query for reporting on Card Admitted and Card Rejected journal messages for Escorts grouped Admitted and Rejected - (Area) by Person. This query may becopied and edited to filter the Escort Options differentty: by Person, PersonnelJournal Query Door, Area, or Reject reason. Used with Report SWH55. (swh-sample) SWHrep62 - Credentials Credential Query for all Credentials that should be disabled by inactivity on specified date. You can modify the that should be Disabled by query by cha nging values. Used with Report SWH62. Inactivity Query (swh-sample) SWHrep63 - Credentials Credential Query for all Credentials that have been disabled by inactivity on specified date. You can modify the that have been Disabled by query by cha nging values. Used with Report SWH63. Inactivity Query (swh-sample) SWHrep6.4 - Credentials Credential Query for all Credentials that should be disabled by inactivity on specified date, but were not. You that should be Disabled by can modify the query by changing values. Used with Report SWH64. (swh-sample) Inactivity but Were Not Query SWHrep65 - All Door and Custom Query for door and elevator Custom Clearances. If a field contains <IGNORED>, the query will Elevator Custom Clearance match all values. Used with Report SWH65. (swh-sample) Clearances Query SWHrep66 - Custom Custom Query for Custom Clearances that have expired within specified date range. If a field contains Clearance Expiration within Clearance <IGNORED>, the query will match all values. Used with Report SWH66. (swh-sample) Date Range Query SWFIrep67 - Audit Custom Custom Query for Custom Clearance configuration changes, including creation and modification. Used Clearance Configuration Clearance with Report SWH67. (swh-sample) within Date Range Query SWHrep72 - apC Time apC Query for apC Controllers and their actions that have Online Only Reason' set to Zone Mismatch Actions Controller TimeZoneMismatch'. Used with Report SWH72. (swh-sample) Query (Time Zone) SWHrep73 - apC Online apC Query for apC Controllers and their actions that have Online Only Reason' set to True'. Used with Onty Actions Query Controller Report SWH73. (swh-sample) (Time Zone) 264 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225549 Pre-defined Queries Table 53: List of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Queries used with Pre-defined Reports (continued) Query Query Name Target Description Type SWHrep74 - Actions with Action Item Query for apC Controllers and their actions that have Time Zone Mismatch. Used with Report Time Zone Mismatch Query (Time SWH74. (swh-sample) Zone) SWHrep101 - Guard Tour Guard Tour Query for Guard Tours in the system with a II configuration information including Tour Stops. Used Configuration Query with Report SWH101. (swh-sample) SWHrep102 - Personnel Guard Tour Query for all Personnel in the system who can perform Guard Tours. Used with Report SWH102. Defined as Guards Query (swh-sample) SWFIrep105 -All Elevators Guard Tour Query for all Elevators assigned to Guard Tour Stops. Used with Report SWH105. Assigned to Guard Tour (swh-sample) Stops Query SWHrep106 - Guard Tour Guard Tour Query for all Events that operate on Guard Tours. Used with Report SWH106. Events Query (swh-sample) SWHrep107 -All Doors Guard Tour Query for all Doors assigned to Guard Tour Stops. Used with Report SWH107. Assigned to Guard Tour (swh-sample) Stops Query SWFIrep108 -All Inputs Guard Tour Query for all Inputs assigned to Guard Tour Stops. Used with Report SWH108. Assigned to Guard Tour (swh-sample) Stops Query SWHrep109 - Guard Tours Guard Tour Query for Guard Tour completed without errorsJournal messages in specified Date/Time range. Completed without Errors Used with Report SWH109. (swh-sample) Query SWHrep116 - Guard Tour Guard Tour Query for Guard Tour StatusJournal messages in specified Date/Time range. Used with Report Status by Date/Time Query SWH116. (swh-sample) SWFIrep119 - Guard Tours Guard Tour Query for Guard Tour completed with errorsJournal messages in specified Date/Time range. Completed with Errors Used with Report SWH119. (swh-sample) Query SWFIrep120 - Canceled Guard Tour Query for Guard Tour Canceled Journal messages in specified Date/Time range. Used with Guard Tours Query Report SWH120. (swh-sample) SWHrep122 - Active Guard Guard Tour Query for Active Guard Tours. Used with Report SWH122. (swh-sample) Tours Query SWFIrep124 - Guard Tour Guard Tour Query for Scheduled Guard Tours. Used with Report SWH124. (swh-sample) Schedules Query C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 265 EFTA01225550 Pre-defined Queries Table 54: 1st of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined Stand-alone Queries Query Query Name Target Description Type SWH01 - MAS Credentials Credential Query for aficredentials that have duplicate CHUID values. Set the check box 'Is Conflict' to True' with Duplicate CHUID to show the dupbcate records that cause oonfbcts while replicating from MAS to SAS servers or Query keep it undefined to see all duplicate records. (swh-sample) (Only for Enterprise Architecture systems) SWH20 - i:Ul Door Clearance Query for clearance access to specified door. Modify the query to specify door name. Clearance Query (swh-sample) SWH21 - Card Number Personnel Query for specified credential number(s) or in specified number range. (swh-sample) Search Query (Credential) SWH22 - Credential Credential Query for expiring credentials in specified date/time range or with specified start/end dates. Modify Expired within Time Range query to specify activation and/or expiration date/times or specify pre-configured range such as Query Today. Uses pre-defined Dynamic View. SWHdv22 - Credential expired - DView. (swh-sample) SWH23 - Dynamic Views Dynamic Query for Dynamic Views with value 'swh-sample' in their description field. (swh-sample) Query View SWH24 - Personnel by Personnel Query for personnelwith specified clearance(s) . If value contains <IGNORED>. query matches all Name and Clearance values. (swh-sample) Query SWH25 - Personnel by Personnel Query for Personnel by last names. Tip: Use string "s%" to search for last names starting with •S•. It Last Name Query is possible to put two or more values in edit form. (swh-sample) SWH26 - Personnel Personnel Query for personnel whose clearance will expire in next 30days. You can modify query by Clearance Expired or changing values—for example, specifying expiration date/time range and Personnel types, such as Expires within Date/Time contractor. (swh-sample) Range Query SWH27 - Personnel Text Personnel Query for personnelwith specified Text4 'value. (swh-sample) Query SWH28 - Personnel with Personnel Query for personnel with badges printed in specified date/time range. (swh-sample) Recently Printed Badges Query SWH29 - Queries Query Query for Queries with value 'swh-sample' in description field. (swh-sample) Description Query SWH30 - Reports Report Query for Reports with value 'swh-sample' in description field. (swh-sample) Description Query SWH31 - Personnel Personnel Query for personnel who do not have specified clearance. (swh-sample) Lacking Specified Clearance Query 266 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225551 Pie-defined Queries Table 54: List of C•CURE 9000 Pie-defined Stand-alone Queries (continued) Query Query Name Target Description Type SWH32 - Personnel Personnel Query for personnelwlthout admit/reject record in journal in specified date/time range. Inactivity for Specific Time (swh-sample) Period Query SWH33 - Personnel Not in Personnel Query for personnelwhoare not membersof specified group. (swh-sample) a GroupQuery SWH34 - PersonnelWho Personnel Query for personnel whose credential isnot lost, stolen, or disabled— induding personnel without Do NOT Haves Lost, anyaredentialsat all (swh-sample) Stolen, or Disabled Card Query C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 267 EFTA01225552 Pro-defined DynamicViews Pre-defined Dynamic Views There are two pre-defined Dynamic Views that are provided as examples of the ways in which you can customize Dynamic Views to fit your particular needs: ■ By defining which fields are displayed. ■ By changing color, left-right justification, etc. These Dynamic Views, numbered SWHdv02 and SWHdv22, are displayed in the filtered Dynamic View with their description, as shown in Table 55 on Page 268. ■ The Description field indicate the type of security information each Dynamic View returns and include the notation, (swh-sample). Table SS: IJst of C•CURE 9000 Pre-defined DynamIcViews Name Description SWH602 •AI Used with SWHrep02 Al Doors in System Query to find door names, partition, and controllers they are part of, etc. (swh- Doors - DView sample) SWHdv22 • Used with SHW22 Credential Expired within Time Range Query to find credentials that wilexpire or become expired in Credential specified date/time range. Query results display name of personnel whose credential is invoNed, card number, and credential expired • activation/expiration dates. (swh•sample) DView 268 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225553 Using the Pre-defined Reports. Queries. and Dynamic Views Using the Pre-defined Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views You can use the Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views that are provided with C•CURE 9000 'as is' to obtain a variety of basic information about your security system. You can also use them as models for ways to use the Report, Query, and Dynamic View functionality. Furthermore, although these pre-defined objects are 'hard-coded' and cannot themselves be modified, a Create Copy button allows you to customize any of the pre-defined Reports, Queries, or Dynamic Views to suit your needs. To Customize a Pre-defined Report/Query/Dynamic View 1. Click the Data Views pane button . 2. Click the Data Views drop-down list and select Report, Query, or Dynamic View. 3. Click aig to open a Dynamic View showing all Report/Query/Dynamic View objects. 4. Select the pre-defined Report/Query/Dynamic View you want to customize for your use, right-click, and select Edit from the context menu. The editor for the object you chose opens with the selected pre-defined Report/Query/Dynamic View, respectively, displayed. • Report Editor (see Figure 80 on Page 204 • Query Editor (see Figure 66 on Page 148 • Dynamic View Editor (see Figure 31 on Page 82 (You can make changes at this point if you wish, or wait until you've made the copy.) 5. Click Create Copy. The respective Editor reappears with a copy of the Report/Query/Dynamic View with the Name field blank (and any changes you may already have made included). 6. Modify the Report/Query/Dynamic View to your liking and then click Save Result. For more information about Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views, see: • Reporting Overview on Page 186, • Query Overview on Page 146 • Dynamic Views Overview on Page 80. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 269 EFTA01225554 Example of Using a Pre-defined Report Example of Using a Pre-defined Report SWH06 is a Door Access Report that uses SWHrep0506 as its Query. To Run this Report 1. In the Report Dynamic View, select the Report and do either of the following, as shown in Figure 98 on Page 270: Figure 98: SWHO6 Door Access Report rcenel Per 5WHC6 - Door SWillep0506 Lists all admits and rejects at a Access Report ...4••••••-• s• • ' specified door by a specific (Admit or Rejec Edit person If run with (*knits d lists all doors and all View cardhoiders This version produces a standard repot Popup view (s*h-sampie) tithe Persona Door is not View in current tab at all • Delete • Double-click it. - or - • Right-click to open the context menu and select one of the following: — View - Popup View — View in current tab The SWHrep0506 Query opens as shown in Figure 99 on Page 270. Figure 99: SWHO6QueryPrompt 2. Click Run to have the Report show all admits and rejects at all doors in the entire journal. - or - Click Modify (or Details) to display the actual Query structure, as shown in Figure 100 on Page 271. 270 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225555 Example of Using a Pre-defined Report if the Query can be edited, the button is Modify; if the Query can only be viewed, the button is NOTE Details. Figure 100: SWH06 Query Structure •e00006 Sited a tea] e • L• °Mita 1we rid hidNeve Na Petterryl • Le:gnaw v COak Person Loa Nene Ard v Persona rnd Nome vi Equals Person Fes nne v "yrnal v Snow:ley Ob Doer Na.. Aid v .1<mnd ✓ banal Log M rbi CarclAitstel Cad Flesciel Ltd v I Bean Plod. eAvetay% :earned E Dee Ater v El Stan Dr. 2 Ertl lne The pre-defined Query, shown in both Figure 99 on Page 270 and Figure 100 on Page 271, asks for (All last names) AND (All First Names) AND (All Doors) AND (Admits or Rejects) AND (Date in Range OR Date between Start and End) 3. Click Prompts to return to the Query Prompts dialog box (Figure 99 on Page 270) or click Run to execute the Report from this Query Details dialog box. The Query returns all admits and rejects of all personnel at all doors in the Report Result, one page of which is shown in the example in Figure 101 on Page 272. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 271 EFTA01225556 Example of Using a Pre-defined Report Figure 10 1: SWI-106 - Door Access Report with All Records SW406 Door Access Report (Admit or Reject) PERSONNEL Journal Cardholder Nemo Door Name .loon roil I cni Message Text Montage Date 't im e Message type 'ape_door11 (1N). Sarthgate, Andy ape doort Card Rejected Rimmed (Clearance) I If242038 2.44.49 PM '13anhgate. Andy (Card: 10466007).1 'apc_doorr Eladhgatc Mdy ape doorl Card Rejected Rejected (Clearance) 11/24/2033 3'.1272 PM Seagate. Andy' (Cart 10486007) al 'ape door' QN) Teed: Boston Cardholder Name Door Nome Journal Log Menage Text Nonage Date/Time Manage Type Blake. Toe rsiat_cloorl Card Admitled Admitted Blake. 117142m811.46.41 AM Toe' (Card 16337753) al Ipar_doorT (ID aUnused9 Blake. Toe apc_dooll Card Rejected Rejects (Clearance) 11/14/20ffl 11:46:47 AM Slake. Toe' (Card: 16337753) al 'apc_doort ON) Blake, Toe riler_doot1 Card Admined Admitted Slake, 11/21/2009 1:53.52 PM Toes (Card 16337753) al Isla(Jowl' (91) The example in Figure 102 on Page 272 shows how you can narrow the search criteria for the Report when the Query prompts you. Figure 102: SWHO6 Query for Specific Person at Specific Door a Query parameters SVAIrep0506 Cardholders admitted or rejected at a :pet ilied door in a date in rs- FV4olovl Ove, S'.444.4(1AF C4.414,444,41 /AVM] a "vc•4414/ 4 0ketr Pitmen wan none Mikes Ana Nam Natoli,* Nan* Atom Fut nor* Don Net Deo Rome Scare** M 11A2/21:03 801(0914 Ere hoe v 11/Z2/N0312W • I I ova-, Yesterday Rrn Carat Lost has Lal 6 ham Lad 12 hour Lett 24 hour Last 48 dews Lae 7 ease V 272 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225557 Example of Using a Pre-defined Report This Query has been narrowed to a specific person at a specific door between the dates of November 12th and November 22nd. (Date Range could have also been used for ranges such as 'Last 7 days', etc. The Report Result for this Query is shown in the example in Figure 103 on Page 273. Figure 103: SWHO6— Door Access Reportwith Narrowed Search c- Li T1 SWHO6 - Door Access Report (Admit or Reject) PERSONNEL Boston foulnal Cardholder Name Door Name Journal Log Message Text Message Date/Time Message Type Blake. Toe islar_doort Card Admitted Admitted Blake. 11/14/20:03 11:46:41 AM Toe' (Card 16337753) at Islar_doort (vo gUnusedg Blake. Toe islet doors Card Admitted Admitted Blake. 11/21/2003 1:53.52 PM Toe' (Card 16337753) at islet door1' (IN) ((Unused') Blake. Toe islar_doon Card Admitted Admitted Blake. itaincoe 1 54 44 PM Toe' (Card 16337753) at islar_doorl' (OUT) gUnusedg. For further information on Reports, Queries, and Dynamic Views see the relevant chapters in this Guide. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix A 273 EFTA01225558 Example of Using a Pre-defined Report 274 Appendix A C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225559 B Map Conversion This appendix describes the Map Conversion process. Map Conversion 276 Troubleshooting Map Conversion 281 Map Conversion Definitions .283 Map Status 284 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix B 275 EFTA01225560 NlapComtrson Map Conversion 'Ibis section describes the steps to convert Legacy maps to the new format. If you are using an Administration Station on a remote client to connect to your C•CURE 9000 server, NOTE you need to edit the configuration file for the map converter to point to the C•CURE 9000 server. See Map Conversion Using a Remote Client on Page 276 for more information. Map Conversion Using a Remote Client If your C•CURE 9000 Administration Station is a client to a remote C•CURE 9000 server, you need to edit the Map Converter configuration file (CCureMapConverter.exe.config) to point to the remote server. By default, the configuration file expects the C•CURE 9000 server to be the local system - if your server is on the same system as the Administration Station, you do not need to make any changes in the configuration file. To Configure Map Conversion for a Remote Client 1. Navigate to your client's installation directory (typically C:\ Program Files x86\ Tyco\ CCURE Client). 2. Edit the file "CCureMapConverter.exe.config" in Notepad. 3. Find the <client> section of the file. 4. Substitute the system name of your C•CURE 9000 server for "localhost" in the "ClientSession" and "ClientStream" sections of the file, as highlighted below. <client> <endpoint name="ClientSession" address="net.tcp://localhost:8999/CrossFire/IClientSession" binding="netTcpBinding" bindingConfiguration="ServiceBinding" contract="SoftwareHouse.CrossFire.Common.ClientInterfaceLayer.IClientSession"› </endpoint> <endpoint name="ClientStream" address="net.tcp://localhost:8997/CrossFire/IClientStream" binding="netTcpBinding" bindingConfiguration="StreamBinding" contract="SoftwareHouse.CrossFire.Common.ClientInterfaceLayer.IClientStream"› </endpoint> </client> Example: <endpoint name="ClientSession" address="net.tcp:// yourccure9000servername :8999/CrossFire/IClientSession" binding="netTcpBinding" bindingConfiguration="ServiceBinding" contract="SoftwareHouse.CrossFire.Common.ClientInterfaceLayer.IClientSes sion"> </endpoint> 276 Appendix B C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225561 Map Conversion Converting Legacy Maps to the New Maps Format You ,;In use the C•CURE 9000 Map Converter program to convert Legacy Maps to the new Maps format. To Convert Legacy Maps 1. Run the Map Converter (CCureMapConverter.exe) program, located in the C:\Program Files (x86) \ Tyco \CCure Client directory. Right-click CCMapConverter.exe to "Run as administrator." NOTE 2. Click the Load Server Maps button. A list of Legacy maps in the system displays on the screen. Figure 104: Converting Legacy Maps. • • • & & Iln•leue• •^147t .. S... Maps Xnend SUAn Co,ext t • knee 5177 Ten Gentle Moen. Meek'. knee 5174 Tina. MO 00,400, 9 1,0A, 9.000 *#1 Pore 3115 T,.a :00 OrrY0Pai bas 849r Wei 01 WS bonen KO Oernoom kOes .9. WWI ed ' 4)9 4 Wee MU WatsvdM.I knee MI az Tea Yap ke, et. Ccenfewneb SIO use. XL Dern Nene 5166 =My Nee ‘top — Nee* 3112 tecOntnet9^fikon, knee 3161 tedko Bq Yap Wee 5161 =nun* Mee _ — Wee Mel ezzieleakellfdo Wee SIM azzialeake-Ve del NOM 5171 asidletThe-Wdet2 Moe* MO Her." &en —ro — Nora 516.? =Tyco gulden — knee 510 eukenfan Swans Mot _ Wee 5164 ez•Weielkinlair Sod Cessial bad Sane11.2j 3. Click in the Selected column to select the check-box next to each map you want to convert. (Choose maps whose Status is None; which means that these maps have not been converted.) All maps that you convert at the same time must have the same status NOTE C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix B 277 EFTA01225562 MapConversion 4. Select Export and Convert Selected to begin the conversion. Figure 105: Exportand Convert Selected lg. C........“4 . CtlecID tarn Der4-010. ,,,., 51:* TrielopICONtrUppeattOe CO..erted Nce., 5177 , I110••••• loam Us.Ice Ile. 1171 rwq 103 Owl**, hen Illwr.hr r4:, 317) tqa•P110)0,,00,40, eliOr ."cTh NC.% 5171 'new. 1CO Onnbpp,Ur: rWo Ascl, zed $..knpr Woes Med **Mal 441 AO0ei MIt az in Mitt, rep Coadroin Cr^••+rd 5141 manta Pro ) anief SIM =.4 ,4•040 (*WW1 5172 =040aptailkons nin 510 atislio My '‘," MAI ypvyt VM r". MOO vnM0llienVI0 Fie, MO miye•irorde0 140.1, 'In m7Spinyrowz loves Moo =1/mop Lela.* +DOW 5102 m',” I. kiN) Aptlad MU naOrnba %wood nos • loyal MW mw rtes. Lam I Dalai... I lair Wolin I FT siSratiay71 — ,,, ,....- - r ,,,.,..,,,.......-- 5. 'File Status of the maps change during the conversion and a progress bar displays the progress. Figure 106: ProgressofMapStatusChanges Converting maps... cr. [2 Matched] [2 Processed] [2 Remaining] Cancel 278 Appendix B C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225563 Map Conversion 6. When conversion completes for the selected objects, the Status column changes to Converted. Figure 107: Screen with Convened Maps 03 Mem Ono0187 5110 7a00310 Ownloprekeds ~tie 51,7 est Once 11447.71140, Sax `rap )10 Overisere tom SOW Her 5113 ' , wog IN 0 7erkoP10 31,11 69171 5110/1 5115 70.770 310 Nano* 1/177/1100$ a 1/41",7017510,1 10110 13510Y01•10 50010 5175 CV 71111/1575naCC0715110 (tow nedi 51C Orin-/Ctomo ) 5.044 3116 1:1110010. 7.40 Web. 51, 7 ar135050,1701cas NOW Me az1541.01•0 HOY 3117 =Prtit 11117 51.1 0115/olyer040, Nov 3171) 55141034,13007. lit75 5171 5040 5110 =7•577•00/7•77•1 4440 14.2 = 1507 NWv 34.110 r-,57100,11,70.0 nocr 50.00 1115 517/110,73577•147 1•515•7•11ap ii j 4..i715:377 . 8=219MMIMMIc The Map Conversion Tool message box reports that the Maps were converted successfully. 400 The maps were converted successfully! OK 7. Click OK. You can view and edit the converted maps from the Administration workstation. See Accessing the Map Editor on Page 118. You can make changes to the converted map if needed, before applying Links. See To Apply Links to Converted Maps on Page 279. To Apply Links to Converted Maps After converting the maps, you can use the CCureMapConverter.exe to add the links from the Legacy maps to the new maps. 1. Select the maps where you want to apply links. 2. Click Apply Selected to link objects on the new maps. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix B 279 EFTA01225564 MapConversion CCureMapConverter.exe adds the links from the Legacy maps to the new maps 3. If the linking is successful, the Status field changes to Applied to indicate that the objects referencing the map have been successfully updated to point to the newly created Map. 0 The maps were applied successfully! L. OK 4. Click OK. 5. You can view and edit the converted maps from the Administration workstation. See Accessing the Map Editor on Page 118. 280 Appendix B C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225565 Troubleshooting Map Conversion Troubleshooting Map Conversion This section describes steps to troubleshoot conversion problems. View Log If there are problems converting a Map, you can view a log that details the conversion steps and provides information about any errors. 1. View Log - If you receive a View Log message that the maps were converted with errors, click OK to close the message box. Figure 108: MapConverted with Errors- Click View Log len.. I c y .batraaminMelsa•Nra•••• r %,, aill•••••••••leasa. r w, ••••7100••••••••••••••••• r t sw in................ •.............t.n...r . en nut manien• fol. ofa.......• " =CI t o 0 ala WI fan asTestlass ••••• 0 %V 0 0 t r +A• aw••• r 'i May t .0 ...,....... in ‘... .....^-10^ las Simian' I —rase I ..... .... 2. Click View Log to review the applicable log files with information about the error or problem. . Figure 109: View Mapeonverslon Log to• ii NMI I= bilr btinfol c• tasma no a4a4 01jectl0.51, 2 ant•trant/aggliq Savoy • Mil/ma •aitor ape • tabacaateatat•lainata: ame••••••, uitial• rlial al ofteloac, •Ta rlatAisainwsaycalca.C. nIllt• ao ale 'lady...den MaKenstrstanarolui aletiOadell An err accoref ••11. 41••• 14•14. 0•Iaall. 6 1 7: lanne.te " I' NMrn.N ett cafilperyc nuar•camayla•C•lwanta4 U72,14.10114.li Tverelawai grasal•tan.a scaln). 04,ZIU011 ;Fcr,:.;:rxr— : catt 441:2:=/;:r ....... .... ”PE..a...vaseva05:1•07L5011,C "V efettII-011 ....•.41.1),.1It sr lesr_SS72 Ctc.ffitlaw. Mlldn scnconcion- 1.-Ms. ions. 4-.• Mn itaartsCIZO•feCt10.5>at Reset Selected I Click Reset Selected to reset the Status of a map back to its previous "good" state. For example, if during conversion a map fails with a 'Status' of Error_Converfing, clicking the Reset Selected button resets the status C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix B 281 EFTA01225566 Troubleshooting Map Conversion back to Exported status so you can reattempt the conversion. 2. You can restart the conversion process by clicking Export and Convert Selected. 282 Appendix B C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225567 Map Conversion Definitions Map Conversion Definitions This section lists Map Conversion Definitions. Table 56: Server Map Columns Server Maps Description Selected The Selected column contains a check box for each selected map in the Server Maps tab. Status Displays the statusof each map in the Map Converter Server Maps list. If a map fails during conversion, clicking the 'Reset Selected button resets the status back to the 'Exported' status so users can reattempt the conversion process. See Map Status on Page 284. Object ID T his column displays the C•CURE 9000 ObjectlD of each map row in the Map Converter Server Maps list. In the Map Conversion directory, each Map has a working folder name in the format •Map ObjectlD_Map Name• Name This column displays the C•CURE 9000 Map Name of each map row in the Map Converter Server Maps list. In the Map Conversion directory, each Map has a working folder name in the format 'Map ObjectID_Map Name• Description Contains user defined terms and descriptions. Table 57: Button/Fad Definitions Button/Field Description Select All Selects all maps listed in the Server Ma ps' ta b. The Selected column contains a check mark for each selected map. Deselect All Deselects any maps that are currently selected in the Server Maps' tab. Toggle Selection Selects all maps in the Server Maps' tab that are notcurrently selected while deselecting the maps that are currently selected. Select Converted Selects all maps in the Server Maps' tab that currently have a 'Status'of Converted. Load Server Maps Loads all existing legacy maps from the connected server to the Server Maps' tab. Reset Selected Resets the 'Status'of a map back to itsprevious-good' state. Example: if during conversion a map failswith a 'Status'of 'Error_Converting', clicking the 'Reset Selected' button resets the status back to 'Exported' status so you can reattempt the conversion process. Export and Causes each selected map in the Server Maps' tab to be exported from the currentlyconnected server and then Convert Selected converted. The maps are exported to the Map Conversion' directory boated in the same directory as the conversion tool. Apply Selected Causes each selected map with a 'Status'of 'Converted' to be Applied'. Applied is the process by which each of the previouslyconverted maps and any references to them are updated so they point to the newlyconverted map. C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Appendix B 283 EFTA01225568 Map Status Map Status Map Status messages are useful for tracking the progress of conversion processing. These status messages appear during the map conversion process in the Status column of the Map Converter program. The system displays the processing progress, and the status of the maps changes during conversion. NOTE Choose maps whose status is None (not converted). All maps that you convert at the same time must have the same status. Table 58: Map Status Status Description None The Legacy map has not been converted. Error_Apptying Indicates that the objects referencing the Legacy Map have not all been applied to the new Map. Error Converting Map was exported to the hard drive but does not appear in the Admin Maps dynamic view. Possible reasons: • Map was previously converted. Trying to reconvert the map, but it hasn't been removed from the database. • Map with the same name was alreadyaeated. • Network Issue that interrupted the connection between map converter and server during the conversion process. • The converter may have run out of memory due to the map being too large. Under these circumstances,you will see an 'OutOfMemory' error in the applicable log file (see View Log on Page 281 for more information). If you are running the conversion on a 32 bit system, you should try the conversion on a 64 bit system, that has more memory. Exporting Indicates that the status isvalid while the maps are being exported from the database. Exported Indicates that the status is valid once the maps have been successfully exported. Converting Indicates that the status isvalid while the maps are being converted to the new database tables. Converted Indicates that the status isvalid once the maps have been successfultyoonverted. Applying The status isdisplayed while the objects referencing Legacy maps are updated to reference the newtyaeated maps. Applied The status is displayed once the objects referencing the maps have been successfully updated to point to the newly created map. Error Exporting The status isdisplayed if an error occurred while the mapswere being exported from the database. This status can occur if: • There is limited space on the current hard drive. You can edit the 'CCureMapConverter.exe.00nfig' file that can be found in the same directory as the 'CCureMa pConverter.exe' application, and change the 'CCureMapConversionDirectory' ap pSettIng so that it points to a directory that is boated on a hard drive that has more space. • The map is too large to export. Under these circumstances, you will often see a 'GDr error or an 'OutC4Memory error in the applicable log file. There is no solution for this error. You will need to recreate the map by re-importing the original map graphic and manually recreating the icons, using the legacy map as a model. 284 Appendix B C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225569 Index Editor 27, 270 A General tab 27 Accessing Options tab 29 Application Layout Editor 27 Event Assessment 37 Dynamic View Editor 82 General tab 28 Map Editor 118 modifying 74 Query Editor 147 overview 26 Report Editors 189 tasks 65 Acknowledgement pane 47 Viewers 33 Activity Viewer 35 Assess Event properties 35 Assess Map Viewer 40 tasks 67 Document Viewer 38 Adding Event Details Viewer 39 Activity Viewer to application layout 67 Find in Journal Viewer 39 columns in dynamic views 94 Live Video Viewer 41 Event Viewer to application layout 66 Query Viewer 42 Explorer Bar to application layout 50 Recorded Video Viewer 42 field to report layout 223 Report Viewer 43 header/footer to report 223 Assess Map Viewer 40 Icon to a Map 132,141 Auto Hide and Pinned Pane 76 Object Viewer to application layout 70 page break to report 224 B pane to application layout 69 Buttons for Query General tab 151 Swipe and Show Viewer to application layout 60 tab to application pane 69 C Card View 104 text box/picture/shape/line to report 225 Changing column order/width in Dynamic Adjusting report settings 224 Views 95 Administration mode 111 Choosing Advanced Search, defining Instant Query from 178 Dynamic View settings 84 Advanced tab, Query Editor 152 Report type and Sub type 208 Antipassback gracing Clearing all personnel filters in Dynamic Views 97 in partition 57 map 140 in system 57 Complex Queries 172 Grace Partition tab 57 Configuring Grace Personnel button 55 doors for Swipe and Show Viewers 61 one person 55 Dynamic Views 83 Application Layout 25 external applications 51 configuring 65 maps 80,127 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Index 285 EFTA01225570 Index queries 161 Document Viewer 38 reports 192 Dual Phase Acknowledgement 47 Control 0 (CTRL zero) character, using with Dynamic Card View 104 Queries 157 Dynamic View Conventions used in this manual 14 Card View 104 Creating clearing filters 97 Map 123 creatimg a copy 90 queries 159 default system views 93 query templates 160 editing report form templates 232 in place 102 report forms 232 using Set Property 102 report templates 191 exporting records to reports 191 XLSX 103 sub-reports 211 XML or CSV/XLS 22 Credentials, disabling for inactivity Export Selection button 21 predefined queries for 264 filter bar 106 predefined reports for 258 filtering 96-97 CSV overview 80 exporting to/from Dynamic View 22 pre-defined views Custom Clearance customizing 269 predefined queries for 264 list 268 predefined reports for 259 types 268 Customer Support Center 15 using 269 D printing 101 Data Views object, creating 19 sorting 101 Data Views pane 17-18 tabs 106 Viewing a list of objects 20 toolbar 105 Default Dynamic Views 93 Dynamic View Editor 82 Defining buttons 92 queries from Advanced Search 177 definitions 21 Deleting fields 91 Application Layout 19 tasks 83 Data Views pane object 19 Dynamic View Viewer 93 Dynamic View 19 context menu 20 Map 19 definitions 105 Query 19 tasks 94 Report 19 adding/removing columns 95 report results 242-243 changing column order 95 by setting delete after date 243 filtering information 96 by setting delete after number of days grouping information 85, 88, 99 action 243-244 retrieving query for 101 286 Index C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225571 Index Procedure 97 E Find in Journal Viewer 39 Editing Fit map in window 127,131 Dynamic View record using Set Property 102 in place with Dynamic Views 102 G Map icon 136-137 General tab, Application layout 27 Emergency Support Hours 15 Grace Partition tab 57 Enabling Grace Personnel button 55 filtering for Dynamic Views 97 Grouping Dynamic View Information 85, 88, 99 Event Assessment Application Layout overview 37 H Hardware Status 49 Assess Map Viewer 40 Document Viewer 38 Event Details Viewer 39 Icon Status Toolbar, Maps 121 Find in Journal Viewer 39 Instant Query, defining 178 Live Video Viewer 41 L Query Viewer 42 layout Design tab, for Report Editor Recorded Video Viewer 42 tasks 223 Report Viewer 43 adding field to report layout 223 Event Assessment Application Layout 37 adding header/footer to reports 223 Event Details Viewer 39 adding page break to report 224 Event Viewer 45 adding text box/picture/shape/line to properties 45 report 225 tasks 66 adjusting report settings 224 Excel spreadsheet, exported CSV report into 24 layout Design Tab, for Report Form Editor 231 Explorer Bar 48 definitions 231 properties 48 tasks 235 tasks 50 layout Preview tab, for Report Editor 226 Export Report Document dialog box tasks 228 fields/properties/buttons definitions 249 printing report preview 228 Exporting viewing report preview 228 Dynamic View records to XLSX 103 toolbar buttons 227 Dynamic View to XML or CSV/XLS 22 layout Preview tab, for Report Form Editor 236 Export Selection button 21 tasks 236 report results 248-249 Live Video Viewer 41 Reports 197 Load an external file for a Map 124 External Applications 50 Locking the application layout 76 F M Filtering Manual, how to use 12 Dynamic View information overview 96 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Index 287 EFTA01225572 Index Map Q Editor Queries tasks 123 pre-defined toolbar 113,120 customizing 269 Icon Properties 132,141 list 262 mode 139 overview 254 modifying 140 types 262 Map Viewer 116,143 using 269 Maps, Icon Status Toolbar 121 Query 145 Modifying Advanced Search, defining Instant Query queries 162 from 178 Reports 202 Advanced tab, Editor 152 More 39 definitions 153 N Creating copy 163 Non Hardware Status 49 Criteria Normal Support Hours 15 adding 163 removing 170 0 Editor 147 Object Viewer 54 General tab, Editor 148 properties 54 definitions 148 Options tab, Application Layout 29 definitions for Query Criteria 149 overview 146 Pending Clear pane 47 Parameter Prompts 180 Performing a Query Quick Search 175 retrieving for dynamic view 101 Period Character (.) with F2, using with Queries 157 tasks 159 Pinned application panes 76 unexpected results, interpreting 173 Pre-defined Objects using special characters with 157 customizing 269 using wild cards with 154 example of using 270 Query Viewer, for Assess Events 42 overview 254 Application Layout 42 using 269 Monitoring Station 42 Pre-defined Report Forms 230 Printing R Raster files for a Map 111,124 Dynamic Views 101 Recorded Video Viewer 42 map 140 Removing report forms 237 columns in dynamic views 94 report preview 228 pane from application layout 75 Viewer from pane 75 Report Editor 201 buttons 147, 201 288 Index C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225573 Index Layout Design tab 212 Report Result Editor 239 context menu definitions 217 buttons 239 Format Border Dialog Box 218 Result tab 239 grid definitions 214 definitions 239 Group Order dialog box 217 Report Result Query tab 240 properties sheet definitions 214 Report Result Viewer 245 report page settings definitions 220 buttons 246 Report Page Settings dialog box 219 tasks 248 tasks 223 exporting a report result 248 toolbar definitions 212 toolbar definitions 247 Layout Preview tab 226 Report Results printing report preview 228 context menu definitions 242 tasks 228 overview 238 toolbar buttons 227 tasks 242 viewing report preview 228 deleting 242-243 Report tab viewing list of report results 242 definitions 205 Report Service 190 tasks 207 Report Tab, for Report Editor tasks, Report Editor 202 tasks modifying a report 202 choosing report type and sub type 208 viewing a list of reports 202 creating sub-reports 211 Report Editors, accessing 189 selecting report features 210 Report Fonn Editor 230 using class selector 208 context menu definitions 234 using field selector 209 Layout Design tab 231 Report Viewer 43, 245 definitions 231 buttons 246 tasks 235 tasks 248 Layout Preview tab 236 exporting a report result 248 tasks 236 toolbar definitions 247 pre-defined report forms 230 Report, creating a copy 196 tasks 232 Reporting creating report form templates 232 basic tasks 191 creating report forms 232 overview 186 using report form to format reports 234 Reports viewing list of report forms 234 adding field to layout 223 Report Fonn Viewer 237 adding header/footer 223 printing report forms 237 adding page break 224 viewing report forms 237 adding text box/picture/shape/line 225 Report Forms adjusting report settings 224 creating a copy 233 configuring 192 pre-defined 230 creating 191 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Index 289 EFTA01225574 Index creating a template 191 Sorting Dynamic View Information 101 creating CSV/XIS from Dynamic View 22 Special characters, using with Queries 157 CSV in Excel spreadsheet 24 SQL wild card characters, using with Queries 154 exporting 197 Swipe and Show Viewer 55 exporting XISX from Dynamic View 103 controls 64 modifying 202 description 55 page settings 219 Grace Personnel button 55 pre-defined tasks 59 customizing 269 System variables example of using 270 Reporting 193 list 255 overview 254 T Telephone Technical Support 15 query related 255 Toolbar, Map Editor 113,120 types 255 using 269 U running 193 Unlocking saving 195 application layout 76 scheduling 194 Users guide, how to use 12 viewing a list 202 Using list context menu 202 class selector for reports 208 Resizing and Moving Panes in the Layout 77 Dynamic View Viewer tabs 96 Result tab, for Report Result Editor 239 field selector for reports 209 definitions 239 report form to format reports 234 Running V queries 170 Vector files for a Map 111, 124 Reports 193 Video 50 Runtime mode 111 Viewer Controls 64 S Viewing Saving list of report forms 234 reports 195 list of report results 242 Scheduling list of reports 202 Reports 194 report forms 237 Select object for a Map 136-137,139 report preview 228 Select Type for a Map 133, 138, 141 Selecting w Wild card characters, using with Queries 154 report features 210 Setting X XIS background color for a Map 127 exporting to/from Dynamic View 22 default views 89 XISX Showing, for Maps exporting to/from Dynamic View 103 map layers 128-130 290 Index C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225575 Index XML exporting to/from Dynamic View 22 Zoom Units 131 C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide Index 291 EFTA01225576 Index 292 Index C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide EFTA01225577